(UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide

(UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
UC for Enterprise (UCE)
Application Platform
(UNIVERGE OW5000)
Network Application Middleware
Configuration Guide
NEC NEC Corporation
July 2015
NDA-31085, Revision 9
Liability Disclaimer
NEC Corporation reserves the right to change the specifications,
functions, or features, at any time, without notice.
NEC Corporation has prepared this document for the exclusive use of
its employees and customers. The information contained herein is the
property of NEC Corporation and shall not be reproduced without prior
written approval from NEC Corporation.
NEAX® and Dterm® are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.
© 2015 NEC Corporation
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
All other brand or product names are or may be trademarks or
registered trademarks of, and are used to identify products or services
of, their respective owners.
i
Contents
Introduction
1-1
UNIVERGE OW5000 Configuration Guide Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
How This Guide is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
OW5000 Configuration
2-1
Verifying the OW5000 Administrator Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Microsoft Windows Server 2008, 2008 R2, 2012, and 2012 R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Logging into OW5000 Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Navigation Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Platform Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Settings Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
License Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialing Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Email Notification Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Notification Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Ports Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduling Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IM Archiving Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XMPP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OAI Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avatars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Skills Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Template Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
2-15
2-19
2-24
2-27
2-29
2-30
2-38
2-42
2-42
2-44
2-46
2-51
2-53
2-54
Systems Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
PBX Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIP Registration Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Mail Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Agent Service (ACD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-57
2-66
2-67
2-69
ii
Contents
Collaboration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Data Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Executing a DBTool Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Calendar Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Remote Call Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
Pager Providers Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
Nurse Call Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
Short Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
Hotel Integration Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
Applications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
Incoming Call Assistant Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
Location Status Information Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124
Directory Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
People. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Organization Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locations Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routes/Trunks Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Privileges Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Specialties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restriction Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-131
2-151
2-158
2-160
2-164
2-170
2-172
2-173
2-175
2-178
2-179
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
Licensed Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181
MA4000 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-182
Exiting OW5000 Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-182
WatchDog
3-1
Verifying the WatchDog Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
WatchDog Helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Adding a Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating a Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping a Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting WatchDog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping WatchDog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exiting WatchDog Helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-9
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Contents
Log Viewer
iii
4-1
Log Viewer Support Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Starting Log Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Log Viewer Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Help Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Application Group Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Applications Displayed Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Reload App List Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Configure Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Search Criteria Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Search Results Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Event Information Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Standard Query Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Searching for Logged Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Print Log Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Saving Search Results and Working with Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Real-time Query Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Real-time display of event information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Configuration of OW5000 Application Log Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Change Log Level Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Log File Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Change Query Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Standard/Real-time Query Configuration Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Query Radio Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Max. Number of Results Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real-time Query Radio Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Max. Number of Lines Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IM Archive Viewer
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-25
4-25
5-1
Starting IM Archive Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Using IM Archive Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Specifying a Search Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Displaying IM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
iv
Contents
Saving IM Logs to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daylight Saving Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyword Searching from IM Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exiting IM Archive Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Database Operations
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-6
6-1
OW5000 Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
DBTool (Database Import/Export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Database Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Database Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
DBTool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Import Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Import Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Viewing DBTool Profile Execution Logs in OW5000 Administrator . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Creating a New Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Opening a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Selecting Import Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Mapping Import Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Import Type Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Import Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Open Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-1
Integration Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Enable MA4000 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Disable MA4000 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Pause MA4000 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Resume MA4000 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
OW5000 Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
MA4000 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
MA4000 SQL Server Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Testing the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Data Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
OW5000 to MA4000 Mappings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Contents
v
Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Synchronization Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
PBX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VoiceMail Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Devices import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reserved Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14
7-17
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-25
7-28
Acronyms and Descriptions
Appendix A-1
Regular Expressions
Appendix B-1
Specifications for OW5000 Admin
Appendix C-1
OW5000 Administrator Configuration Specification
Appendix D-1
Single Sign-On
Appendix E-1
Logging into OW5000 Administrator or UCE Applications . . . . . . . . Appendix E-1
Trusted Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-1
LDAP Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-1
OW5000 Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-2
NEC CAS Configuration Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-2
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-2
LDAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-2
Internal DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-2
Single-Sign On based on NEC CAS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-3
NEC CAS Authentication Mode—set to Windows (recommended) . Appendix E-3
NEC CAS Authentication mode—set to LDAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-4
NEC CAS Authentication—set to Internal DB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-4
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
vi
Contents
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
vii
Figures
Figure
1-1
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-23
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-30
2-31
2-32
2-33
2-34
Title
Page
OW5000 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Sites Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Sites Window—Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Website Blocked page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Trusted Sites page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
OW5000 Admin Login screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
New Password Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
OW5000 Administrator Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Navigation Search Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Navigation Search—listing menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
OW5000 Platform Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
OW5000 Settings page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
OW5000 Countries & States page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Adding New Country/Region page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
State/Provinces page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
License Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
License Management—Enable Extensions page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Licensed Information page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Dialing Locations Rules page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Dialing Locations Configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Edit Dialing Location page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Delete Location Confirmation page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Main Dialing Locations page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Area Code Rules Edit page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Email Notification page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Email Notification—Available Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Edit Distribution list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Edit Distribution—Select Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Group Notification Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Ring Tone selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Flashing Colors selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Serial Port Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Serial Port Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Schedule Profile page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
viii
Figures
2-35
2-36
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-41
2-42
2-43
2-44
2-45
2-46
2-47
2-48
2-49
2-50
2-51
2-52
2-53
2-54
2-55
2-56
2-57
2-58
2-59
2-60
2-61
2-62
2-63
2-64
2-65
2-66
2-67
2-68
2-69
2-70
2-71
2-72
2-73
2-74
2-75
2-76
2-77
2-78
2-79
Scheduling (One Time) page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduling (Recurring Daily) page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduling (Recurring Weekly) page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduling (Recurring Monthly) page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Database Backup page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guest Purge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Order Purge page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
History page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IM Archiving Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IM Archiving Management—Configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
History page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XMPP Server page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OAI Server Settings page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBX Settings page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Server List Manager page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add New Access Server page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing Info page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Server—Routing Rule Info page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Server—Test Routing Rule page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Avatar Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add New System Avatar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choose file page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avatar Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Skill Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Skill—Add page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Templates Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Templates Management—Add new page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OW5000 Systems Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBX Management page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBX Configuration—Add New page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete PBX Configuration Confirmation dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBX > PBX Dialing Configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Destination PBX page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Source PBX page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reserved Number page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Reserved Number page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Mail Pilot Numbers page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Voice Mail Pilot number page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIP Registration Server page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add New SIP Registration Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Mail Server Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Mail Server Management—Add New page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACD Server Management—ACD Servers page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACD Servers—Add New page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACD Settings page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31
2-32
2-33
2-34
2-35
2-36
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-42
2-43
2-44
2-45
2-47
2-47
2-49
2-49
2-50
2-51
2-51
2-52
2-52
2-53
2-54
2-54
2-55
2-56
2-57
2-58
2-61
2-61
2-62
2-63
2-63
2-64
2-65
2-66
2-66
2-67
2-67
2-68
2-69
2-69
2-70
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Figures
2-80
2-81
2-82
2-83
2-84
2-85
2-86
2-87
2-88
2-89
2-90
2-91
2-92
2-93
2-94
2-95
2-96
2-97
2-98
2-99
2-100
2-101
2-102
2-103
2-104
2-105
2-106
2-107
2-108
2-109
2-110
2-111
2-112
2-113
2-114
2-115
2-116
2-117
2-118
2-119
2-120
2-121
2-122
2-123
2-124
ix
ACD Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Agent Screen Pop page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Agent Screen Pop page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
ACD Permissions page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
ACD Accounts page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
New ACD Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
No Primary Extension Error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Add ACD with No Server Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
ACD Login—Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
No Primary Extension Error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Add ACD Account—No Server Error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Server Discrepancy—ACD Account and Primary Extension . . . . . . . . . 2-79
ACD Break Modes page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Break Mode Description page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
ACD Work Modes Configuration page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Work Mode Description page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
ACD Split Modes page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Add New Split Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
ACD Split Modes—Edit page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Enable Collaboration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
XL Meeting page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Basic URL page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Client Side page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
CMM page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Dial In Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Input Time Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Select Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Applications and Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Permanent Meeting Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Data Integration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
DBTool Import scheduled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
DBTool Scheduled page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
DBTool Import In Progress page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
DBTool Import Complete page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
Calendar Link—General Settings Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Calendar Link—Email Servers Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Calendar Link Email Server Manager page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Exchange Client Access Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Registrations Status page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
Edit Registration User page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
RCC Setting page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
Normalization Rules page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
Remote Call Control—Normalization Rules page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
Remote Call Control—Test Normalization Rule page . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
Pager Providers Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
x
Figures
2-125
2-126
2-127
2-128
2-129
2-130
2-131
2-132
2-133
2-134
2-135
2-136
2-137
2-138
2-139
2-140
2-141
2-142
2-143
2-144
2-145
2-146
2-147
2-148
2-149
2-150
2-151
2-152
2-153
2-154
2-155
2-156
2-157
2-158
2-159
2-160
2-161
2-162
2-163
2-164
2-165
2-166
2-167
2-168
2-169
Pager Providers—Add New page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nurse Call Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STM Server Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hotel Service Connection Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assign New Hotel Service Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing an Existing Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting an Existing Association Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re-sync Issues and Service orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Issues and Service Order confirmation dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage Custom Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Login Name of a UA5200 User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OW5000 Applications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ICA General Settings page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ICA Redirect Configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redirect Configuration—Add New page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ICA PBX Settings page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LSI Servers Settings page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LSI System Statuses page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LSI Message Settings—Add New Message page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LSI Default Statuses page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LSI PBX Settings Configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OW5000 Directory Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Person Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Person Management—Add Person Information page . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roles page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XL Meeting Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Roles—Add New. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Person Information—Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choose an Avatar page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlink Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Employee Roles—Add New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Method page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Method—Type page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Method—Add External Secondary Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addresses—Add New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address Information page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Person Custom Fields page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manage Guest Settings page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Full Name Display Format page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Full Name Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
URI Format Configuration page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Person Range Delete page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Range Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-108
2-109
2-110
2-111
2-111
2-112
2-113
2-113
2-113
2-114
2-115
2-115
2-116
2-117
2-118
2-120
2-120
2-121
2-124
2-125
2-126
2-126
2-127
2-130
2-131
2-133
2-135
2-136
2-137
2-139
2-140
2-140
2-141
2-142
2-143
2-143
2-144
2-145
2-146
2-147
2-147
2-148
2-148
2-149
2-150
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Figures
2-170
2-171
2-172
2-173
2-174
2-175
2-176
2-177
2-178
2-179
2-180
2-181
2-182
2-183
2-184
2-185
2-186
2-187
2-188
2-189
2-190
2-191
2-192
2-193
2-194
2-195
2-196
2-197
2-198
2-199
2-200
2-201
2-202
2-203
2-204
2-205
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
4-1
4-2
xi
Extensions Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-151
Add New Extension page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152
Range Delete—Extensions page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-156
URI Format Configuration—Extensions page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
User Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158
Organizations Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160
Organization—Add New page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
Organization—Add Locations page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162
Organization—Add Phone Numbers page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162
Organization Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163
Add New Hierarchy—Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163
Hierarchy Under Construction—Organization page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-164
Location Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-165
Add New Location page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166
Add Location Internal Phone page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-167
Add Location External Phone page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-168
Location Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-168
Add New Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
Hierarchy Under Construction—Location page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
Category Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-170
Add New Category page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-170
Category Added page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171
Assign Categories page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171
Position Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172
Position—Add New page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173
Route/Trunk Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173
Route Trunks—Add page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174
User Privilege Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-175
Application Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176
Application Permissions page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177
Specialty Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178
Specialty—Add New page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178
Restriction Classes page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
OW5000 Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
Licensed Information page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181
WatchDog Helper main window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
WatchDog Helper Options page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
WatchDog Helper main window toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
WatchDog Helper shortcut menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
WatchDog Helper Add Service page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
WatchDog Helper Delete Service page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
WatchDog Update Item page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Connect to OW5000 Log page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Connection Failed page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
xii
Figures
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
OW5000 Log Viewer Main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Log Viewer Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Log Viewer Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Application Group Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Applications Displayed Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Search Criteria Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Search by Begin Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Filter Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Search Result Display Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Find Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Event Information Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Print Log Query Results page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Log Viewer Shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Add Bookmark page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Selecting a Created Bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Application Log Properties page—Applications tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Application Log Properties page—Maintenance tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Delete Log File page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Delete Log File—Backup Copy page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Choose Archive Files page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
IM Archive Viewer Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
IM Information Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
IM Search Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Connect to DBTool Login page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
DBTool Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Data Flow using DBTool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Open Profile page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
DBTool Import Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Profile Import Source dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
LDAP Configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
LDAP Server page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Base DN page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Other Settings page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Search Filter page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Example of Import Field Mapping page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
PBX Lookup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Calendar Link Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Extension Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Extension Derivation Rules List page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Assign or Create Derivation Rules for Extensions page . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
URI Generation page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Assign or Create URIs for Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Licenses page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Figures
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-30
6-31
6-32
6-33
6-34
6-35
6-36
6-37
6-38
6-39
6-40
6-41
6-42
6-43
6-44
6-45
6-46
6-47
6-48
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
xiii
Locations page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Custom Hierarchies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Organization page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Organization/Location Hierarchy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Person Settings page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Person Contact Method Settings page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Person URI List page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Person URI Derivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Person URI Derivation fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Select UniqueId . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Update Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Sync Method 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Sync Method 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
OW5000 Database Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Import Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Import Progress—Loading error/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Error/Warnings dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Data Export using DBTool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Open Export Profile page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
DBTool Export Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Export Complete page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Delete Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Delete Options page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Delete Confirmation dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
DbTool Profiles Deletion page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Delete Profile Confirmation dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Confirmation dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
About page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
OW5000 Systems Menu—Data Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Data Integration—Add MA4000 Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Data Integration —Enable MA4000 Integration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Disable MA4000 Integration confirmation page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Deep Link in MA4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Data Integration Text—Passed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Cancel Imports—Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Edit Data Integration information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Data Integration—History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Data Integration—Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Data Integration—Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
General Mapping Options region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
xiv
Figures
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
xv
Tables
Table
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
3-1
3-2
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
Title
Page
Icon Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Scheduler Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
DBTool Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
DBTool Process Completed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
IM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
IM archiving Management Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
PBX IP Address Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Region-based PBX Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
CMM Server Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Meeting Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
CMM SIP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Range of Persons to Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-149
Parameter Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-155
WatchDog Helper main window—columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Main window toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
DBTool Login fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Profile fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
DBTool Import Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Create Profile fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
LDAP Server fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Base DN fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Other Settings fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Search Filter fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Search fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Import Field Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
PBX Lookup—Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Calendar Link Settings fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Calendar Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Extension Settings fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Extension Derivation fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Extension Derivation fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
URI Generation fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
URI Derivation fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Extension Type Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Group Call Pickup Type Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
xvi
Tables
6-21
License fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6-22
License Type Database Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6-23
Location fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6-24
Hierarchy Type For Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6-25
Locations Type Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6-26
Organization fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6-27
Organization Type Database Import Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6-28
Organization/Location Hierarchy fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6-29
Organization/Location Hierarchy Type Database Import Field . . . . . . 6-34
6-30
Person Settings fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6-31
Person Contact Method Settings fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6-32
Person URI Derivation Icons/Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6-33
Person Type Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6-34
Room Direct DID Number Type Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
6-35
Route/Trunk Type Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
6-36
SIPUA Group Type Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
6-37
States/Provinces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
6-38
Profile fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
6-39
Exported Data fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
6-40
Export Settings fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
6-41
Help fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
7-1
MA4000 to OW5000 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-2
MA4000 to OW5000 Integration—Sub-Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-3
Fields Mapping—PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7-4
Fields Mapping—Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7-5
Fields Mapping—Organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7-6
Fields Mapping—VoiceMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7-7
Fields Mapping—User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
7-8
Fields Mapping—Custom Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-9
Fields Mapping—Reserved Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Appendix B-1Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-1
Appendix B-2Normalization Rules (Global Numbers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-2
Appendix B-3Normalization Rules (Local Numbers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-2
Appendix D-1Configuration Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-1
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
1-1
1
Introduction
The UNIVERGE OW5000 Configuration Guide provides the information
you need to configure the OW5000 and related components such as OAI
Server, WatchDog, Log Viewer, and Database operation.
The following topics are included in this chapter:
Chapter Topics
• UNIVERGE OW5000 Configuration Guide Overview
• How This Guide is Organized
UNIVERGE OW5000 Configuration Guide Overview
OW5000 is a collaboration middleware allowing easy application
development in which to communicate with the IP Telephony
environment.
Figure 1-1 OW5000 Applications
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
1-2
Introduction
How This Guide is Organized
Chapter 1
Introduction
This chapter outlines how to use the manual including the organization
and chapter layout of the UNIVERGE OW5000 Configuration Guide.
Chapter 2
OW5000 Configuration
This chapter describes how to operate the OW5000 Administrator
component of UNIVERGE OW5000. The OW5000 Administrator is used
to configure and maintain settings for OW5000 tools and applications.
Chapter 3
WatchDog
This chapter describes how to operate the WatchDog component of
OW5000. WatchDog is used to restart OW5000 applications when you
have a failure.
Chapter 4
Log Viewer
This chapter describes how to operate the Log Viewer component of
OW5000. Log Viewer is used by administrators to view traces of
information produced by OW5000 applications. This includes errors,
warnings, OAI packets, and debug information.
Chapter 5
IM Archive Viewer
Chapter 6
Database Operations
Chapter 7
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
Appendix A
Acronyms and Descriptions
Appendix B
Regular Expressions
This chapter describes how to manage the Instant Message archive files.
This chapter describes how to operate the database Import Tools for
OW5000. This utility is employed to import ASCII data into the
database.
This chapter describes how OW5000 will integrate with MA4000. The
fields and entities that are imported from MA4000 to OW5000 and the
rules that are applied are also described.
This appendix describes some of the terms used in this manual.
This appendix provides the steps needed to create normalization rules
using regular expression.
Appendix C
Specifications for OW5000
Admin
This chapter lists the specifications for OW5000 Administrator.
Appendix D
OW5000 Administrator
Configuration Specification
This chapter lists the specifications for OW5000 Administrator
Configuration.
Appendix E
Single Sign-On
This chapter describes how to configure NEC CAS so users can login to
the UCE Applications using their NTLM Login.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-1
2
OW5000 Configuration
OW5000 Administrator is a robust OW5000 tool used to configure
OW5000 applications, PBX configurations, and utilities without using the
Windows registry editor directly. It also provides a graphical user
interface to modify OW5000 user account information, PBX
configurations, and database entries. The functions and associated
screen displays for configuring user account information in OW5000
Administrator are described in this chapter.
Specific OW5000 application configurations performed by OW5000
Administrator can be found in each application's installation guide.
OW5000 Administrator provides a view of application information,
database information, and platform information.
The following topics are included in this chapter.
Chapter Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Verifying the OW5000 Administrator Status
Logging into OW5000 Administrator
Navigation Search
Platform Menu
Systems Menu
Applications Menu
Directory Menu
Help Menu
After changing an OW5000 configuration, it takes some time before the modification
is available depending on the parameter. Refer to Appendix D for details.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-2
OW5000 Configuration
Verifying the OW5000 Administrator Status
Use the following steps to check the availability of Administrator and to
confirm that the Web server and OW5000 application is running.
Microsoft Windows Server 2008, 2008 R2, 2012, and 2012 R2
Step 1
From the desktop, click the Start button and then select Control Panel >
Administrative Tools > Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager.
Step 2
Select Sites from the (IIS) Manager. Figure 2-1 displays.
Figure 2-1 Sites Window
Step 3
If the Default Web Site is not started, select Default Web Site and click
Start on the right pane under Manage Web Site (Figure 2-2).
Figure 2-2 Sites Window—Start
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows Server 2012, select Start >
Administrative Tools > Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-3
Logging into OW5000 Administrator
Each time you work with OW5000 Administrator, log in with your
OW5000 login ID and password. If this is the first time you are logging
in to the OW5000 Administrator, use the default Login ID admin and the
default password for admin is admin.
When you have finished using the application, you can either log out or
just close your browser.
Step 1
From the desktop, click the Start button and then select All Programs >
NEC OW5000 > Runtime Platform > OW5000 Administrator. An
OW5000 Admin Login screen displays (Figure 2-5).
If the screen shown in Figure 2-5 does not display, refer to “Verifying the OW5000
Administrator Status” on page 2-2, to confirm that the proper services are running.
REFERENCE
The following security settings for Internet Explorer 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 are required to
use OW5000 Administrator. The default is Enable for all items.
NOTE
• ActiveX controls and plug-ins - Binary and script behaviors: Enable
• Miscellaneous - Submit non-encrypted form data: Enable
• Scripting - Active scripting: Enable
If you see a web site blocked page and you have not added your OW5000 Server to
the Trusted sites zone, do the following: (Figure 2-3).
IMPORTANT
Figure 2-3 Website Blocked page
Step 2
Click Add. A Trusted Sites page displays (Figure 2-4).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-4
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-4 Trusted Sites page
Step 3
Uncheck Require server verification (https:) for all steps in this
zone, then click Add to include this Web site in the trusted sites zone.
Step 4
Click Close. An OW5000 Administrator Login page displays 
(Figure 2-5).
Figure 2-5 OW5000 Admin Login screen
Step 5
Enter your Login ID in the Login ID field.
The Login ID is admin.
NOTE
Step 6
Enter your password in the Password field.
The password for admin is admin. This password can be changed. Refer to “User
Management” on page 2-158.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 7
REFERENCE
2-5
Click Login.
If an error message describing a problem connecting to the OW5000 Administrator
Service displays, refer to “Verifying the OW5000 Administrator Status” on page 2-2 to
confirm that the proper services are running.
If there is no activity for 15 minutes (default), the Administrator login page displays
and re-login is required. After login, a pre-configured page displays.
NOTE
After the initial login, you are required to change your password to a strict
password (Figure 2-6).
Figure 2-6 Change Password
Step 8
Enter a new password in the New Password field. The length of the
password must be at least eight characters long and include the
following rules:
—1 Uppercase letter (A-Z)
—1 Lowercase letter (a-z)
—1 Digit (0-9)
—1 Special Character (excluding a space, square brackets, backslash,
and single or double quotes)
Step 9
Enter the new password again in the Confirm New Password field and
click Change Password. Figure 2-7 displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-6
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-7 New Password Login
Step 10 Enter the new password and click Login. Figure 2-8 displays.
Figure 2-8 OW5000 Administrator Control Panel
The Administrator Control Panel (Figure 2-8) has a search feature and
five top-level menu items.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Navigation Search
Platform Menu
Systems Menu
Applications Menu
Directory Menu
Help Menu
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-7
Navigation Search
A navigation search is available to quickly find related menu items, then
quickly navigate to the associated page.
As you start typing, the search box is populated with related menu
items based on the menu item's name. For example, the letter c is
typed in the search field and displays the following data (Figure 2-9).
Figure 2-9 Navigation Search Results
The search criteria text is highlighted.
There are two ways to search using the navigation search box.
• Select one of the suggestions/search results in the autocomplete drop
area and click the search icon.

The search assumes that you found what you’re looking for and takes
you directly to the page associated with the selected menu item. The
autocomplete area only shows results based on search menu item
names.
• Click the search icon without selecting an option from the
autocomplete drop area. If you are not sure which menu item to
choose, or you do not see the desired result, the search icon can be
clicked with the partially entered search text. (See the results in
Figure 2-9, with just the letter c entered). After clicking the search
icon, a page displays with suggested menu item links and link
summaries. The search performed this way searches a set of
predefined data stored in the OW5000 database. It is not limited to
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-8
OW5000 Configuration
searching only menu item names.

The search displays a list of menu items (Figure 2-10), along with a
brief description about the page (stored in the database).
Figure 2-10 Navigation Search—listing menu items
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Platform Menu
Selecting Platform from the OW5000 Administration Control Panel
(Figure 2-8) displays Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-11 OW5000 Platform Menu
The following topics are included in this section: Refer to each
application's documentation for more details.
The menu items available are based on user authorizations, sales region, whether or
not an application is installed, and if the associated application has available
licenses.
NOTE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Settings Configuration
License Management
Dialing Locations
Email Notification Configuration
Group Notification Settings
Serial Ports Configuration
Scheduling Manager
IM Archiving Management
Application Data Management
XMPP Server
OAI Server Configuration
Access Server Configuration
Avatars
Skills Management
Template Management
The table below describes icons used in the OW5000 Administrator
(Table 2-1).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-9
2-10
OW5000 Configuration
Table 2-1 Icon Descriptions
Icons
Description
Edit the current data.
Delete the current data.
Assign/Update the data without leaving the current page.
Assign/Update the data and continue to assign another entry
without leaving the current page.
Cancel all non-updated data and return to the list page.
Assign/Update the data and return to the list page.
Sort by ascending order for the parameter.
Sort by descending order for the parameter.
Sets the display page number/display lines in a page.
Up priority.
Down priority
Indicates the menu item is collapsed.
Indicates the menu item is expanded.
Do not use the Back, Forward, Refresh button, or the Enter key after logging into
OW5000 Administrator.
NOTE
If an error displays while using OW5000 Administrator, read the information carefully.
If necessary, go back to the login window and log in again.
NOTE
An asterisk (*) indicates a mandatory parameter.
NOTE
By default, 20 items are listed on one page. This can be increased to a maximum of
500 items per page.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
IMPORTANT
2-11
The Apply button works only on the data currently displayed. To assign new data,
use the back up list page. Only the Extension Management, Reserved Number and
Skills Management page has an Apply & Add New button, allowing you to add new
data continuously on the same page.
Settings Configuration
Selecting Settings from the OW5000 Platform Menu (Figure 2-11),
displays an OW5000 Settings page (Figure 2-12).
General Settings
Follow the steps below to configure General Settings. The following
figure is an example when the United States is selected as the Sales
Region.
Figure 2-12 OW5000 Settings page
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-12
OW5000 Configuration
Step 1
Select the Default Country Code from the drop list.
The country selected in the Default Country Code drop list will be used
when an address or phone numbers are created in OW5000 that do not
have their own country or country code for dialing designator.
NOTE
This Default Country Code selection is the “Is Default for Install” value on the
Countries & States page. There can be only one country selected for the “Is Default
for Install” value.
Step 2
Enter the Reporting Services URL. The OW5000 installed server is set
as the default URL. This parameter is displayed only when the
United States is selected as the Sales Region.
Step 3
Select Upload Reports. Reports must be uploaded to the report server
before they can be executed.
Step 4
Select the Default Home Page. The Extension or Person page can be
selected as the default page when you log into OW5000 Administrator.
When logging in after a session timeout, the last page you used before the timeout
displays; not the Default Home Page.
NOTE
Step 5
To set the password to never expire for the user, click the check box
Password never expires.

When Password never expires is checked, set the validity period for
the password. This parameter is disabled if Password Never Expires is
set.
Step 6
In the License Manager Connection Information section, do the
following:
—enter the IP Address/Name and the Port number to set the LMC
server connection IP Address. This is a mandatory parameter.
—enter the Port number to set the LMC Server connection port. This is a
mandatory parameter.
This configuration is not required when Asia is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
Step 7
Enter the following information to configure a connection to an existing
SMTP server. This should be configured for applications that utilize
sending email as part of their feature set.
—Enter the SMTP Server Name. The domain name of the SMTP server.
This is mandatory if configuring SMTP.
—Enter the SMTP Server Port. The listening port for the SMTP server.
This is mandatory if configuring SMTP. The default SMTP port is 25.
—Enter the Secure SMTP Port and clear the SMTP Server port if your
SMTP server uses a secure port connection.
—Enter the Username used to log in to the SMTP server. Optional field.
—Enter the Password for the SMTP server. Optional field. The maximum
supported password length is 24 characters.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-13
—Enter the Sender Email. This is a mandatory field for configuring the
SMTP server. The Sender email must be a valid account on the SMTP
server. All email sent from OW5000 applications, such as system alert
email, will have this user as the sender. It is recommended to create a
generic OW5000 System Admin user email account on the SMTP
server, so that alert email sent from OW5000 will be obvious.
Step 8
The NEC CAS Settings field will be disabled if MA4000 Integration has
been configured. This value will be editable when MA4000 Integration is
not configured. NEC CAS is a must if Single Sign-On is required.
—NECCAS URL - If MA4000 integration is configured, this field will be
read only. If MA4000 integration is not used, the NECCAS URL can be
entered here to allow OW5000 applications to use NECCAS for
authentication. (For example, Windows Authentication or LDAP). See
Appendix E of this manual for more information.
—Enable NECCAS Login - This checkbox determines if NEC CAS is to
be used for Single Sign On. If MA4000 Integration is configured and
enabled, the checkbox will be checked and grayed. If MA4000
Integration is not configured or not enabled then the checkbox will be
enabled. Note that this only affects OW5000 Administrator Single
Sign-On.
Step 9
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the specialty.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
This configuration is supported in the U.S. market only.
NOTE
Countries & States
The Countries & States tab shows a list of countries and states
configured in the OW5000 database. OW5000 provides a list of states
for the countries of the United States of America, Japan, Canada and
China. New countries and states can be added as well as the default
data updated.
Field
Country Code
Description Value
The country or regions country code value that will be used for
number dialing.
Is Default for Install
The country code value for the country selected as the Default for
Install will be used as the default country code displayed when
creating new external numbers.
Is Default for CountryCode
For each country that shares a country code with another country,
there can be only one country selected as the default for that country
code value. When dynamically showing or creating an external
number that has a country code shared by multiple countries, the
country marked as the Default for that country code will be used for
display.
Follow the steps below to configure Countries & States.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-14
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-13 OW5000 Countries & States page
Adding a New Country
Step 1
Click Add New Country/Region in the Countries & States page 
(Figure 2-13). Figure 2-14 displays.
Figure 2-14 Adding New Country/Region page
Step 2
Enter the Description and the Country Code.
Is Default For Install is disabled when adding a new country and this value can only
be modified from the General Settings tab.
NOTE
Step 3
NOTE
Check the Is Default For CountryCode checkbox if the new country is
treated as the default country when more than one country has the same
country code.
Editing a country or creating a new country and selecting Is Default For Country
Code for a Country Code that already exists will uncheck or set to false this value for
the country that previously was the default for the country code.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
2-15
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the record.
—Click Done to save the record and close the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
Adding New Region
Step 1
Select the target Country from the country list (Figure 2-13). State/
Provinces displays at the bottom of list.
Step 2
Click Add New State/Province. A State/Provinces page displays (Figure
2-15).
Figure 2-15 State/Provinces page
Step 3
Enter the Name and Code.
The same state name and code cannot be used for more than one entry.
NOTE
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the record.
—Click Done to save the record and close the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
License Management
Selecting Licenses from the OW5000 Platform Menu (Figure 2-11)
displays a License Management page (Figure 2-16). Use this option to
Enable PBXs, Enable Extensions, and to display the Licensed
Information.
PBX Configuration and Extension configuration must be done before this license
configuration.
NOTE
For the US, Australian and European markets, you must first configure
the License Manager IP Address and the Port information in OW5000
Administrator > Platform > Settings. Refer to the UC for Enterprise
(UCE) Mobility (UNIVERGE MC550) Installation Guide for more details.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-16
OW5000 Configuration
Enable PBXs
Follow the steps below to enable PBXs.
Figure 2-16 License Management page
Step 1
Click the Enable PBXs tab to select the desired PBX.
Step 2
To disable a PBX that is enabled, click to remove the check mark.
Step 3
Click Apply.
• If the PBX license is inactivated, the Extensions license belonging to the PBX is
also inactivated.
NOTE
• Installed and Current license is displayed at the top of the Enable PBX page 
(Figure 2-17). Ent. license indicates the number of licenses not used by SV8300/
IPS.
Enable Extensions
Selecting Enable Extensions from Figure 2-16 displays a License
Management—Enable Extensions page.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-17
Figure 2-17 License Management—Enable Extensions page
Enable the PBX before working with Extensions.
NOTE
Please note the license type below:
API
Client license. Set for all extensions that are controlled by
the OW5000.
PRESENCE SIP Presence

Refer to the UNIVERGE OW5000 Getting Started Guide.
NOTE
Step 1
Select the PBX from the drop menu or enter a PBX name and then click
Search.
Step 2
To enable extensions, click in the desired PBX check box.
Step 3
Click Apply to save the changes.
In Figure 2-17, the Current row displays the number of licenses already assigned.
The Ent. (Enterprise) column displays the licenses, except for those assigned to the
IPS.
Licensed Information
This page displays the current number of licenses in a system and only
the region using License Manager.
Selecting Licensed Information from Figure 2-16 displays a 
Licensed Information page.
Figure 2-18 does not display when Asia is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-18
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-18 Licensed Information page
Licenses - This field is sortable.
Total Licenses (PBX) - This field is sortable and indicates the total
licenses in a system using the same PBX as the LMS host PBX. For
example, if three OW5000 servers are connected with the same LMC, all
administrators can see the same number of total licenses from the
Admin License Management page.
Total Licenses (Server) - This field indicates the total number of
licenses assigned to this server. This is assigned at the LMC web page.
Used Licenses (Server) - This field is sortable and indicates the used
licenses in a system using the same PBX as the LMS host PBX. For
example, if three OW5000 servers are connected with the same LMC, all
administrators can see the same number of used licenses from the
Admin License Management page.
Results per page - This sets the number of records to be displayed on
each page.
Page - This sets the target page to be displayed.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-19
Dialing Locations
Dialing Locations are displayed on the PBX configuration page. A PBX
must be associated with one dialing location in order to correctly dial
external numbers or parse incoming numbers for OW5000 applications.
Selecting Dialing Locations from the OW5000 Platform Menu 
(Figure 2-11) displays a Dialing Locations Rules page.
Figure 2-19 Dialing Locations Rules page
Adding Dialing Locations
Use the following steps to add a Dialing Location for a given PBX.
Step 1
Click Add New Location to display a Dialing Locations Configuration
page.
Figure 2-20 Dialing Locations Configuration page
Step 2
Enter a descriptive identifier for the location in the Location Name field.
This is a label used to identify this Location configuration and its
associated dialing rules. It is viewable on various list boxes to identify the
location associated with this PBX, and it is selectable for other PBXs
sharing the same dialing properties for this geographic area. Enter
something descriptive, such as the city name that will allow yourself and
other administrators to infer associated rules for this locale.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-20
OW5000 Configuration
Step 3
Enter the Country Code for this location in the Country Code field. This
value will be used when deciding whether or not a called destination is in
the same country. Called destinations outside the configured country will
be dialed as: long distance access code + international direct dial code +
country code + number or E.164 format. E.164 format is used for LCS/
OCS integration and OW5000 API (Call Control) makeCallWithDialNum
method (dialAsIs=false).
Step 4
Enter the City/Area Code used by the PBX in the City/Area Code field.
This value will be used when deciding whether or not a called destination
is local or long distance. By default, called numbers within the same city/
area code will NOT have the city/area code inserted between the local
access code and the number to dial, unless a City/Area Code rule has
been defined to change this behavior. Also by default, called numbers to
destinations with different city/area codes will automatically have the
national direct dial code inserted between the long distance access code
and the number, unless a separate City/Area Code rule has been defined
to prevent this.
Step 5
Enter the PBX access code needed to dial Long Distance from the PBX
in the Long Dist Access Code field. Long distance is defined in
OW5000 as calls to city/area codes different than the city/area code of
the location for the calling extension. The national direct dial code will
automatically be inserted after the Long Dist Access Code prior to the
city/area code, so it is not necessary to enter the national direct dial code
as part of the Long Dist Access Code. If this PBX is in a metropolitan
area with multiple city/area codes that should not be treated as long
distance, use a City/Area Code Rule to differentiate other local city/area
codes so the national direct dial code will not be inserted after the Local
Access Code (note that the Local Access Code is used in place of the
Long Distance Access Code in this instance).
Step 6
Enter the PBX access code needed to dial local calls from the PBX in the
Local Access Code field. This should include the code to dial out of the
PBX along with any digits that are required to place local calls by the
local carrier and/or central office switch.
Step 7
Enter the direct dial code for dialing international numbers in the Int.
Direct Dial Code field. This is the code required to dial an international
number, which will be inserted between the long distance access code
and the country code. If you are not making an international call with an
E.164 format, configuration is not needed.
Step 8
Enter the direct dial code for dialing numbers inside the country but
outside the current city/area code in the National Code field. This code
will be inserted between the long distance access code and the city/area
code.
Step 9
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to add the Location. Area Code Rules can now be added
for this dialing location.
—Click Done to add the Location and return to the Dialing Location's
main page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes and return to the
Dialing Location's main page.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-21
Editing Dialing Locations
Use the following steps to edit Dialing Locations.
Step 1
Click the Pencil icon for the Dialing Location to edit from the Dialing
Locations main page. An Edit Dialing Location page displays.
Figure 2-21 Edit Dialing Location page
Step 2
After changing the configuration, do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Done to save the information and return to the Dialing Location’s
main page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes and return to the
Dialing Location’s main page.
Deleting Locations
Use the following steps to remove a Dialing Location.
Step 1
Click the Trashcan icon for the Dialing Location to delete from the
Dialing Locations main page. A Delete Location Confirmation page
displays.
Figure 2-22 Delete Location Confirmation page
Step 2
Click OK to delete this location or Cancel to exit the page and keep this
location configuration.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-22
OW5000 Configuration
Area Code Rules
If special rules exist for this location; such as requiring dialed numbers
to the same city/area code have the city/area code inserted (10 digit
dialing in United States), treating numbers with a different city/area
code as local, or treating certain numbers within the same city/area
code as long distance, click Add New Area Code Rules.

Without special rules, OW5000 will assume dialed numbers to the same
city/area code as the location are local and dial the local access code
plus the number (with city/area code removed). Calls to numbers
outside the given city/area code are treated as long distance such that
the Long Dist Access Code is dialed followed by the national direct dial
code + area code and phone number. You will be prompted to save the
changes you have made thus far for the Location before proceeding.
Area code rules are configured per Dialing Location. To see a list of all
area code rules configured navigate to Platform > Dialing Locations
and then select the Area Code Rules link (Figure 2-21).
To see and edit the area code rules for a single Dialing Location, edit the
Dialing location from the Main Dialing Locations page.
Figure 2-23 Main Dialing Locations page
Step 1
To add a rule, click Add New Area Code Rule. An Area Code Rules Edit
page displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-23
Figure 2-24 Area Code Rules Edit page
Step 2
NOTE
Select a location from the Locations drop list.
If editing a Dialing Location, the location will show the name of the Dialing Location
being edited and cannot be changed. If Add New Area Code was selected from the
main Area Code Rules page, then a drop list of configured Dialing Locations will be
available.
Step 3
In the Target City/Area Code field, enter the area code that should have
a special rule when dialed. This field is required.
Step 4
If a specific exchange within the target city/area code requires a special
dialing rule, enter this number in the Target Exchange field. For
example, if most numbers within the 214 area code are considered local,
but a number such as (214) 335-1234 is long distance, enter “335” for
the target exchange. If this rule applies to all exchanges within the city/
area code (as can be the case for 10-digit dialing), leave this field blank.
Step 5
If the rule you are adding requires a direct dial code access code to be
added between the local or long distance access code for this location
and the number to dial, enter this code in the Direct Dial Code field. If no
special digits are required, leave this field blank. The Local or Long
Distance Access Code for the location will always be dialed regardless of
the value in this field, so do not include these as part of the Direct Dial
Code.
Step 6
If the target city/area code is to be inserted when dialing this area code,
check the box Include City/Area Code. This box is needed to specify
10-digit dialing for local calls in United States.
Step 7
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the area code.
—Click Done to save the Area Code Rule and return to the Area Code
Rule list.
—Click Cancel to exit the page without saving and return to the Area
Code Rule list.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-24
OW5000 Configuration
Email Notification Configuration
Email Notification uses the SMTP mail configuration on the Platform >
Settings page to send an Email notification, based on a predefined
application event. A distribution list of recipients can be created per
event or shared for all events. Recipients can be a free form typed Email
address or added from a person in the OW5000 database.
Selecting Email Notification from the OW5000 Platform Menu 
(Figure 2-11) displays an Email Notification page.
This configuration is available only when the appropriate service is installed.
NOTE
Figure 2-25 Email Notification page
OW5000 Monitor Service installs when OW5000 Platform is installed and
will show in the Available Applications drop list. It sends notifications
when hard disk space is running low, as shown in Figure 2-25.
If other applications are installed, you can edit or cancel email
notifications using the Email Notification page.
Step 1
To configure the SMTP Server Settings, follow the steps below. For more
information, refer to “Settings Configuration” on page 2-11.
Step 2
Select Platform > Settings and enter the following information to
configure a connection to an existing SMTP server. This should be
configured for applications that utilize sending email as part of their
feature set.
—Enter the SMTP Server Name. The domain name of the SMTP server.
This is mandatory if configuring SMTP.
—Enter the SMTP Server Port. The listening port for the SMTP server.
This is mandatory if configuring SMTP. The default SMTP port is 25.
—Enter the Secure SMTP Port and clear the SMTP Server port if your
SMTP server uses a secure port connection.
—Enter the User name used to log in to the SMTP server. Optional field.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-25
—Enter the password for the SMTP server. Optional field. The maximum
supported password length is 24 characters.
—Enter the Sender email. This is a mandatory field for configuring the
SMTP server. The Sender email must be a valid account on the SMTP
server. All email sent from OW5000 applications, such as system alert
email, will have this user as the sender. It is recommended to create a
generic OW5000 System Admin user email account on the SMTP
server, so that alert email sent from OW5000 will be obvious.
Step 3
Select the application to configure from the Available Applications list.
Figure 2-26 Email Notification—Available Applications
Step 4
Press the > icon to modify the distribution list for an event. Patient Link is
selected in the example below (Figure 2-27).
Figure 2-27 Edit Distribution list
Step 5
Do one of the following:
—Enter an email address and press the Add button.
—Press the Select Person button to display Figure 2-28.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-26
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-28 Edit Distribution—Select Person
—Search for the person or click the > icon to select from the list. Select
the available email address for the person. The distribution list page
displays.
—(Optional) Press the Apply Distribution List To All Events button.
This will copy and overwrite the distribution list to other events for the
selected application.
Step 6
Press Done to return to the list of events for the selected application.
Step 7
Repeat the steps for all available applications.
Modifying the Email Notification Message Text
Step 1
Select the desired application from the Available Applications list.
Step 2
Press the Pencil icon to add additional text to be appended to the
Default Message Text.
The Default Message Text cannot be changed.
NOTE
Step 3
Press Save to return to the selected Applications event list (Figure 2-26).
The additional text is displayed in the User Message Text column.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-27
Turning Notifications On/Off for Events
Step 1
Select the desired application from the Available Applications list.
Step 2
Uncheck or check the check box in the Active column for the event to
modify.
Step 3
Press Save to commit the changes or press Cancel to restore the
previous check box states.
Group Notification Settings
Group Notification allows a user to send a message to a distribution list
created by picking recipients based on their Organization or Location.
The message will be sent to the selected recipient's Work email address,
Instant Message address and their Dterm XML phone. The message will
be sent to all three contacts methods if they are available.
Group Notification Settings allows configuring the behavior of the Group
Notification message on the Dterm XML phone.
Requires installation and configuration of the UCE Dterm Application.
NOTE
Selecting Group Notification from the OW5000 Platform page 
(Figure 2-11) displays a Notification Configuration page (Figure 2-29).
Figure 2-29 Group Notification Settings
Step 1
To enable/disable the audible alert, select or deselect Enable ring on
notifications. The default is enabled.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-28
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-30 Ring Tone selection
Step 2
Select the Ring Tone from the drop list (Figure 2-30). The default is
enabled. There are fourteen ring tones available.
Step 3
Enter the number of seconds the phone will ring in the Ring Period field.
DT800 series phones are required to configure the period.
Step 4
To enable/disable the flashing lamp, select or deselect Enable flashing
lamp on notifications. The default is disabled.
Figure 2-31 Flashing Colors selection
Step 5
Select the Flashing Colors from the drop list (Figure 2-31). There are
eight different colors available.
Step 6
Enter the number of seconds the phone will flash in the Flash Period
field. DT800 series phones are required to configure the period.
Step 7
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-29
Serial Ports Configuration
Selecting Serial Ports from the OW5000 Platform page (Figure 2-11),
displays a Serial Port Management page (Figure 2-32).
Serial Ports are used for configuring Alpha Pager contact methods that will use the
TAP protocol through a modem connected to the OW5000 server.
NOTE
Figure 2-32 displays only if the United States is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
Figure 2-32 Serial Port Management page
Step 1
To add a serial port, click Add New Serial Port. A Serial Port
Management page displays (Figure 2-33).
Figure 2-33 Serial Port Management page
Step 2
Enter the information in the following fields:
—Serial Port
—Baud Rate
—DataBits ID
—Parity
—Stop Bits
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-30
OW5000 Configuration
—Flow Control
Select the HardWare Flow Control option for TAP page support.
TIP
Step 3
To edit or delete a serial port, select the Pencil icon or the Trashcan
icon.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Done to save the information and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
Scheduling Manager
OW5000 provides schedule functionality of data import/export and
database backup. It allows a variety of scheduling types such as onetime, daily, weekly and monthly. Also, the history page shows the result
of the schedule.
Creating a DBTool Schedule
Selecting Scheduling from the OW5000 Platform Menu (Figure 2-11),
displays a Schedule Profile page (Figure 2-34).
The Import file used for the Schedule must be stored at OW5000 platform server.
IMPORTANT
One profile can specify only one Schedule.
NOTE
Figure 2-34 Schedule Profile page
Step 1
When scheduling an existing profile, click the Pencil icon to display a
Scheduling (One Time) page (Figure 2-35). To delete or cancel a
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-31
schedule, click the Trashcan icon. Refer to Chapter 6, "Database
Operations" on page 6-1 for information on creating a DBTool Profile.
Refer to Database Operations to create a DBTool file.
NOTE
Figure 2-35 Scheduling (One Time) page
Step 2
Check the Enabled check box. When checked, the scheduled profile is
available.
Step 3
Select the Recurring Type from the drop list. Selection options are One
Time (non-recurring), or Recurring. If recurring is selected, a frequency
of daily, weekly, or monthly is available for selection. The display screen
is dependent on the kind of schedule created. 

Duration of Recurrence is used to configure a detailed schedule.
Start Date: Sets the start date of this schedule.
Start Time: Sets the start time of this schedule.
End By:
Sets the end date of this schedule. Select No End
Date when you do not need to set an end date.
If a One Time schedule is set before the current time, the schedule will not be
executed.
NOTE
A One Time schedule only needs the start date and time. A Recurring schedule
needs the setting of Recurrence Pattern in addition to the Duration of Recurrence.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-32
OW5000 Configuration
Start Time should be configured based on following definition:
NOTE
00:00-00:59
01:00-11:59
12:00-12:59
13:00-23:59
--> 12:00AM-12:59AM
--> 01:00AM-11:59AM
--> 12:00PM-12:59PM
--> 01:00PM-11:59PM
For instance, if you select Recurring from the Schedule Type drop list
and select Daily as the Recurrence Pattern, Figure 2-36 displays.
Figure 2-36 Scheduling (Recurring Daily) page
This Schedule is executed on a daily basis. Set 1 to run the schedule
import/export everyday.
NOTE
If a date is set for a month that does not have that many days in it, the schedule for
the month will not be set. For example, if you select 29 and February only has 28
days, the schedule will not be set.
Duration of Recurrence is used to configure a detailed schedule.
Start Date: Sets the start date of this schedule.
Start Time: Sets the start time of this schedule.
End By:
Sets the end date of this schedule. Select No End
Date when you do not need to set an end date.
Selecting Weekly as the Recurrence Pattern displays Figure 2-37.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-33
Figure 2-37 Scheduling (Recurring Weekly) page
This schedule is executed on a weekly basis. Set 1 to run the schedule
import/export every week.
Duration of Recurrence is used to configure a detailed schedule.
Start Date: Sets the start date of this schedule.
Start Time: Sets the start time of this schedule.
End By:
Sets the end date of this schedule. Select No End
Date when you do not need to set an end date.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-34
OW5000 Configuration
Selecting Monthly as the Recurrence Pattern displays Figure 2-38.
Figure 2-38 Scheduling (Recurring Monthly) page
This schedule is executed on a monthly basis. Set 1 to run the schedule
import/export every month.
Duration of Recurrence is used to configure a detailed schedule.
Start Date: Sets the start date of this schedule.
Start Time: Sets the start time of this schedule.
End By:
Sets the end date of this schedule. Select No End
Date when you do not need to set an end date.
Confirmation of Schedule Results
To confirm the schedule results, use the Log Viewer by following the
steps below.
Step 1
Click Start > All Programs > NEC OW5000 > Runtime Platform >
LogViewer, and then select Scheduler and DBTool, which includes the
log of confirmation dates, and then click Start Search.
When the scheduler is executed, the following event is logged 
(Table 2-2).
Table 2-2 Scheduler Execution
Severity
Debug
Application
Scheduler
Description
Successfully executed.DbToolPlugin:
When the DBTool is executed, the following event is logged (Table 2-3).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-35
Table 2-3 DBTool Execution
Severity
Info
Application
DBTool
Description
New Application has started logging: APP:DBTool PID:
<PID #> TID:<TID #> USER:Administrator MACHINE:
<OW5000 server name> EXE:C:\Program
Files\NEC\OW5000\DBTools\DBToolConsole.exe
EventSource:OAIMsg.dll.
When the DBTool process is completed, the following event is logged
(Table 2-4).
Table 2-4 DBTool Process Completed
Severity
Dbug
Application
DBTool
Description
Closing Log
If a schedule is not executed correctly, an Error event is logged between the
executed and completed event.
Creating a Database Backup Schedule
Step 1
Click the Database Backup tab to display Figure 2-39.
Figure 2-39 Database Backup page
Step 2
Enter the number of days in the Retention Days edit box to define the
amount of time the backup file will be kept in the server. Default is 14
days.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-36
OW5000 Configuration
Step 3
Enter the File Name to define the saved backup file name. The file is
always backed-up to the same location as where SQL Server is installed.
When adding or changing the File Name, the Test File Path button must
be clicked to confirm that the database backup file can be created.
Step 4
Set the schedule based on your requirements. Refer to “Creating a
DBTool Schedule” on page 2-30 for more details.
The OW5000 database backup is always set to Recurring. One time backup of the
OW5000 database is not allowed through the Scheduling Manager.
IMPORTANT
Guest Purge
The Guest Purge tab is displayed when the UA5200 Hospitality System License is
activated, which enables the Guest role in the OW5000 database.
Step 1
Click the Guest Purge tab to display Figure 2-40. This page displays the
results of the schedule process for both DBTool and Database Backup.
Figure 2-40 Guest Purge
Step 2
Enter the Description Name for the Guest Purge Schedule.
Step 3
Enter the number of days in the Retention Days edit box to define the
number of days a checked out guest will remain before being purged.
Example: A Retention of 1 means that after the guest is in the checked
out state for at least 24 hours, it is eligible to be purged at the next
scheduled purge execution time. The default is 1 day.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-37
Step 4
Check the Enabled check box. When checked, the scheduled profile is
available.
Step 5
Select the Recurring Type from the drop list. Selection options are One
Time (non-recurring), or Recurring. If recurring is selected, a frequency
of daily, weekly, or monthly is available for selection. The display screen
is dependent on the kind of schedule created.
If a one-time immediate guest purge is executed, be sure to reset the scheduled
recurring guest purge if one was configured.
IMPORTANT
Step 6
Set the schedule based on your requirements. Refer to “Creating a
DBTool Schedule” on page 2-30 for more details.
“If 0 is set in the Retention Days edit box, all the guests in checked-out state will be
purged on the first occurring purge execution.
NOTE
Service Order Purge
The Service Order Purge tab will be displayed when the Hotel
Integration application is installed.
Step 1
Click the Service Order Purge tab to display Figure 2-41.
Figure 2-41 Service Order Purge page
Step 2
Enter the number of days in the Retention Days edit box to define the
amount of time the service orders will be kept in the server. Default is 14
days.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-38
OW5000 Configuration
Step 3
Check the Enabled check box. When checked, the scheduled profile is
available.
Step 4
Select the Recurring Type from the drop list. Selection options are One
Time (non-recurring), or Recurring. If recurring is selected, a frequency
of daily, weekly, or monthly is available for selection. The display screen
is dependent on the kind of schedule created.
If a one-time immediate service order purge is executed, be sure to reset the
scheduled recurring service order purge if one was configured.
IMPORTANT
Step 5
Set the schedule based on your requirements. Refer to “Creating a
DBTool Schedule” on page 2-30 for more details.
History
Step 1
Click the History tab to display Figure 2-42. This page displays the
results of the schedule process for DBTool, Database Backup, and Guest
Purge. Service Order Purge events are not seen in the History tab.
Figure 2-42 History page
When a schedule is executed, the Type, Event Name, Date and the
results display. If the schedule process fails, click on the icon (left side)
of the results information. The request is then executed immediately.
IM Archiving Management
Using the IM Archiving Management option, you can configure IM
archiving for the OW5000 system. This configuration page is restricted,
and only a user who has special privileges can see the Instant Message
menu.
Adding IM Archiving privileges for a User
Use the steps below to display the IM Archiving Management menu. It is
assumed that the user, who manages IM Archiving configurations, has
already been created and has a User role.
Step 1
Login as administrator. For more information, refer to Chapter 2,
"Logging into OW5000 Administrator" on page 2-3.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-39
Step 2
Click Directory > People and then select the desired user who should
have IM Archiving Management privileges. Note that admin cannot have
this privilege for security reason.
Step 3
Click the Role link and select the User role. Check IM Admin security
permission, then click Apply or Done.
The user who has IM Archiving Management privileges may be able to see all IM
sessions of the system. This privilege must be assigned to only one or a limited
number of users.
IMPORTANT
IM Archiving Settings
Logging in using an IM Admin account, displays an Instant Messages
menu under OW5000.
View Logs
Selecting Instant Messages from OW5000 displays an IM Archiving
Management page (Figure 2-43).
Figure 2-43 IM Archiving Management page
This page displays all IM sessions for those using Instant Message. The
following query is available on this page to specify the session. A
combination of following parameters is also available.
Messages between internal users will show up twice because of the way the process
works.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-40
OW5000 Configuration
Table 2-5 IM Parameters
Parameter
Description
Start Date / End Date
Query the messages for a specific term.
Sender/Receiver Jabber ID
Query the messages based on the URI.
IM Text
Query the message based on the text.
Configuration
Selecting Platform > Instant Messages > Configuration from
OW5000 Administrator displays an IM Archiving Management
Configuration page (Figure 2-44).
Figure 2-44 IM Archiving Management—Configuration page
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-41
Table 2-6 IM archiving Management Parameters
NOTE
Parameter
Description
IM Log Age
The archiving process uses this value to find old logs
to archive and eventually delete from the OW5000
database. Entering 0 for this field means to archive
everything. This Does Not retain any records in the
database.
Maximum File Size
If, during one instance of archiving, the file reaches the
maximum specified size, another file is created with the
same name and appended with a Time Stamp to
archive the remaining messages. This goes on until all
the messages chosen by archiving process for the
current session are archived.
Maximum file size is 500MB.
IM Archiving Password
The password used to encrypt the data when it is
exported.
Important: This password is used every time an
archive file is created. So, once it is changed, new and
old archived files cannot be opened at the same time
using Archive Viewer because the encrypted key is
changed.
Archive Now
Sets up a schedule that Scheduler picks up and starts
the archiving process using the DBTool export engine.
The archiving process is also responsible for deletion
of IM logs from OW5000 database. Clicking this button
will inform the user the number of logs to be archived.
By default, Instant Message (IM) archive files are stored in C:\Program
Files\NEC\OW5000\Runtime Platform\archive. The directory can be changed
using Application Data Management in OW5000 Administrator and searching on
the IM Archive Directory key. Users may want to change the directory to manage the
amount of disk space that is being used by the archiving process.
Administrators can use the estimate of 10K bytes per User per month when
calculating the amount of space that will be used by the archival process. This
estimate is based on 200 messages per month, per User, and an average message
size of 55 bytes.
Schedule
To enable scheduled archiving, follow the steps below.
Step 1
Check the Enabled check box and click Save.
Step 2
Select the Recurring Type from the drop list. Selection options are One
Time (non-recurring), or Recurring. If recurring is selected, a frequency
of daily, weekly, or monthly is available for selection. The display screen
is dependent on the kind of schedule created.
Duration of Recurrence is used to configure a detailed schedule.
Start Date: Sets the start date of this schedule.
Start Time: Sets the start time of this schedule.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-42
OW5000 Configuration
End By: Sets the end date of this schedule. Select No End Date when
an end date is not needed.
If a One Time schedule is set before the current time, the schedule will not be
executed.
NOTE
A One Time schedule only needs the start date and time. A Recurring schedule
needs the setting of Recurrence Pattern in addition to the Duration of Recurrence.
NOTE
History
Step 1
Click the History tab to display Figure 2-45. This page displays the
results of the schedule process for IM Archiving.
Figure 2-45 History page
When a schedule is executed, the Start Data, End Date and Results are
displayed.
Application Data Management
From the Application Data Management page, it is possible to change
the configuration data of the OW5000 system. This configuration change
is allowed only for maintenance, and should never be changed without
first consulting with an NEC representative.
XMPP Server
XMPP Server is visible in the OW5000 Administrator when the Openfire
XMPP Server application is installed. Refer to the UC for Enterprise
(UCE) Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Getting Started Guide
for additional details on configuring XMPP Sever.
Selecting XMPP Server from the OW5000 Platform Menu (Figure 2-11)
displays an XMPP Server page (Figure 2-46).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-43
Figure 2-46 XMPP Server page
Step 1
Enter the Domain Name (see Important note below). This field is
mandatory.
The domain name is used to auto generate a user's Instant Message contact
method. Example: [email protected] where “mydomain.org” was the domain
entered in the Domain Name field.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
This field can have a maximum of 255 characters and contain case-insensitive a-z,
0-9, "-" (hyphen) only.
The starting character cannot be a digit or hyphen "-".
Each dot-delimited sub-name is a maximum 63 bytes and cannot end with 
a hyphen "-".
Each dot-delimited sub-name ends with a “.". The part that comes after the last ‘.’
must be 2 or more alpha characters.
Step 2
Select XMPP Server integrates with OW5000 for user information.
Step 3
Select whether or not the Client uses DNS to resolve XMPP address
and port (DNS configuration required) or the Client uses this
specific address and port.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-44
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
NOTE
NOTE
If the client uses this specific address and port, enter the Internal IP
Address/Server name or the External IP Address/Server name. The
Internal address would be used by internal clients to connect to the
XMPP Server. The External address would be used by external clients to
connect to the XMPP Server. Either field accepts any ASCII characters
excluding white space. Maximum length is 100. 

Either Server Name or IP Address can be entered. Valid IP Addresses
(IPv4) is in the range 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255. IP Address
version 6 is not supported and must not be entered.
If a server name is used, that server name must be able to be resolved in DNS by all
XMPP clients that may connect to it. This could include the iPhone clients that may
be connecting from outside of your LAN.
If the clients are to use DNS, the DNS server must be set up with the correct SRV
records and A records.
Also, if the XMPP server has IPv6 enabled, the DNS must be set to return an IPv4
address for the server name used on this page. Currently, only IPv4 is supported for
XMPP client connections to the XMPP server.
Please see the OW5000 Getting Started Guide for more information on the DNS
settings required for XMPP.
Enter the Connection Port number. This field accepts only numbers
within the range of 1-65535.
OAI Server Configuration
OAI Server is a component of the OW5000 and enables Java, Web, and
other applications, except Remote Call Control, to communicate with the
PBX using NEC's Java OAI libraries. OAI Server also manages a single
connection (association) to each target PBX on behalf of the
applications.
Follow the steps below to configure OAI Server:
Step 1
Selecting OAI Server from the OW5000 Platform Menu (Figure 2-11)
displays an OAI Server Settings page (Figure 2-47).
Figure 2-47 OAI Server Settings page
Step 2
Enter the tenant number in the OAI Tenant Number field. The Tenant
Number is used by the OAI Server when it opens facilities with the PBX.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-45
Typically the default value of 0 is the desired value because this allows
OAI Server to work for all tenant numbers in the PBX.
The OAI Server ignores the OAI Tenant Number setting when opening the Free
Location Facility. The Free Location Facility always uses Tenant 1.
NOTE
To use the OAI Server, Selected must be checked in the PBX Settings
page (Figure 2-48). When assigning a new PBX, the Selected checkbox
is checked by default.
Figure 2-48 PBX Settings page
Step 3
Select the PBX from the drop list.
Values in gray are the read-only values assigned at the time the PBX
was configured for use with the OW5000 Platform. Changes to these
values can only be made by modifying the global PBX configuration
under OW5000 Platform. Such changes will effect every application
using that PBX. To specifically modify the PBX settings used only by LSI,
use the following steps.
Step 4
Verify the value for Force Port. 

This field has the following settings:
—Yes specifies that the application uses the same port each time it runs.
This should be selected to avoid problems with clearing Dterm
displays and monitoring equipment.
—No specifies that the application will retry one of the other port
numbers when the application fails to connect to the PBX because the
port may be in use by another application. This setting has no effect
when the PBX Type is UNIVERGE SV8300, SV9300, SV8500,
SV9500.
You should normally select Yes for the Force Port field.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-46
OW5000 Configuration
Step 5
Verify the setting for Heartbeat.

This field has the following settings:
—Yes specifies that the application checks approximately every 20
seconds to make sure the PBX connection is still alive and
operational.
—No specifies that the application will not check the PBX connection.
You should normally select Yes for the Heartbeat field.
Step 6
Check the Selected checkbox if you will use the OAI Server. It is
mandatory for OW5000 API (Call Control and Call Notification) and
Presence Gateway (Legacy presence of SIMPLE).
Step 7
Specify the amount of time the application waits to attempt to reconnect
to the PBX after the connection is lost in the Incremental Retry Delay
field. This value is usually 30 seconds.
Step 8
Specify the maximum amount of time the application waits between
attempts to reconnect to the PBX after the connection is lost in the Max
Retry Delay field. This value is usually 30 seconds.
Step 9
Check the Enable Free Location Facility box if an application will be
run that uses the OAI Server and requires the use of the Free Location
Facility. Because the PBX only allows one application to simultaneously
have the Free Location Facility opened for use, this box should only be
checked if instructed to avoid conflict with non-OW5000 applications that
require the Free Location Facility.
Step 10 Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the settings.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Access Server Configuration
Selecting Access Server from the OW5000 Platform Menu 
(Figure 2-11) displays an Access Server List Manager page 
(Figure 2-49). Follow the steps below to add, edit, or delete an access
server.
One PSGW (Presence Gateway) and more than one Access Server
configuration is required for the SIP presence feature.
PSGW is set as the default. Do not delete this configuration. (Port 6061 is assigned)
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-47
Figure 2-49 Access Server List Manager page
Adding a New Access Server
Step 1
Clicking Add New Access Server from Figure 2-49 displays an Add
New Access Server page (Figure 2-50).
Figure 2-50 Add New Access Server page
Step 2
Enter the Server Name. This name is used as a unique ID. Once the
Access Server is defined, you cannot change the Server Name. The
values in Step 3 to Step 9 do not have to be changed from the default of
the parameter is not in conflict with another application.
Step 3
Enter the IP Address V4 and/or V6 for the server. Use the same address
as where the OW5000 Platform is installed. Only one Access Server can
be assigned per server.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-48
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
Enter the Listen Port number of the Access Server. (accepts 1025 to
65535 only.) Default is 6060. A Listen Port is not required for PSGW.
Only one Access Server is available (except PSGW) per server.
NOTE
Step 5
Enter the listen port in the Legacy Port field. Accepts 1025 to 65535
only. Default is 60002. This parameter is not used in the current release.
(Future use).
Step 6
Enter the RPC Listen Port number. If PSGW is checked, this value is
not required. Accepts 1025 to 65535 only. Default is 62000.
Step 7
Enter the TOS value. This field accepts HEX only, but 0x is not needed.
Default is 00. This value can be changed. Only Access Server works on
the Microsoft Windows Server 2003. To enable this configuration,
change the registry modification as shown below.

Based on the following URL, add a registry key named
"DisableUserTOSSetting" under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\Tcpip\
Parameters then set 0. The value type is DWORD.

http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/magazine/2007.02.cableguy.aspx
Step 8
Enter the Keep Alive interval (in seconds). Default is 1800.
Step 9
Enter the Timer T1 Value (in milliseconds) which means the first retry
timer of the SIP request packet from the Access Server to the terminals.
Default is 500 milliseconds. Usually no configuration change is required.
Step 10 Check Is PSGW if the server is PSGW. PSGW can only be installed on
the same box as the OW5000 Platform. OW5000 Platform installer
automatically creates the PSGW configuration (PSGWlocal). The
PSGWlocal settings do not need editing unless this configuration is
deleted accidently.
Step 11
Select the Binding Type from the drop list. Available options are Named
Pipe, TCP/IP, and HTTP. If PSGW is not checked, this value is disabled.
Only TCP/IP is available for this version.
Step 12 After changing the configuration, do one of following:
—Click Apply to save the Access Server information.
—Click Done to save the Access Server information and close the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Step 13 To edit Access Server, click the Pencil icon on the Access Server List
Manager page (Figure 2-49).
Step 14 To delete an Access Server, click the Trashcan icon on the Access
Server List Manager page (Figure 2-49).
If the Server Name or IP address is duplicated in the database, an error message
displays.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-49
Routing Info
Selecting the Routing Info option from the Access Server page 
(Figure 2-49) displays a Routing Info page (Figure 2-51). This option
allows you to add or edit a routing rule, which is used for SIP presence
federation. Multiple routing rules can be assigned. The OW5000 system
checks the routing based on priority (the first line is the highest
priority).
Figure 2-51 Routing Info page
Adding a Routing Rule
Clicking Add New Routing Rule from the Access Server page displays
an Access Server—Routing Rule Info page (Figure 2-52).
Figure 2-52 Access Server—Routing Rule Info page
Step 1
Enter a regular expression of the target SIPURI in the Routing Rule
field. Configuration examples are listed below:
Step 2
Enter the translation format in the Translation Pattern field. $1 must be
there in this filed. Refer to Appendix C for details on the Regular
Expression.
Step 3
Enter the target access server in the IP Address field. This Access
Server belongs to a different OW5000 system so the Access Server
name is not available.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-50
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
Enter the target access server port number in the Port field.
Example1:
Routing Rule: ^710([0-9*#]{5})@.+$
(SIPURI start from 710 and 5 digits (total 8 digits) before @ mark and
store that 5 digits as $1)
Translation Pattern: [email protected]
IP Address: 192.168.0.10
Port: 5060
Input SIPURI: [email protected]
Result:
[email protected] is sent to 192.168.0.10 port 5060 using TCP session.
Testing a Routing Rule
Clicking Test Routing Rule from the Access Server page 
(Figure 2-51) displays an Access Server—Test Routing Rule page (Figure
2-53). The Test Routing Rule button is displayed when more than one
Routing Rule is assigned. This page provides test functionality for a
routing rule.
Figure 2-53 Access Server—Test Routing Rule page
Enter the test SIPURI in the Test Routing Rule field and then click
Test.

If a matching routing rule is found in the system, the routing rule and
target information displays on this page. 

If a matching rule is not found in the system, the Routing Rule Info field
is blank and an error box displays. The rule is checked from the top
routing rule so if multiple rules are matched for the test value, the
highest priority rule displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-51
Avatars
Selecting Avatars from the OW5000 Platform Menu page displays 
Figure 2-54.
Figure 2-54 System Avatar Management
Step 1
Select a displayed Avatar and click the Pencil icon or click Add New
System Avatar. Figure 2-55 displays.
Figure 2-55 Add New System Avatar
Step 2
Click the Browse button to display Figure 2-56.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-52
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-56 Choose file page
Step 3
Enter the file name of the desired photo or choose a different path to find
the location and then click Open.
Step 4
Click Upload to display Figure 2-57.
Figure 2-57 Avatar Selection
Step 5
Enter a Description for the Avatar.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-53
Step 6
If this is a System Default, click the check box.
Step 7
Adjust the size and position of the cropped image (which must be square
rather than rectangular), and then do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the new system avatar.
—Click Done to save and return to the System Avatar Management
page.
—Click Cancel to return to the System Avatar Management page
without saving the new system avatar.
NOTE
After an avatar is saved, it cannot be re-cropped. If you would like to change the
picture or try re-cropping the picture again, it must be deleted and then uploaded
again as a new avatar.
Step 8
Click the Pencil icon to edit the description of an existing Avatar or to set
the avatar as the system default.
There can only be 1 avatar that is defined as the system default per each
avatar type. The different avatar types are Person, Hotel Building, Hotel
Room and Guest. If a new person is created, the system default avatar
for the person will be assigned.
The system default Guest Avatar cannot be changed or a new avatar made as the
system default avatar for Guests.
NOTE
Skills Management
Selecting Skills from the OW5000 Platform Menu (Figure 2-11) displays
a Skill Management page (Figure 2-58).
Figure 2-58 Skill Management page
Step 1
To edit or delete a skill, click the Pencil or Trashcan icon.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-54
OW5000 Configuration
Step 2
To find a Skill, select an option from the drop list: Contains, Ends With,
Equals, or Starts With, then enter data in the Filter text box and click
Search.
Step 3
Click the Person Count link to go to the Person's page and display the
person having this skill.
Adding a New Skill
To add a new skill, click the Add New Skill button. A New Skill—Add
page displays (Figure 2-59).
Figure 2-59 New Skill—Add page
Step 1
Enter the new Skill Name.
Step 2
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply & Add New to save the record and add another skill.
—Click Done to save the record and close the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
Template Management
From the Template Management page, it is possible to create a template
related to person management. This page allows you to create a new
person and their related configuration; such as contact methods and
address information in a single page.
Selecting Templates from the Platform options page (Figure 2-11),
displays a Templates Management page (Figure 2-60).
Figure 2-60 Templates Management page
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-55
To remove or change an existing Custom Field, select the desired record and then
click the Pencil or Trashcan icon.
NOTE
Step 1
To add a new template click Add New Template from the Template
Management page. A Template Management Configuration displays
(Figure 2-61).
Figure 2-61 Templates Management—Add new page
Step 2
Select the Template Type from the drop menu and enter the Template
Name.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-56
OW5000 Configuration
Step 3
Select the desired parameters to be configured in this template from the
Person, Roles, Contact Methods, and Addresses pane.
The fields Last Name, First Name, Middle Name and Display Name are displayed
when this template is selected in the Person page, regardless of this configuration
NOTE
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the settings.
—Click Done to save and then exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Systems Menu
Selecting Systems from the OW5000 Administration Control Panel
(Figure 2-8) displays Figure 2-62.
Figure 2-62 OW5000 Systems Menu
The following topics are included in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PBX Management
SIP Registration Server
Voice Mail Servers
Collaboration
Agent Service (ACD)
Collaboration
Data Integration
Voice Mail Servers
Data Integration
Calendar Link
Remote Call Control Configuration
Pager Providers Management
Nurse Call Manager
Hotel Integration Configuration
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-57
PBX Management
Selecting PBXs from the Systems menu (Figure 2-62) displays a PBX
Management page (Figure 2-63). If PBXs have previously been added, a
list of all configured PBXs displays.
Figure 2-63 PBX Management page
The PBX Management page allows you to add, edit, or delete PBX
Settings, Dialing Locations, PBX to PBX Dialing, and Reserved Numbers.
Select the following links to assign Dialing Locations: “Dialing Locations” on page 219 and “Area Code Rules” on page 2-22.
NOTE
The PBX must be configured based on the following rules:
• Assign per PBX in the case of the CCIS network
• Assign only one PBX (OAI node) for a fusion network environment
(non IP Centrex)
• Assign per UGN for an IP Centrex environment, even a fusion network
environment
• Assign only one PBX (OAI node) in the case of a LCS/OCS integration
Adding a PBX Configuration
Clicking Add New PBX from the PBX Management page displays a PBX
Configuration—Add New page (Figure 2-64).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-58
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-64 PBX Configuration—Add New page
PBX Settings
When adding a new PBX Configuration, the first page to display is PBX
Settings.
Step 1
Enter a Name for the PBX in the PBX Name field. This is a label used to
identify the PBX. It is displayed in various list boxes to identify the
location of extensions, and therefore should most likely be made to
describe the site where it is located. Once the PBX name is saved, it
cannot be changed.
Step 2
Enter the IP address of the PBX in the IP Address field (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
If you do not know the PBX IP address, contact your local PBX system
administrator. Determining the IP address of your PBX depends on the
particular type of PBX selected, as shown in (Table 2-7). If you are using
a NetFusing system, enter the IP Address where IP (OAI Interface
Processor) is enabled.
Table 2-7 PBX IP Address Locations
PBX Type
IP Address Location
UNIVERGE SV8300
CM0B00
UNIVERGE SV8500
ADTM (LAN2:default)
UNIVERGE SV9300
CM0B00
UNIVERGE SV9500
ADTM (LAN2:default)
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-59
Table 2-8 Region-based PBX Name
Japan
United States
Europe
Australia
Asia (other)
UNIVERGE SV8300 UNIVERGE SV8300 UNIVERGE SV8300 UNIVERGE SV8300 UNIVERGE SV8300
UNIVERGE SV8500 UNIVERGE SV8500 UNIVERGE SV8500 UNIVERGE SV8500 UNIVERGE SV8500
UNIVERGE SV9300 UNIVERGE SV9300 UNIVERGE SV9300 UNIVERGE SV9300 UNIVERGE SV9300
UNIVERGE SV9500 UNIVERGE SV9500 UNIVERGE SV9500 UNIVERGE SV9500 UNIVERGE SV9500
Step 3
Enter the PBX ID for the PBX in the Office Code (PBX Id) field. This is
the PBX’s office code. This ID is used by applications to match
extensions provided in OAI messages sent from the PBX with a given
extension in the OW5000 Database. This ID uniquely identifies the PBX
and is critical in a CCIS environment that does not have a unique
numbering plan (where extensions can have the same number in more
than one networked PBX). If you are using a Stand-alone system, 1 is
recommended as the Office Code.
Step 4
Select an available Client/Server Port from the drop list. This port is
used by remote applications to communicate with the OAI Server using
TCP/IP. Choose a value in the range 44000-44099, that does not conflict
with other programs or configured PBX's using that value. It is possible to
type 'netstat -a -n' from a DOS command prompt to see ports already in
use.
Step 5
Select the PBX Type from one of the options in the PBX Type drop list. It
is important to select the correct type because applications rely on this
information for both licensing and functionality.
Step 6
Select Special Dial Code from the drop menu. None is selected as the
default.
Step 7
Select the Split Call Forward check box if this feature is configured on
your PBX. Split Call Forwarding enables Dterm telephone users to set
different call forwarding patterns for internal versus external calls. The
default is Disabled.
Step 8
Select a Dialing Location from the drop list. The location must be
configured before this step. For more information, see “Dialing
Locations” on page 2-19.
Step 9
Select the proper PBX Reconnect Delay (seconds) time from the drop
list. This parameter is a delay timer and determines how much time
should pass until the next reconnect request is sent to the PBX when the
OW5000 realizes a disconnection between the server and the PBX.
Default value is 30 seconds.
Step 10 Select the proper Heartbeat Timeout (seconds) value from the drop list.
This is a parameter which indicates the heartbeat timeout between the
server and the PBX. Default value is 128 seconds.
Step 11
Check the UGN (User Group Number) if the IP centrex feature is used.
The default is Disabled.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-60
OW5000 Configuration
Step 12 Enter the Prefix number. This parameter typically consists of Access
Number + Office Code (PBX ID). This parameter is mandatory in multiPBX systems to identify the same extension number. This parameter is
not required for a closed network system.
Step 13 Enter the SIP Server IP Address (Port). The IP Address of SP must be
assigned in this edit box for SV7000 and SR-MGC. Enter the SIP-BOX
IP address for the IPX and IPS. All SIP Server IP addresses must be
entered if there is more than one SIP Server. In the VRRP environment,
both physical and logical IP addresses must be entered. The Default Port
number is 5060 for SP. Set Act side IP Address of LAN1 for SV8500
system. Set 3 IP Addresses (Act type,type 0 and 1) of IP Address for a
redundancy system.
Step 14 Click Add to add a port or Remove to remove a port.
UGN, Prefix, and SIP Server IP Address (Port) fields are needed for the SIP
Presence function.
NOTE
Step 15 Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Done to add the PBX Configuration and close the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the new PBX configuration.
Editing a PBX Configuration
Step 1
To edit a PBX, click the Pencil icon next to the desired PBX configuration
(Figure 2-63).
Step 2
After changing the parameter, do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Done to add the and close the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
NOTE
If the UGN (User Group Number) is set with the same SIP Server which has the
same IP Address for multiple PBXs having the same IP Address, the IP Address for
the PBX cannot be changed. To change the IP Address, delete all IP addresses of
the SIP Server IP Address and then change the PBX IP Address.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-61
Deleting a PBX Configuration
Step 1
To delete a PBX, click the Trashcan icon. A Delete PBX Configuration
Confirmation dialog displays (Figure 2-65).
Figure 2-65 Delete PBX Configuration Confirmation dialog
Step 2
Do one of the following:
—Click OK to delete the configuration.
—Click Cancel to close the page without deleting the PBX configuration.
PBX to PBX Dialing
If you have an environment with multiple PBXs using a non-unique
numbering plan, if you require inserting an access code in front of an
extension before dialing, or if you receive an access code together with
the calling party's extension, you must specify the rules needed by
OW5000 to build up dialable strings and break apart incoming numbers
into their core components of PBX and extension. Using these rules,
OW5000 knows how to dial from one PBX to another when access codes
must be used, and it knows how to interpret what part of an incoming
number is the actual extension when an office or access code is received
before the extension.
PBX to PBX Dialing is used for multiple PBXs environment of OW5000 (Call Control
API) and Lync/OCS/LCS Integration feature.
NOTE
Step 1
Click PBX > PBX Dialing to display a PBX > PBX Dialing Configuration
page (Figure 2-66).
Figure 2-66 PBX > PBX Dialing Configuration page
The Destination PBX section describes how various PBXs in the CCIS
network may be dialed by the current PBX. The Destination PBX is
identified along with the prefix needed to be inserted before the
extension. It may be necessary to specify the first digit of the extension
range if the destination PBX has extensions of varying lengths. For
example, a PBX may require dialing ‘8782’ before four digit extensions
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-62
OW5000 Configuration
beginning with ‘3’, but ‘78’ before five digit extensions beginning with
‘2’. In the case of four digit extensions, the ‘2’ belongs to the access
code, but in the case of five digit extensions, the ‘2’ is part of the
extension. Using these tables, you can identify these types of conditions
so that OW5000 can properly dial and interpret incoming numbers
across the CCIS network.
The Source PBX section describes how incoming numbers from these
source PBXs to the current PBX should be disassembled to find the
actual extension of the calling party. This is done by entering the
Incoming Prefix that should be removed to find the extension. It is
possible to have more than one entry per source PBX in case numbers
can arrive in various formats from this PBX.
A PBX's destination PBX or source PBX may be itself, because a PBX may have a
prefix required to dial internally.
NOTE
A Prefix is not required for the PBX(UGN), which uses the IP Centrex Feature,
because the Extension has its prefix as part of the extension number.
NOTE
Step 2
To add a new Destination PBX, click Add New Destination PBX. An
Add Destination PBX page displays (Figure 2-67).
Figure 2-67 Add Destination PBX page
Step 3
Select the desired Destination PBX from the drop list.
Step 4
Enter the Dialing Prefix number.
Step 5
Enter the Extensions Beginning with number in the text field. This
parameter is used only when different access codes need to be applied
for each beginning number. This configuration is not often required.
Step 6
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the Destination PBX without exiting the page.
—Click Done to save the Destination PBX and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit the page without saving the Destination PBX.
Step 7
To add a new Source PBX, click Add New Source PBX. An Add Source
PBX page displays (Figure 2-68).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-63
Figure 2-68 Add Source PBX page
Step 8
Select the desired Source PBX from the drop list.
Step 9
Enter the Incoming Prefix in the text box. An Incoming Prefix must be
configured for each PBX, including its own PBX.
A Prefix must be set when the current PBX and the Source PBX are the same.
NOTE
Step 10 Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the Source PBX without exiting the page.
—Click Done to save the Source PBX and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit the page without saving the Source PBX.
Step 11
To modify a Destination or Source PBX, select the desired PBX and then
click the Pencil icon and make the necessary changes.
Step 12 To delete a Destination or Source PBX, select the desired PBX and then
click the Trashcan icon.
Reserved Numbers
Selecting the Reserved Numbers displays a Reserved Number page 
(Figure 2-69). This option allows you to add or edit one or more Dterms that can
serve as a shared pool for applications requiring temporary use of a Dterm for
complex call processing scenarios.
Figure 2-69 Reserved Number page
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-64
OW5000 Configuration
Step 1
Click Add New Monitored Number to add new Reserved Numbers. An
Add Reserved Number page displays (Figure 2-70).
Figure 2-70 Add Reserved Number page
Step 2
Enter the number to reserve in the Number field.
Enter a private number for an IP centrex environment.
NOTE
Step 3
Select the Tenant from the drop list.
Step 4
Select one of the Reserved Type options from the drop list. 

Dummy DTerm Number - it is only necessary to allocate Dummy
Dterms if you are so instructed by an application installation. This is not
required unless United States is selected as the Sales Region.

Monitored Numbers... to enter one or more monitored numbers (AMNO
assigned on the NEAX 2400) that can serve as a shared pool for
applications requiring monitored numbers. It is only necessary to allocate
Monitored Numbers if you will be running an application such as the
UNIVERGE UA5200, which requires such numbers in its configuration. 

Monitored Numbers are mandatory for Lync/OCS/LCS Integration.
The following Reserved Type options are also available and specific for
MC550. Refer to the UC for Enterprise (UCE) Mobility (UNIVERGE
MC550) Installation Guide for more information.
Group Call Pickup, Mobility L.S. Override, Mobility UCD Member,
Mobility UCD Pilot, and Move Call By Dial.
Step 5
Choose the Application from the drop list.

OW5000API is used for Remote Call Control (Lync Server) integration.
Reserved numbers will be marked as used by ACD if Agent Service is
installed and associates ACD Pilot numbers to reserved numbers in
OW5000. OAI Server will be associated to a monitored number in
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-65
support of other applications. Associate the OAI Server to monitored
numbers only when instructed to do so.
Other applications such as UC Mobility and Nurse Call will be seen in the Application
drop list if they are installed.
NOTE
Step 6
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the Reserved number without exiting the page.
Click Apply & Add New to save the Reserved Number and then enter
another.
—Click Done to save the Reserved number and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit the page without saving the Reserved Number.
Step 7
To Edit existing numbers, click the Pencil icon.
Step 8
To delete a Reserved Number, click the Trashcan icon.
Be sure to change or delete the related configuration before deleting a reserved
number.
IMPORTANT
Voice Mail Pilot Numbers
Step 1
Selecting the Voice Mail Pilot Numbers displays a Voice Mail Pilot
Numbers page (Figure 2-71). This option allows you to add or edit one or
more Voice Mail Pilot numbers; which is used for voice mail integration,
such as UM8500.
Figure 2-71 displays only if the United States is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
Figure 2-71 Voice Mail Pilot Numbers page
Step 2
Click Add New Pilot Number to add a new Voice Mail Pilot number.
Figure 2-72 displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-66
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-72 Add Voice Mail Pilot number page
Step 3
Enter the Pilot number to reserve in the Pilot number field.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply & Add New to save the Voice Mail Pilot number and add
a new Voice Mail Pilot number.
—Click Apply to save the Voice Mail Pilot number without exiting the
page.
—Click Done to save the Voice Mail Pilot number and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit the page without saving the Voice Mail Pilot
number.
Step 5
To change the default Voice Mail Pilot number, click Set Default of the
proper Pilot number. The Default Pilot number is displayed as bold. This
number is used when a client does not specify the Voice Mail Pilot
number.
Step 6
To delete a Voice Mail Pilot number, click the Trashcan icon.
SIP Registration Server
Selecting SIP Registration Server from the OW5000 Systems Menu
(Figure 2-62) displays a SIP Registration Server page (Figure 2-73).
Figure 2-73 SIP Registration Server page
Step 1
Click the Pencil icon to delete a SIP Registration Server or the Trashcan
icon to delete.
Step 2
To add a new SIP Registration Server, click Add New SIP Registration
Server. Figure 2-74 displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-67
Figure 2-74 Add New SIP Registration Server
Step 3
Enter a Description for the SIP Registration Server, a Host Name, IP
Address, and the Port number.
Step 4
Select the PBX and the Type from the drop list.
Step 5
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the changes.
—Click Done to save the data and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Voice Mail Servers
Selecting Voice Mail Servers from the OW5000 Systems Menu (Figure
2-62) displays a Voice Mail Server Management page (Figure 2-75).
Figure 2-75 displays only if the United States is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
Figure 2-75 Voice Mail Server Management page
Step 1
Click Add New Voice Mail Server to add an additional voice mail server.
Figure 2-76 displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-68
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-76 Voice Mail Server Management—Add New page
Step 2
Complete the following fields.
—Name: Use this field to uniquely identify the Voice Mail Server
represented by this connection.
—Type: Select the Type from the drop list. If you selected UNIVERGE
UM8700, refer to the section “Restart Voice Mail Data Synchronization
with a Specific UM8700” on page 2-69.
—Base URL: While this Voice Mail type does not provide for a Web
Admin environment, there are specific connections that can be made
via a Web URL. For this connection, use port 18276 and it must be
opened through a firewall in order for this feature to work.

Domain Name Resolution to the Voice Mail Server is required.
The following parameters show when UM7000 is selected as the PBX.
NOTE
—Admin ID: Enter the user account in the UM8700 Voice Mail Server
that has the necessary rights for setting Voice Intercept Messaging
(VIM) for users.
—ADMIN Password: Enter the password used by the account specified
in the Admin ID field.
—Diversion Node ID: 001 is the default setting for this feature. It should
remain 001 unless the user possesses advanced knowledge on the
feature and customizes the settings on both the UM8700 and the
OW5000 systems.
—Enable Integration: A UM8700 server can be marked as enabled or
disabled. Once a server is marked disabled, the Voice Mail Presence
Integration service stops fetching voice mail data from UM8700 and
integrating it into OW5000.
Step 3
Click Apply to save the settings or Cancel to exit the Voice Mail Server
Management page.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-69
Restart Voice Mail Data Synchronization with a Specific UM8700
To restart synchronization with a UM8700, click the Restart Sync button
(Figure 2-75).

Restarting synchronization retrieves all voice mail data for the OW5000
monitored mailboxes from the UM8700 and synchronizes the data.
Agent Service (ACD)
Selecting Agent Service (ACD) from the OW5000 Systems Menu
(Figure 2-62) displays an ACD Server Management page 
(Figure 2-77).
Figure 2-77 ACD Server Management—ACD Servers page
For more information, refer to “Links menu box for Agent Service” on page 2-80.
NOTE
Follow the steps below to configure ACD Servers.
Step 1
Click Add New ACD Server. Figure 2-78 displays.
Figure 2-78 ACD Servers—Add New page
Step 2
Enter the ACD Name.
Step 3
Enter the ACD IP Address of the server. If this is for internal ACD, enter
the IP address of the PBX.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-70
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
Enter the TCP Port used to connect to the ACD in the ACD Port Number
box. This must be an integer between 1 and 65534 inclusive. The default
value is 60030.
Step 5
Select the PBX from the drop list.
Step 6
Select Apply to save the changes, Done to save the changes and exit
the menu, or Cancel to exit the page without saving the changes.
The OWAgentService must be restarted after adding a new ACD.
NOTE
ACD Settings Configuration
Selecting ACD Settings from the ACD Server Management page (Figure
2-77) displays an ACD Settings page (Figure 2-79).
Figure 2-79 ACD Settings page
For more information, refer to “Links menu box for Agent Service” on page 2-80.
NOTE
Step 1
Enter the IP Address in the OWAgentService IP Address text box.
If Agent Service is installed on the same server as the OW5000 platform, this field
could be left blank. If so, set to the server's IP Address or set to "localhost".
NOTE
Step 2
Select Apply to save the changes, Done to save the changes and exit
the page, or Cancel to exit the page without saving the changes.
To ensure proper ACD integration, the following options should be enabled
(checked) in the System Data screen of the ACD MAT commands:
IMPORTANT
- Infolink with Call ID
- Infolink with Split Information
- Expanded Infolink with Call ID
Also choose the Iq rather than the IQ for the Incoming Call Msg field in the same
screen. See Figure 2-80.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-71
Figure 2-80 ACD Settings
Agent Screen Pop Configuration
Agent screen pop does not apply to UA5200 in ACD mode.
NOTE
The UC700 Agent Screen Pop feature is designed to integrate the UC700
with a customer's CRM application. In order for this to be accomplished,
the CRM must be able to accept input from UC700 in the form of
arguments (parameters). When an ACD call is presented to an agent,
UC700 will launch a predefined application along with information about
the call provided in these arguments. For example, the contact center
may utilize a browser-based CRM application which would accept the
callers CID information as a parameter and populate the agent's
browser with specific information about the caller.
Selecting Agent Screen Pop from the ACD Server Management page
(Figure 2-77) displays an Agent Screen Pop page (Figure 2-81).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-72
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-81 Agent Screen Pop page
The agent screen pops can be configured globally or on a per-split basis,
to provide flexibility. The global configuration can either specify the
screen pop settings to be used for all splits or for those splits which are
not configured separately. The split configuration can be used if screen
pops are only necessary for certain splits or if individual splits require
different screen pop settings.
For more information, refer to “Links menu box for Agent Service” on page 2-80.
NOTE
Global Screen Pop Configuration
Global screen pop configuration includes the application in the
Executable field that will be opened when the call is presented to the
agent. Additionally, arguments for that executable can be configured by
selecting one of the drop list options below:
• Code: Customer information associated with the call. This is
commonly attached by an IVR.
• Caller ID: The telephone number of the caller.
• Split: The ACD split in which the calls are being answered.
• Pilot: The ACD Pilot number where the call arrived into the system.
• Login: The answering agent's ACD login ID.
It is important to ensure that the arguments selected meet the requirements of your
CRM application.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 1
2-73
Configure the application in the Executable field that will be opened
when the call is presented to the agent.
It may be necessary to enter the full path in the Executable field. This depends on
the path settings defined for the computer user.
NOTE
Step 2
Enter the Executable’s arguments in the Arguments field. The
arguments can also be built using the drop list field to the right of the
Arguments field.
Step 3
Once an option is selected from the drop list, click the Insert button to
add the option to the executable’s argument.
Step 4
Click Apply to save the Global Screen Pop Configuration
Step 5
Click Cancel to cancel the action.
Screen Pop Split Configuration
The split configuration is used if screen pops are only necessary for
certain splits, or if individual splits require different screen pop settings.
Follow the steps below to configure a split configuration.
Step 1
From the Agent Screen Pop tab, under ACD Split Screen Pop
Configuration), select the ACD splits to be configured. 

To narrow down the list of available ACD splits, use filtering. Filtering can
be by ACD Name, Split or Tenant Name, and further defined with the
following qualifiers from a drop list.
• Contains
• Ends With
• Equals
• Starts With
Step 2
Click on the Pencil icon next to the desired ACD split to be configured.
An Agent Screen Pop page displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-74
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-82 Agent Screen Pop page
Step 3
Enter the Screen Pop information for this particular split.
—Configure the application in the Executable field that will be opened
when the call is presented to the agent.
—Enter the Executable’s arguments in the Arguments field. The
arguments can also be built using the drop list menu to the right of the
Arguments field.
Step 4
Once an option is selected from the drop list menu, click the Insert
button to add the option to the executable’s argument.
Step 5
Click Apply to apply the Screen Pop Split Configuration (Figure 2-82),
Done to save the changes and exit the page, or Cancel to cancel the
action.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-75
ACD Permissions Configuration
The ACD Permissions tab does not apply to UA5200 in ACD mode.
NOTE
Selecting ACD Permissions from the ACD Server Management page
(Figure 2-77) displays an ACD Permissions page (Figure 2-83).
Figure 2-83 ACD Permissions page
Step 1
A check box option is provided that will apply the changes to all users
who have default permissions. Set the desired permissions and click
Apply to save the changes and/or select Apply changes to all users
who have default permissions to apply to all default permissions.
Step 2
Click Done to save the changes and exit the page, or Cancel to cancel
the action.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-76
OW5000 Configuration
ACD Accounts Configuration
The ACD Accounts tab does not apply to UA5200 in ACD mode.
NOTE
Step 1
Selecting ACD Accounts from the ACD Server Management
page (Figure 2-77) displays an ACD Accounts page (Figure 284).
Figure 2-84 ACD Accounts page
This page displays all users in OW5000 who have UC700 ACD User or
UC700 ACD Supervisor security authorization.
Step 2
Click the pencil icon to add an ACD login for a user, or to edit an existing
ACD login for a user (Figure 2-85).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-77
Adding a New ACD Login
Figure 2-85 New ACD Login
The user must have a Primary Extension contact method assigned to
him before adding an ACD login.
If the user does not have a Primary extension contact method, an error
message displays (Figure 2-86).
Figure 2-86 No Primary Extension Error message
Notice the drop list for an ACD Server is blank. It is not possible to
update an ACD login until the Primary extension is assigned.
If the user has a Primary extension but the PBX for that extension does
not have an ACD server defined on it, the following error message
displays (Figure 2-87).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-78
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-87 Add ACD with No Server Error
If the user has a primary extension, the ACD Server drop list is filled
with the ACD server which exists on the same PBX as the user's Primary
extension. The ACD Server drop list will always only have 1 ACD server
entry.
Editing an ACD Login
Figure 2-88 ACD Login—Edit
The user must have a Primary Extension contact method assigned to
him before adding an ACD Login.
If the user does not have a Primary extension contact method, an error
message displays (Figure 2-89).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-79
Figure 2-89 No Primary Extension Error message
Notice the drop list for ACD servers is blank. Updating such an ACD login
is not possible until a Primary extension is assigned
If the user has a Primary extension but the PBX for that extension does
not have an ACD server defined on it, the following error message
displays (Figure 2-90).
Figure 2-90 Add ACD Account—No Server Error message
If the user’s ACD account exits on an ACD server that is on a different
PBX than the user’s Primary extension, an error message displays
(Figure 2-91).
Figure 2-91 Server Discrepancy—ACD Account and Primary Extension
Step 3
Type in the user's ACD Login ID. See Figure 2-88
Step 3
Select Default or Custom permissions.
Step 3
Press Apply or Done.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-80
OW5000 Configuration
Links menu box for Agent Service
The ACD Server Management page has the following Links:
Click each link for more information and instruction.
• ACD Break Modes
• ACD Work Modes
• ACD Split Modes
ACD Break Modes
ACD supports nine break modes, numbered one through nine. A
descriptive name can be assigned to each break mode so an attendant
doesn’t need to know the meaning of each break mode number. The
names are stored in the database allowing the UA5200 client program to
read them for display. The name assigned to each mode can be up to 32
characters in length.
One break mode can be designated as the default break mode. Break
Mode 1 is the default if a break mode is not designated. Only one break
mode can be marked as default.
Some of the following options are originally configured during either the
OW5000 Platform installation or during the UA5200 installation process.
They may be reconfigured through OW5000 Administrator by
completing the following steps.
Step 1
Select ACD Break Modes from the Links menu box to open an ACD
Break Modes page displays (Figure 2-92).
Figure 2-92 ACD Break Modes page
Step 2
To change a default break mode, click Set Default next to the break
mode number to change. The Set Default button will be disabled for the
Break Mode that is the currently set default.
Step 3
To edit an ACD Break Mode, click the Pencil icon next to the desired
Break Mode number. A Break Mode Description page displays 
(Figure 2-93).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-81
Figure 2-93 Break Mode Description page
+s+s
Step 4
Enter a description for the selected Break Mode in the text box.
Step 5
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information without exiting the page.
—Click Done to save the information and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit the page without saving the changes.
ACD Work Modes
The ACD supports 99 work modes, numbers 1 through 99. A descriptive
name can be assigned to each work mode so that an attendant doesn’t
need to know the meaning of each work mode number. These names
are stored in the database to allow the UA5200 client program to read
them for display. The name assigned to each mode can be up to 32
characters in length.
One work mode can be designated as the default work mode. Work
Mode 1 is the default if a work mode is not designated. Only one work
mode can be marked as default.
One work mode can be designated as the VIP Wake-Up Processing
work mode and will be used by the UA5200 Wake-Up application feature
when it is installed. Only one work mode can be marked as VIP WakeUp Processing work mode.
One work mode can be designated as the E-OSN Call Processing work
mode and will be used by the Emergency On-Site feature when it is
installed. Only one work mode can be marked as E-OSN Call
Processing work mode.
Some of the following options are only displayed if the application that
uses it are installed. ACD Work Modes may be reconfigured through
OW5000 Administrator by completing the following steps.
Step 1
Select ACD Work Modes from the Links menu box to open an ACD
Work Modes page (Figure 2-94).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-82
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-94 ACD Work Modes Configuration page
The VIP Wake-Up Processing and E-OSN Call Processing columns are visible
only if the associated features are installed.
NOTE
Step 2
To change a default Work Mode, click Set Default next to the work mode
number to change. The Set Default button will be disabled for the Work
Mode that is the currently set default.
Step 3
To edit an ACD Work Mode, click the Pencil icon next to the desired
Work Mode number. A Work Mode Description page displays 
(Figure 2-95).
Figure 2-95 Work Mode Description page
The Is VIP Wake-Up Processing work mode and Is E-OSN Call Processing work
mode check boxes are visible only if the associated features are installed.
NOTE
Step 4
Enter a description for the selected Work Mode in the text box.
Step 5
Select the Is VIP Wake-Up Processing work mode check box to
designate the selected work mode as the VIP Wake-Up Processing one.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-83
Step 6
Select the Is E-OSN Call Processing work mode check box to
designate the selected work mode as the E-OSN Call Processing one.
Step 7
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information without exiting the page.
—Click Done to save the information and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit the page without saving the changes.
ACD Split Modes
The ACD Splits Mode link does not apply to UA5200 in ACD mode.
NOTE
The ACD Split Mode feature allows a descriptive name to be assigned
and displayed when an ACD split has been forwarded to a particular ACD
Pilot number. Split call forwarding is usually invoked by a call center
supervisor using the night key.
Step 1
Select ACD Split Modes from the Links menu box to open an ACD Split
Modes page (Figure 2-96).
Figure 2-96 ACD Split Modes page
Day and Night modes are automatically provided and cannot be removed.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-84
OW5000 Configuration
Adding a Split Mode
Step 1
Select Add New Split Mode to open (Figure 2-97).
Figure 2-97 Add New Split Mode
Step 2
Enter the Mode Name for this split.
Step 3
Enter a Description in the text box to describe the Mode Name.
Step 4
Select an ACD Name from the drop list.
Step 5
Enter the ACD Pilot number for the split.
Step 6
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information without exiting the page.
—Click Done to save the information and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit the page without saving the changes.
Editing ACD Split Modes
Step 1
Select the Pencil icon next to the desired Split Mode name to edit
(Figure 2-96). An ACD Split Modes—Edit page displays (Figure 2-98).
Figure 2-98 ACD Split Modes—Edit page
Step 2
NOTE
Make the necessary changes to all or any of the desired fields and then
do one of the following:
The Pilot numbers listed under the Pilot number column is provided to assist you
when adding or changing a Pilot number. One of these numbers should be used in
the ACD Pilot Number field.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-85
—Click Apply to save the information without exiting the page.
—Click Done to save the information and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit the page without saving the changes.
Deleting ACD Split Modes
Step 1
Select the Trashcan icon next to the desired ACD Split Mode name
(Figure 2-96) to delete. A confirmation dialog displays.
Step 2
Click OK to delete the Split Mode or Cancel to close the page without
deleting the Split Mode.
Collaboration
OW5000 supports four different types of collaborations. The OW5000
system can have only one type of collaboration enabled and active at a
time.
Selecting Collaboration from the OW5000 Systems Menu (Figure 2-62)
displays a Collaboration Type page (Figure 2-99).
Figure 2-99 Enable Collaboration
Step 1
To enable or change the active collaboration type, check Enable
Collaboration.
The Enable Collaboration check box is displayed in the U.S. market only.
NOTE
OW5000 Collaboration supports only one collaboration type at a time.
NOTE
Step 2
Select the desired Collaboration type.
The following options are available for selection:
XL Meeting: See “XL Meeting” on page 2-86.
Basic URL Collaboration: this feature is UC700 and UC700 Toolbar
specific. See “Basis URL Collaboration” on page 2-87.
Client Side Collaboration: indicates the client has an application
for collaboration. The OW5000 application (e.g. UC700) will
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-86
OW5000 Configuration
launch the application that is selected by the user. See “Client
Side Collaboration” on page 2-87.
CMM Collaboration: this provides web conferencing, video
conferencing and collaboration. This allows UC700 users to launch a
CMM meeting session and invite participants via IM or Outlook. See
“Collaboration Meeting Manager” on page 2-88.
XL Meeting
Selecting XL Meeting from the OW5000 Systems Menu (Figure 2-62)
displays Figure 2-100.
Figure 2-100 XL Meeting page
Step 1
Check the Enable Collaboration checkbox.
Step 2
Select XL Meeting from the Collaboration type drop list.
Step 3
Choose the appropriate Server Protocol that is set up for an XL
Meeting.
Step 4
Enter the XL Meeting Domain name.
Step 5
Enter the Server Port number. The default port is 80 for HTTP and 443
for HTTPS. If using a port number other than the default port, this field
cannot be left blank.
Step 6
The Server URL is a read only field that displays the constructed URL
based on the domain and server port filled in.
Step 7
Enter the Admin Username to sign in to the XL Meeting.
Step 8
Enter the Admin Password that corresponds to the Admin Username.
Step 9
Enter an Invitation Title for the collaboration meeting request to be sent
out to the collaboration users.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-87
Step 10 Enter an Invitation Message for the users receiving the collaboration
meeting request. There is a place holder to insert the Meeting name and
URI. These values are filled in by the Client (e.g. UC700) before sending
the meeting request.
Step 11
Enter the Maximum attendees for a collaboration meeting and click
Apply to save the changes or Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Basis URL Collaboration
Selecting Basis URL from the OW5000 Systems Menu (Figure 2-62)
displays Figure 2-101.
Figure 2-101 Basic URL page
Step 1
Enter the address of the Server URL and click Apply to save the
changes or Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Client Side Collaboration
Selecting Client Side Collaboration from the OW5000 Systems Menu
(Figure 2-62) displays Figure 2-102.
Figure 2-102 Client Side page
Step 1
Click Apply to save the changes or Cancel to exit without saving the
changes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-88
OW5000 Configuration
Collaboration Meeting Manager
Collaboration Meeting Manager (CMM) is a service that allows you to
easily add communication solutions to the Unified Communication for
Enterprise (UCE). This web-based approach to Collaboration provides
the broadest reach to different user platforms and different devices, and
aligns well with enterprise networking and security policies.
CMM software, tightly integrated with UCE, provides web conference,
video conference and collaboration.
Selecting CMM Meeting as the Collaboration type from the drop list
displays a Client Side page (Figure 2-103).
Figure 2-103 CMM page
Step 1
Enter the following information:
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-89
—Server FQDN
—Admin Username
—Admin Password
—Shared Security Key
—Email Server
—Invitation Title
—Invitation Message
Table 2-9 provides a description of CMM Server Settings.
Table 2-9 CMM Server Settings
Setting
Example
Required
Comments
Fully Qualified Domain
Name of the CMM
collaboration server.
cmm.eadsphere02
.local
Yes
The CMM server gets details
from UCE based on the
server FQDN.
CMM Collaboration server
URL.
https://
cmm.eadsphere02.
local/checkin/necssso-login
Yes
Server URL is read only
N/A
CollabAdmin is the hardcoded username provided by
CMM, The OW5000 Platform
installer will write this value to
the database. This field is
read only and admin cannot
edit it.
Yes
The OW5000 Platform
installer will write this value to
the database in an encrypted
form, which may be edited via
OW5000 Administrator. This
password must match the
password set on the CMM
server.
Used to encrypt the token
generated by OW5000
Admin. Tokens are used
when an administrator
wants to perform
Shared Secret Key maintenance tasks, such
as removing meetings and
login to CMM Meeting
manager, on behalf of
OW5000 Users.
Yes
It is a password field.
The IP address or FQDN of
the server that sends
emails to invitees of CMM
collaboration meetings.
No
Server FQDN
Server URL
Description
Username of the Admin
Admin Username (super user) for the CMM
collaboration server.
Password of the
Collaboration Admin for
Admin Password CMM Collaboration Server
which is securely stored in
the OW5000 database.
Email Server
The default language of
Default Language UCE platform server.
Default
CollabAdmin
Password1
English
Yes
Table 2-10 provides details on Meeting Settings. 
* For the SV9500 this address and port of the MG-SIP is assigned here.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-90
OW5000 Configuration
Table 2-10 Meeting Settings
Setting
Description
Default Duration Default Meeting duration
(in minutes)
Default
Example
Required
60 minutes
60
Yes
min = 5, max = 1440
10
Yes
min = 2, max = max
concurrent sessions license
value
60
Yes
min = 5, max = 1440
Yes
min = 2, max = max
concurrent sessions license
value
Number of users allowed to
Maximum Size be in a single meeting
max concurrent
sessions license
concurrently
value
Default duration Default Meeting duration
for Instant
for Instant meetings (in
meetings
minutes)
60 minutes
Maximum size for Maximum meeting size for
Instant meeting Instant meeting
20
Enable Recording Whether recording of
meetings is allowed
True
Whether an indication of
Enable Recording ongoing recording is
Indication
displayed to participants
True
Comments
Table 2-11 provides details on CMM SIP Server Settings.
Table 2-11 CMM SIP Server Settings
Setting
PBX
Description
Default
Example
PBX configured for MGSIP.
IP Address
IP address for SIP server/
NEC Media Gateway SIP
Trunk (SV9500 - MG-SIP).
1.1.1.1
Port
Port to connect to NEC
Media gateway (MGSIP).
5060
Required
Comments
Yes
.Choose one of the PBXs
configured for OW5000
Yes
This must be configured for
call control to work.
Add Dial In Numbers
Values entered in during the previous steps (enable or change the active
collaboration type, and provide detailed configuration values) must be
saved before adding Dial In Numbers.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-91
Figure 2-104 Dial In Numbers
Step 1
Enter a Collaboration Pilot and/or Dial In Number in the corresponding
fields.
Step 2
Enter a Country value to identify the country that is associated with the
number.
Step 3
Enter an optional description in the Description field to provide
additional clarification for email invitations.
Step 4
Select Set as default to identify the number as the default number for
email invitations.
Step 5
Select Use as Location in Invitations to have the number sent in the
email invitation in the location field, along with the default dial in number.
Step 6
After entering the information, select the Save dial in number button to
add the number to the list of numbers available for CMM collaboration.
Meetings
CMM Collaboration supports four types of meetings:
— Permanent meetings - do not have an end time.
— Instant Meetings - created from UC700.
— Scheduled meetings - can be created from CMM GUI or
Outlook.
— Recurring meetings - can be created from CMM GUI or
Outlook.
Refer to the UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Collaboration
Configuration Guide for more information.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-92
OW5000 Configuration
Configuring OW5000 Users for CMM
OW5000 users do not need a separate login ID or password to log into
the CMM GUI or to use CMM features. CMM delegates authentication to
the UCE. The following are a list of user requirements for interface with
the CMM.
• User Role
— In order for a user to login to a CMM website and create or edit a
meeting, the OW5000 person must have a user role assigned in
OW5000.
• Work email address
— In order for a user to log in to a CMM meeting center to create a
meeting or join a meeting, it is mandatory for a user to have a
work email address contact method configured. A user without a
work email address cannot have meeting host privileges nor will
the user be visible in CMM through search or contacts. Refer to
“Contact Methods” on page 2-142
• Meeting host rights
— In order to host CMM meetings, OW5000 users must have a CMM
Meeting Host security authorization assigned. Refer to Figure 2107.
— Anyone can attend a CMM meeting, therefore no configuration is
needed for invitees.
• Permanent meeting privilege
— In order to create a permanent meeting, the OW5000 user must
have the assigned privilege to allow them to create a permanent
meeting. This privilege is not given by default to OW5000 users
who are given CMM Meeting host authorization.
— A permanent meeting has a start date time but does not have an
end time. As such, each user may create only one permanent
meeting at a time. Refer to Figure 2-108.
NOTE
Creating a Permanent meeting consumes one Session license for the time the
meeting exists. OW5000 Administrators should give this right selectively to OW5000
users.
• Timezone
— CMM requires a time zone for a user in order for it to display on
their user interface (UI) and for sending meeting requests, etc.
Setting the timezone for a user is optional. If a user does not have
a time zone configured in OW5000, CMM will use the UCE server's
time zone. Refer to Figure 2-105
• Culture
— CMM requires a user's culture to select a language in which to send
emails. Also, when a user logs into the CMM GUI, a user's culture
determines the language for the CMM interface. Refer to Figure 2106.
— If a culture is not configured for an UCE user, CMM uses the
OW5000 Platform's culture as default.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-93
Assign the User a Timezone
The first step in configuring a user is to assign a Timezone.
Step 1
Navigate to OW5000 > Directory > People.
Step 2
Click the pencil icon next to the person you wish to assign a timezone.
Figure 2-105 displays.
Figure 2-105 Input Time Zone
Step 3
Select a timezone from the Time Zone drop-down list (highlighted in
yellow).
Step 4
Click Apply to save the change or Cancel to exit and return to the
previous screen.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-94
OW5000 Configuration
Assign User Language, CMM Meeting Host Security Authorization
and Permanent Meeting Rights
Step 1
Expand the Roles section from the Person Management home screen.
Figure 2-106 displays.
Figure 2-106 Select Language
Step 2
Select a language from the Language drop-down menu (highlighted in
yellow). The default language for OW5000 platform is marked with an
asterisk.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-95
Figure 2-107 Applications and Roles
Step 3
Check CMM Collaboration.
If the CMM Collaboration check box is selected, the option to assign Permanent
Meeting Rights is made editable or is disabled. See Figure 2-108.
NOTE
Figure 2-108 Permanent Meeting Rights
Step 4
Check the Permanent Meeting Rights to assign permission to the user
if required.
Step 5
Click Apply to save changes or Cancel to quit.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-96
OW5000 Configuration
Data Integration
The Data Integration page displays saved DBTool profiles and entries for
MA4000 Incremental and Bulk imports if there is an MA4000 Integrated
with OW5000.
Step 1
Selecting Data Integration from the OW5000 Systems Menu 
(Figure 2-62) displays a Data Integration page (Figure 2-109).
Figure 2-109 Data Integration page
The following information describes the columns of the Data Integration
grid (Figure 2-109).
Add MA4000 Integration — allows an administrator to create a new
MA4000 Import connection. A connection to only one MA4000 is
supported, so the button is disabled once MA4000 Integration is
configured. (DBTool Import Profiles are also displayed on this page, but
they are created and edited with DBTool.)
Edit and Delete — edit and delete icons allow the user to edit or delete
an MA4000 Integration. Imports that originate from DBTool profiles
(with FILE or LDAP sources) cannot be deleted from this page.
Controls
— allows the user to start and cancel imports from this
page. A blue icon
2-110).
indicates that a DBTool import is scheduled (Figure
Figure 2-110 DBTool Import scheduled
Type — displays whether the Source is an Import or Export. Currently,
imports only are displayed.
Source — displays one of the three currently available data sources:
LDAP, FILE, or MA4000.
Name — the name column is derived from the DBTool profile name
when the source is FILE or LDAP and when the source is an MA4000
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-97
connection, the name column will display the MA4000 Manager's server
name with designations for Bulk and Incremental imports.
Status — a message providing current details without requiring the
user to leave the page or move the mouse.
Next Run Time — shows the next scheduled run time for a scheduled
import.
Last Update — the last update column informs the administrator of
when that particular source last updated information within the OW5000
database.
The Status of each import has a symbol that provides a visual indication
of its current status. An administrator can hover over a symbol for more
detail and click on it to be directed to a page providing more detail.
Errors — if there is an error count during the import, that count will be
displayed in this column.
Links — available links on this page.
Executing a DBTool Import
Click the Play button for on-demand execution of a FILE or LDAP
Import, as previously defined with DBTool. The Import will briefly
display a Next Run Time that is set for the upcoming minute. For
example, if the Play button is clicked at 12:10:35 (hh:mm:ss), the Next
Run Time will be 12:11:00 - at the top of the minute. When the Import
has finished running, Last Update will display the date and time at
which the Import completed, a green check mark will indicate a
successful Import, and Last Results will display the number of Rows
Processed. Clicking on a Last Results link will take you to the History
page for that execution, where log messages can be viewed and
additional links can be found for examining the imported data. Press the
Refresh button to update the display (Figure 2-111).
The page refreshes automatically if the OWDBSync service is stopped. A dialog
"DBSync service is stopped!" displays.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-98
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-111 DBTool Scheduled page
Figure 2-112 DBTool Import In Progress page
Figure 2-113 DBTool Import Complete page
To add integration, refer to “OW5000-MA4000 Integration” on page 7-1.
NOTE
To schedule a one time or recurring import using an existing DBTool profile, select
Schedule Management from the Links box. Refer to “Scheduling Manager” on
page 2-30.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-99
Calendar Link
Selecting Calendar Link from the OW5000 Systems Menu 
(Figure 2-62) displays Figure 2-114. This menu option is only seen if
UC700 is installed.
Figure 2-114 Calendar Link—General Settings Configuration
Step 1
Select Return to Default Status or Return to Previous Status in the
field When Outlook Appointment Expires.
Configuring Email Server for Calendar Link
Figure 2-115 Calendar Link—Email Servers Configuration
Step 1
Click Add New Email Server Link from Figure 2-115. A Calendar Link
Email Server Manager page displays (Figure 2-116)
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-100
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-116 Calendar Link Email Server Manager page
Step 2
To add an Exchange Email Server, use either of the options below.
(Exchange 2003 should be selected for both Exchange 2003 and
Exchange 2007).
—Enter the requested information in the required fields marked with an
asterisk.
Exchange Server - IP address or server name of the Exchange
Server
Exchange Admin - User Id with Administrative privileges
Exchange Admin Password - The Password of the above mentioned
user
Exchange Admin Email - The Email address of the above mentioned
user (optional).
Domain Controller - The Domain Controller server used by the
exchange server.
Active Directory User - The User on Domain Controller who has
privileges to query the Active Directory.
Active Directory User Password - The Password of the above
mentioned user.
OR
—Select Exchange Client Access Server if you have Exchange 2007,
2010 or 2013. Figure 2-117 displays. Proceed to Step 3.
Step 3 is applicable only if you selected Exchange Client Access Server (for
Exchange 2010 and later).
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-101
Figure 2-117 Exchange Client Access Server
Step 3
Enter the requested information in the required fields marked with an
asterisk.
—Exchange CAS Server: Enter the name or IP address of the
Exchange Client Access Server. Usually, Exchange CAS is the same
server as the mailbox server.
—Exchange Impersonator: Enter the username of the user for which
you gave the Application Impersonation role in the Exchange server.
—Exchange Impersonator Password: Enter the password of the
above username.
—Exchange Impersonator Domain: Enter the domain name of the
above username.
—Exchange Impersonator Email: Enter the Email address of the
above user. (optional)
—Web Service URL: (optional) This is the URL of the Exchange Web
Services on the Exchange CAS. Leave this field empty if it is the
default URL. The default URL is https://<ServerName>/EWS/
Exchange.asmx.
—Use SSL for Exchange CAS: Check this option if using SSL to
communicate to Exchange Web Services on the Exchange CAS. The
default is checked if SSL is enabled on the Exchange CAS Server.
—Frequency of Status Updates (in minutes): This is the frequency of
the status update that the Exchange CAS server should send of an
user to the OW5000 server when there is no activity. This status
update is basically a "keep-alive" indicator, indicating that the user is
registered for CalendarLink and is enabled to receive calendar event
notifications.
—For Event Notifications Use: This indicates how the Exchange CAS
Server will communicate will the OW5000 server, by name or by IP
address.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-102
OW5000 Configuration
—Use SSL for OW5000: This should be checked if you want Exchange
CAS Server to send notifications using SSL. By default, it is
unchecked as SSL is not enabled on the OW5000 server.
If you use SSL for OW5000, the certificate may have to be installed on the Exchange
CAS server.
NOTE
If the Exchange Admin and Active Directory User belong to a different domain,
the user name should be fully qualified to include the domain information.
NOTE
Error Messages
While trying to add a new email server, you may receive the following
errors.
Error
Action
Server_Name_Duplicate
Change the name of the Exchange Server or edit the existing server
with the same name.
Configuring the User Registration Status
Step 1
Click the Registration Status tab. Figure 2-118 displays.
Figure 2-118 Registrations Status page
This option allows you to change the Email Server Type or edit the
status of a user.
Step 2
Click the Pencil icon to edit the user registration for Calendar Link. An
Edit Registration User page displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-103
Figure 2-119 Edit Registration User page
Step 3
Enter the Primary Email (SMTP) address.
Primary Email should be configured as the Person's Work Email Address also.
NOTE
Step 4
Use the drop-down list to select the Email Server for the user.
The list of servers is populated by the servers listed on the Email Servers tab.
NOTE
Required fields are marked with an asterisk.
NOTE
Step 5
Click Done. The Status column for the user displays Registered.
Step 6
To edit or delete an Email Server or a Registered User, click the Pencil
icon or the Trashcan icon.
Error Messages
While trying to register a user for Calendar Link, you may receive one of
the following errors.
Error
Action
Person_ID_NOT_found_in_UserRole
Create a user role for person by selecting OW5000 > Directory >
People. Select the person and go to the Roles tab and create a user
role.
Person_NOT_found_in_LDAP
LDAP_Failure
Check the email address and the email server selected.
Unable to connect to LDAP. Check connectivity to the Domain
Controller server of the email server in case of Exchange Server.
Exchange Registration Failed. Check if NEC Calendar link service
Exchange_Event_Sync_Registration_Failed is started on the exchange server.
Exchange_Server_NOT_reachable
Check if the Exchange Server is accessible. Check if NEC Calendar
link service is started
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-104
OW5000 Configuration
Remote Call Control Configuration
Selecting Remote Call Control (RCC) from the OW5000 Systems Menu
(Figure 2-62) displays an RCC Setting page (Figure 2-120).
Figure 2-120 RCC Setting page
NOTE
If you have not installed Remote Call Control, this setting is not needed. For more
information, refer to the UNIVERGE OW5000 Installation Guide, OW5000 Remote
Call Control Service.
General Settings
Step 1
Enter the port number in the Listen Port field. 5060 is recommended,
but it must be configured when Lync/OCS/LCS is installed on the same
server.
Step 2
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the port.
—Click Done to save and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
NOTE
To use the Remote Call Control service with SV8500, SV7000, and IPX series, a
Monitored number must be assigned. Refer to “Reserved Numbers” on page 2-63 for
more details.
Normalization Rules
Selecting Normalization Rules from the Remote Call Control page
(Figure 2-120) displays a Normalization Rules page (Figure 2-121).
This option allows you to add or edit normalization rules which are used
for LCS/OCS Integration. Multiple normalization rules can be assigned.
The OW5000 system checks the rule based on priority (first line is
highest priority).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-105
Figure 2-121 Normalization Rules page
Step 1
Click the Reorder arrow to change the priority of the rule.
Adding a Normalization Rule
Clicking Add New from the Normalization Rules page displays a Remote
Call Control—Normalization Rules page (Figure 2-122).
Figure 2-122 Remote Call Control—Normalization Rules page
Normalization Rule Info
When adding a new Normalization Rule, follow the steps below:
Step 1
Select the target Country Code from the Country Code drop list.
Step 2
Enter a regular expression of the target phone in the Phone Pattern
Regular Expression field. Refer to Appendix B for more details on
Regular Expression.
Step 3
Enter the translation format in the Translation Pattern field. $1 must be
in this filed.
Step 4
Enter a comment for this normalization rule.
Example1:
Phone Pattern Regular Expression: ^0([0-9*#]{3,4})$
(Phone number starts from 0 and 3 or 4 digits (total 4 or 5 digits) and
stores these digits as $1. Note that the first 0 is not included in $1).
Translation Pattern: tel:$1;phone-context=necinfrontia.com
Comment: This rule is used for NEC Infrontia, Inc.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-106
OW5000 Configuration
Input phone number: 01234
Result:
tel:1234;phone-context=necinfrontia.com
Testing a Normalization Rule
Clicking Test Rule from Figure 2-122 displays a Remote Call Control—
Test Normalization Rule page (Figure 2-123). The Test Rule button
displays when more than one Rule is assigned.
Figure 2-123 Remote Call Control—Test Normalization Rule page
This page provides test functionality for normalization rules. There are 2
test capabilities: TEST TRANSLATION and TEST ANI TRANSLATION.
TEST TRANSLATION is used to check the regular expression of the
rule, but the OW5000 system determines the rule not only this regular
expression.
TEST ANI TRANSLATION is used to check how the OW5000 converts
this input phone number. OW5000 uses several internal logics to
determine the translation results so this test field allows the user to see
how the OW5000 works. To test TEST ANI TRANSLATION, assign a
Country Code for the Rule and Location in PBX Management page.
TEST TRANSLATION
Step 1
Enter the test phone number in Test Dialed Number and then click
Check Rule. 

If there is a matching normalization rule in the system, the normalization
rule and the translated result displays on this page. 

If there is no matching rule in the system, Translated number field is a
blank. The Rule is checked from the top normalization rule so if multiple
rules are matched for the test value, the highest priority rule displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-107
TEST ANI TRANSLATION
Enter the test phone in the Test ANI field, select the destination PBX
from the drop list, and then click Check Rule.

If there is a matching normalization rule in the system, the rule and
translated result displays in the Translated number field. 

If there is no matching rule in the system, the Translated number filed is
a blank. Rule is checked from the top normalization rule so if multiple
rules are matched for test value, highest priority rule is displayed.
Pager Providers Management
The Pager Providers option allows a user to receive a real page on
their pager. Each provider has their own settings in order to contact
their subscribers. Use the steps below to setup Provider information:
Step 1
Select Pager Providers from the OW5000 Systems Menu (Figure 2-62).
A Pager Providers Management page displays (Figure 2-124).
Displays only when the United States is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
Figure 2-124 Pager Providers Management page
Step 2
Click Add New Pager Provider. A Pager Provider—Add New page
displays (Figure 2-125).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-108
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-125 Pager Providers—Add New page
E
NOTE
Step 3
Enter the Name of the Provider (required).
Step 4
Enter the Message Length.
Step 5
Enter the number in the TAP Dialup (1-Way) field.
If you use TAP (Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol), either a customer provided TAP
Server must be attached to the OW5000 Server via a serial connection, or a modem
attached to a serial port is needed. Using either option, a serial port must be
configured.
Step 6
Enter the SNPP Host Name, the SNPP Host Login and the SNPP Host
Password.
Step 7
Enter the Port (Number).
Step 8
Select whether or not to Show Caller ID, Show Subject, or Show Delay
Unit.
Step 9
To Edit or Delete a Provider, click the Pencil or Trashcan icon.
Step 10 Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Done to save and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-109
Nurse Call Manager
Selecting Nurse Call from the OW5000 Systems Menu (Figure 2-62)
displays Figure 2-138.
NOTE
This menu is only seen when Nurse Call is installed. For more information on Nurse
Call see the UC for Enterprise (UCE) Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000)
Nurse Call Integration Service Operations Guide.
Figure 2-126 Nurse Call Manager
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-110
OW5000 Configuration
Short Text Message
Selecting Short Text Manager from the OW5000 Systems Menu
(Figure 2-62) displays Figure 2-127.
This menu is only seen when Short Text Message is installed. For more information
on Short Text Message see the UC for Enterprise (UCE) Application Platform
(UNIVERGE OW5000) Short Text Message Operations Guide.
NOTE
Figure 2-127 STM Server Manager
Hotel Integration Configuration
Hotel Integration connects OW5000 to third party hospitality
applications to provide and update hotel service information.
This menu (Figure 2-128) is only available when the 3rd Party Hotel App Integration
application is installed.
NOTE
The following topics are included in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
Adding a New Association
Editing an Existing Association
Deleting an Association
Storing Hotel Service Login Names of an OW5000 Person
Editing the Login Name of a UA5200 User—Hotel Service
The Hotel Integration Service uses a single connection for each hotel
building. The login name and password are used to authenticate the
service for this single connection. These credentials should not be
associated to any UA5200 attendant; they represent an additional
account. UA5200 will connect to the Hotel Service vendor and download
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-111
service orders and issue types. After the initial download, service orders
are kept up-to-date through notification from the Hotel Service vendor.
UA5200 only displays open service orders.
Step 1
To configure Hotel Integration, log on to the OW5000 Administrator
program. Once you are logged in to OW5000 Administrator, follow this
path to open the Hotel Integration configuration options: Systems >
Hotel Integration. Figure 2-128 displays.
Figure 2-128 Hotel Service Connection Management page
NOTE
Mousing over the blue, right-arrow icon displays the message, “Start sync issues and
orders”. Click the control button to start a download of all issues and service orders
from the connected service vendor.
The column Last Update shows the date and time of the last sync that was
executed. Refer to “Starting an Issues and Service Order Sync” on page 2-113 for
more information.
Adding a New Association
Step 1
To add a new association and specify connection details, click Assign
Hotel Service Connection to display Figure 2-129.
Figure 2-129 Assign New Hotel Service Connection
Step 2
Select a Hotel Building from the drop list (required).
Step 3
Select the Service Vendor providing the Hotel Service application for
the chosen hotel building (required).
Step 4
Specify the Service URI identifying the external API of the Hotel Service
application (required). The Service URI may contain 500 characters or
less. The Service URI should be provided by the Service Vendor.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-112
OW5000 Configuration
Step 5
Enter the Login Name (optional). In order for the Hotel Integration
Service to connect to the external API, the Login Name of a user of the
external application is required. The login name may contain 50
characters or less.
Step 6
Enter the Password associated to the Login Name of the Hotel Service
user (optional). The password may contain 50 characters or less.
Step 7
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information without exiting the page.
—Click Done to save the information and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit the page without saving the changes.
When a new configuration is added, the Hotel Integration Service needs to be
restarted.
NOTE
Editing an Existing Association
Step 1
Click the Edit (pencil) icon to the left of an existing association. 
Figure 2-130 displays.
Figure 2-130 Editing an Existing Association
Step 2
Make the necessary changes. All fields from the add form are available
to make changes, except the hotel building drop list. This field cannot be
changed.
When an existing configuration is edited, the Hotel Integration Service needs to be
restarted.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-113
Deleting an Association
Step 1
To delete an existing association, click the delete (trash can) icon to the
left of an existing association. A Deleting an Existing Association
confirmation dialog displays (Figure 2-131).
Figure 2-131 Deleting an Existing Association Confirmation
Step 2
Click OK to delete the connection. If Cancel is pressed, no entry is
deleted.
Starting an Issues and Service Order Sync
Step 1
Press the start sync
icon from the entry in the Hotel Service
Connection Management page (Figure 2-128). A Re-sync Issues and
Service orders dialog displays.
Figure 2-132 Re-sync Issues and Service orders
Step 2
Click OK to display a confirmation dialog (Figure 2-133).
Figure 2-133 Issues and Service Order confirmation dialog.
The Last Update column shows the date and time that the sync button
in the grid was last pressed (Figure 2-128).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-114
OW5000 Configuration
Storing Hotel Service Login Names of an OW5000 Person
An initial import will store the login of each HotSOS user into the
OW5000 database in a UserDefined field of the Person table. Before this
initial import, the following steps must be completed in OW5000 Admin.
Naming User Defined Fields
Step 1
Once you are logged on to OW5000 Administrator, follow this path:
Directory > People > Manage Custom Fields from the Links menu box.
Figure 2-134 displays.
Figure 2-134 Manage Custom Fields
Step 2
Choose a user-defined field not currently in use, and enter a unique
name, suggesting that it is being used to store the hotel service login
name. For example, "HotSOS Login Name".
Step 3
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information without exiting the page.
—Click Done to save the information and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit the page without saving the changes.
Applying the Defined Field in Application Data
Step 1
To set the same name of the "HotSOSLoginNameUserDefined"
application preference, follow this path: Platform > Application Data.
Step 2
For the Filter: Application choose NEC Hotel Integration Service and
click Search to display Figure 2-135.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-115
Figure 2-135 Application Data Management
Step 3
Click the Pencil icon to the left of the "HotSOSLoginNameUserDefined"
application preference. Figure 2-136 displays.
Figure 2-136 Application Data Management
Step 4
Set the value of the application preference to the name chosen in Step 2.
Step 5
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information without exiting the page.
—Click Done to save the information and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit the page without saving the changes.
Editing the Login Name of a UA5200 User—Hotel Service
Step 1
To change the Hotel Service login name of a UA5200 user, navigate to
Applications > UA5200 Manager, then expand the Accounts section.
Step 2
Press the edit icon (pencil) to the left of the account you want to edit.
Figure 2-137 displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-116
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-137 Editing Login Name of a UA5200 User
NOTE
Step 3
Select a monitored number from the Monitored Number drop list (if
desired). 

An Attendant's monitored number is a number that can be dialed to
reach that attendant regardless of which workstation that attendant logs
into. It is sometimes referred to as the "Me" queue. If a call comes in to
the Attendant's prime line or sub line associated with the workstation, it
will be moved off the ringing Dterm line to this monitored number. Calls to
this monitored number can only be seen and answered by the attendant
who owns it. If a monitored number is not assigned to the attendant
account, calls to the Dterm associated with the workstation will continue
to ring the phone. They can be answered by picking up the ringing line.
At that time the call will be integrated with the UA5200 Client call control.
Step 4
Enter the HotSOS Login Name in the text box labeled the same as the
user defined field configured above (Step 2). It appears only if the Hotel
Integration application is installed.
If you are creating a new account, this field will read Hotel Service Login Name.
This field is not displayed unless you have been granted Hotel Services permissions
using the OW5000 Administrator.
Step 5
Select the User Type for the UA5200 Server from the following drop
options:
—UA5200 Administrator - this user type can configure custom color
settings within the UA5200 Client and push the color settings out to
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-117
other operators. You can also add, modify, and delete directory entries
from the UA5200 client.
—UA5200 Operator - this user type is for call processing only.
—UA5200 DB Operator - this user type is for call processing, and
allows the operator to add, modify, and delete people in the directory.
Step 6
Select the user's permissions if the User Type is UA5200 DB Operator or
UA5200 Operator. The Permissions section is not visible when the user
type is set as UA5200 Administrator, since an administrator has full
access.
To allow an attendant to Create and Edit Orders and Receive
notifications when orders are complete, select Use Custom
Permissions and check the boxes for Hotel Services.
Step 7
Select Enable Toolbar Protection to protect an attendant from making
layout changes in the UA5200 Client.
Step 8
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information without exiting the page.
—Click Done to save the information and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit the page without saving the changes.
Applications Menu
Selecting Applications from the OW5000 Administration Control Panel
(Figure 2-8) displays Figure 2-138. Incoming Call Assistant and Location
Status Information are installed with the OW5000 Platform install and
always appear in the Applications menu if the user is logged in as an
OW5000 Administrator.
Figure 2-138 OW5000 Applications Menu
Only installed applications will appear under Applications. Refer to the
documentation for each OW5000 related application.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-118
OW5000 Configuration
Incoming Call Assistant Configuration
The following selections are default values for Incoming Call Assistant.
They may be changed through OW5000 Administrator by completing the
steps below.
Step 1
Login to the OW5000 Administrator program. Once you are logged into
OW5000 Administrator, follow this path to open the ICA configuration
options: Applications > Incoming Call Assistant. An ICA General
Settings page displays (Figure 2-139).
Figure 2-139 ICA General Settings page
Step 2
Enter information in the following fields for Server Settings.
Step 3
Review the Options information.
—Name Display Enabled in PBX
If your PBX is currently configured to use the built-in Name Display
Feature, check the box Name Display Enabled in PBX. This ensures
that ICA will not display redundant information about calling
employees that the PBX is already displaying to your Dterm.
When checked, ICA will not display a caller's name if the caller is an
employee, and they are calling your prime line. External numbers to
your prime line will still be displayed by ICA as well as all calls to your
sublines, employee included. Also, ICA will not show a called
employee's name on placed calls. If the call you are placing is to a
non-employee number, ICA will display the dialed number or name.
If Name Display Enabled in PBX is not checked, ICA will always
attempt to reconcile the caller or called party number to names in the
employee, external, or personal directories and display this
information on your Dterm, with one exception. If you are placing a call
to an employee who has set their status through the Location Status
application (LSI), and LSI is configured to flash the status to your
phone, ICA does not display the employee name. Instead, it gives
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-119
control to LSI so that you can see the person's status, return date,
time, and alternate number, if any. The default value is checked.
—Show External Number
If this item is checked, ICA will always display the ANI information for
an external call unless a name match is found. If a name match is
found, ICA will display the name. If this item is not checked, ICA will
only display a name if a name is found, or if the incoming line is a sub
line. Otherwise, nothing is displayed. The default value is unchecked.
—Show DID Information
Select this check box to configure ICA to show the name of the called
number as it is found in the OW5000 DID (Direct Inward Dial)
Database. This DID number must be configured as a virtual number in
the PBX and all calls forwarded to the user's extension. This box is
typically NOT selected in order to always show the caller's ANI
instead. The default value is unchecked.
—Password Required
Select this check box to require users to enter a password when
accessing Incoming Call Assistant. The default value is unchecked.
NOTE
If this check box is not selected, the user will be allowed to choose not to use a
password when accessing Incoming Call Assistant. If the check box is selected, they
will be required to enter a password before they can access Incoming Call Assistant.
—Chime on Incoming Call to Subline
If your PBX is configured so that incoming calls to sublines do not ring,
you may desire to check this box so that ICA users are alerted with a
Dterm chime when receiving an incoming call on one of their sublines.
The default value is checked.
—Outbound Call Log Size
Specifies the number of records that will be stored for each user's
outbound call history. This value also affects other applications that
view the history. The default value is 100.
—Inbound Call Log Size
Specifies the number of records that will be stored for each user's
inbound call history. This value also affects other applications that view
the history. The default value is 100.
—Max Idle Time (seconds)
Specifies the number of seconds that ICA waits for user input before
exiting on that person’s Dterm. The default value is 30.
Step 4
In the Name Display Format for Employee Match section, select one
of the following ways to display employee names from the drop list.
—Employee Display Name
—Last, First
—First Last
This option allows the user to select how names are displayed on the
Dterm when ICA finds an employee match to an incoming or outgoing
call. This name can be the display name, which is configured in the
OW5000 Administrator for that employee, or it can be a combination of
first and last name. If “last, first” or “first last” are selected and either
first name or last names are blank, the default will be Employee
Display Name.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-120
OW5000 Configuration
Step 5
You can modify the amount of time that ICA waits for user input before
exiting on that person’s Dterm in the OAI Timeout field.
Step 6
Click Apply to accept the configuration or Cancel to discard the
changes.
Redirect Configuration
ICA uses a PBX Reserved Number (monitored number) to temporarily
move a call when performing call processing actions for other supported
applications, such as UC700. Only one monitored number should be
configured per PBX for ICA.
Selecting Redirect Configuration displays an ICA Redirect Configuration
page (Figure 2-140).
Figure 2-140 ICA Redirect Configuration page
Step 1
Click Add New Redirect Configuration. A Redirect Configuration—Add
New page displays (Figure 2-141).
Figure 2-141 Redirect Configuration—Add New page
Step 2
Select the PBX from the drop list. The PBX will be in the list if it is
selected in PBX Settings.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-121
Step 3
Select the Redirect Number from the drop list. The redirect number
should be assigned as a Reserved number for the PBX. Only Reserved
Numbers that are "unassigned" will be displayed in the Redirect Number
drop list.
Step 4
Click Done to accept the changes and return to the configuration page,
or Cancel to exit without saving the changes. After saving, the Reserved
Number will be seen as assigned to (Owner) for Incoming Call Assistant
on the PBXs > Reserved Number page.
PBX Settings
Selecting PBX Settings from the ICA General Settings page 
(Figure 2-139) displays an ICA PBX Settings page (Figure 2-142).
Figure 2-142 ICA PBX Settings page
Step 1
Fields with text values were assigned at the time the PBX was
configured for use with the OW5000 Platform. Changes to these values
can only be made by modifying the global PBX configuration under
OW5000 Platform. Such changes will affect every application using that
PBX. To specifically modify the PBX settings used only by ICA, use the
following steps.
Step 2
Verify the value for Force Port. 

This field has the following settings:
—Yes specifies that the application uses the same port each time it runs.
This should be selected to avoid problems with clearing Dterm
displays and monitoring equipment.
—No specifies that the application will retry one of the other port
numbers when the application fails to connect to the PBX because the
port may be in use by another application. This setting has no effect
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-122
OW5000 Configuration
when the PBX Type is NEAX 2400 IMS Internal IP, UNIVERGE
SV7000, or NEAX 2000 IPS.
You should normally select Yes for the Force Port field.
Step 3
Verify the setting for Heartbeat.

This field has the following settings:
—Yes specifies that the application checks approximately every 20
seconds to make sure the PBX connection is still alive and
operational.
—No specifies that the application will not check the PBX connection.
You should normally select Yes for the Heartbeat field.
Step 4
Check the Selected checkbox if you would like ICA to attempt to connect
to this PBX the next time it is restarted.
Consider enabling the Selected checkbox for ICA's PBX Settings, soon after
installation of OW5000 Platform. This is not enabled as a default, on a fresh install.
NOTE
Step 5
If needed, you can modify the Incremental Retry Delay. The
Incremental Retry Delay designates the amount of time the application
waits to attempt to reconnect to the PBX after the connection is lost. If
the connection to the PBX is lost, ICA waits for the amount of time
specified in the Incremental Retry Delay field before attempting to
reconnect the first time. If the connection still cannot be made, the
specified amount of time will be added to the delay period before the next
attempt. For example, if the Incremental Retry delay is set to 30 seconds,
ICA waits 30 seconds before attempting to reconnect. If that first attempt
fails, the application waits 60 seconds before making a second attempt
to connect, then waits 90 seconds before making a third attempt, and so
on. When the application successfully reconnects to the PBX, the delay
time goes back to the amount of time set in the Incremental Retry Delay
Value field. Incremental Retry Delay Value is typically set to 30 seconds.
Step 6
You can modify the amount of time that ICA waits for the user input
before exiting on that person’s Dterm in the OAI Timeout field.
Step 7
The Max Retry Delay specifies the maximum amount of time the
application waits between attempts to reconnect to the PBX after the
connection is lost. This is used in conjunction with the Incremental Retry
Delay and ensures that the application will try to re-establish a
connection to the PBX within a certain amount of time. The Max Retry
Delay Value is typically set to 1 hour to make sure that the application will
attempt to reconnect to the PBX at least once an hour.
Step 8
You can change the Data Mode that ICA uses to communicate with
Dterm users by selecting an available Data Mode from the drop list. The
data mode you select must be programmed for use with OAI in the PBX,
and it must be assigned to a function key button on each user's Dterm in
order for ICA to be available to the user.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-123
The value ranges from 128 to 191 and should match the OPCODE in the
AOKC command on the UNIVERGE SV8500 and SV9500, or the D70
command if using UNIVERGE SV8300 and SV9300.
SV8500, SV9500
AOKC Command: (Assignment of OAI Key Codes)
This command is used to associate the MSF facility and its Op-Code that
was configured in the OW5000 for Location Status Information to one of
the 14 OAI Key Codes in the MAT.
—Select an unused OAI Key Code from 1 to 14. To determine which Key
Codes are available for assignment, use the LOKC command to list
the AOKC Key Codes that are already assigned.
—Enter MSF as the facility to be assigned to the selected Key Code,
using the values on the screen.
—Enter the same Op-Code that was configured for the OW5000
Location Status Information in the OW5000.
The AKYD command can then be used to provide the Key used for a
Dterm User. Feature Key Indexes #34 to #47 have been designated for
use as OAI system keys and correspond to the 14 OAI key codes
available in the AOKC commands.
CMD7: (Assignment of MSF Operation Code)
Y=0: When pressing the OAI function key to start up MSF, assign the
operation code to the OAI function key assigned by CM90.
1st data:F1032 Function Key Number 0 –...
F1047 OAI Function Key Number 15
2nd data:128–191 Operation Code for MSF Key Codes
The Operation Code should match the OW5000 setting.
Then assign the key to the Dterms using the information below:
Step 9
You can change the LED Number that ICA lights when active on the
Dterm.
Step 10 Click Apply to save the information. For the changes to take affect,
follow the steps below:
Stop OWWatch Dog service
Stop OW OAIMonitor service
Start OWWatch Dog service
This will impact all other services.
NOTE
Step 11
Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-124
OW5000 Configuration
Location Status Information Configuration
The following Location Status Information (LSI) selections are default
values. They may be reconfigured through the OW5000 Administrator
by completing the steps below.
Step 1
Login to the OW5000 Administrator program. Once you are logged in to
OW5000 Administrator, follow this path to open the LSI configuration
options: Applications > Location Status Information. An LSI Server
Settings page displays (Figure 2-143).
Figure 2-143 LSI Servers Settings page
Step 2
Enter the LSI Name (not required).
Step 3
Enter information for the Legacy TCP/IP Port. 

The TCP/IP Port is the port number used by external applications to
connect to the LSI Service. The default port number is 5241.
Step 4
Review the Options information.
— Display Status

Select this check box to configure LSI to show the name of the called
number. The default value is unchecked.
— Dterm Password Required 

Select this check box to require users to enter a password when
accessing LSI. The default value is unchecked.
NOTE
The LSI password is the Dterm password entered for a user's Primary Extension
Contact Method. See “Enter the Number of the External Secondary number.” on
page 2-144 for instructions on how to enter a Dterm password.
—Max Idle Time

Specifies the number of seconds that LSI waits for user input before
exiting on that person’s Dterm. The default value is set at 15 seconds.
Step 5
Do one of the following:
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-125
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
System Statuses
Selecting System Statuses from Figure 2-143 displays a LSI System
Statuses page (Figure 2-144).
Figure 2-144 LSI System Statuses page
Step 1
Use the following options to configure System Statuses.
—System Presence
The default values are reconfigurable.
—SIP Presence
The default values are reconfigurable.
—XMPP Presence
—Voice Mail Presence 
Voice Mail Presence statuses can be changed by clicking the Pencil
icon for the rows that contain a Voice Mail Status.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-126
OW5000 Configuration
Adding a New Message
Step 1
To add a new message, click Add New Message. An LSI System
Statuses—Add New Message page displays (Figure 2-145).
Figure 2-145 LSI Message Settings—Add New Message page
Step 2
Enter a new message in the System Presence text box.
Step 3
Select the SIP Presence message from the drop list.
Step 4
Select the XMPP Presence from the drop list.
Step 5
Select a predefined Voice Mail Status from the drop list.
Step 6
Click the check box to select Use Return DateTime (For Voice Mail
Diversion).
Step 7
Do one of the following:
—Click Done to save the information.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
Default Statuses
Selecting Default Statuses displays an LSI Default Statuses page
(Figure 2-146).
Figure 2-146 LSI Default Statuses page
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 1
2-127
Use the information below to change the Default Statuses Settings.
—Default Online
Use the drop list to change the System Presence status.
—Default Offline
Use the drop list to change the default offline status.
—Default Idle
Use the drop list to change the System Presence status.
—Default Busy
Select the desired option from the drop menu.
—Default Out of Office
Select the desired option from the drop menu
—Default Dterm
Select the desired option for the default status when a new non SIP
presence is used for extension.
—Default Mobility
Select the desired option for the status related to the mobility feature.
PBX Settings
Selecting PBX Settings from the LSI General Settings page displays a
PBX Settings Configuration page (Figure 2-147).
Figure 2-147 LSI PBX Settings Configuration page
Values in gray are the read-only values assigned at the time the PBX
was configured for use with the OW5000 Platform. Changes to these
values can only be made by modifying the global PBX configuration
under OW5000 Platform. Such changes will effect every application
using that PBX. To specifically modify the PBX settings used only by LSI,
use the following steps:
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-128
OW5000 Configuration
Step 1
Select the desired PBX from the drop list.
Step 2
Verify the value for Force Port. 

This field has the following settings:
—Yes specifies that the application uses the same port each time it runs.
This should be selected to avoid problems with clearing Dterm
displays and monitoring equipment.
—No specifies that the application will retry one of the other port
numbers when the application fails to connect to the PBX because the
port may be in use by another application. This setting has no effect
when the PBX Type is NEAX 2400 IMS Internal IP, UNIVERGE
SV7000, or NEAX 2000 IPS.
You should normally select Yes for the Force Port field.
Step 3
Verify the setting for Heartbeat.

This field has the following settings:
—Yes specifies that the application checks approximately every 20
seconds to make sure the PBX connection is still alive and
operational.
—No specifies that the application will not check the PBX connection.
You should normally select Yes for the Heartbeat field.
Step 4
NOTE
Check the Selected checkbox if you would like LSI to attempt to connect
to this PBX the next time it is restarted.
Consider enabling the Selected checkbox for LSI's PBX Settings, soon after
installation of the OW5000 Platform. This is not enabled, as a default, on a fresh
install.
Step 5
If needed, you can modify the Incremental Retry Delay. The
Incremental Retry Delay designates the amount of time the application
waits to attempt to reconnect to the PBX after the connection is lost. If
the connection to the PBX is lost, LSI waits for the amount of time
specified in the Incremental Retry Delay field before attempting to
reconnect the first time. If the connection still cannot be made, the
specified amount of time will be added to the delay period before the next
attempt. For example, if the Incremental Retry delay is set to 30 seconds,
LSI waits 30 seconds before attempting to reconnect. If that first attempt
fails, the application waits 60 seconds before making a second attempt
to connect, then waits 90 seconds before making a third attempt, and so
on. When the application successfully reconnects to the PBX, the delay
time goes back to the amount of time set in the Incremental Retry Delay
Value field. Incremental Retry Delay Value is typically set to 30 seconds.
Step 6
You can modify the amount of time that LSI waits for user input before
exiting on that person’s Dterm in the OAI Timeout field.
Step 7
The Max Retry Delay specifies the maximum amount of time the
application waits between attempts to reconnect to the PBX after the
connection is lost. This is used in conjunction with the Incremental Retry
Delay and ensures that the application will try to re-establish a
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-129
connection to the PBX within a certain amount of time. The Max Retry
Delay Value is typically set to 10 minutes to make sure that the
application will attempt to reconnect to the PBX at least once an hour.
Step 8
You can change the Data Mode that LSI uses to communicate with
Dterm users by selecting an available Data Mode from the drop list. The
data mode you select must be programmed for use with OAI in the PBX,
and it must be assigned to a function key button on each user's Dterm in
order for LSI to be available to the user.

The value ranges from 128 to 191 and should match the OPCODE. The
OPCODE assigned here should match the OPCODE in the voice server,
AOCK in the UNIVERGE SV8500 and SV9500, or the D70 command if
using UNIVERGE SV8300 and SV9300
SV8500, SV9500
AOKC Command: (Assignment of OAI Key Codes)
This command is used to associate the MSF facility and its Op-Code that
was configured in the OW5000 for Location Status Information to one of
the 14 OAI Key Codes in the MAT.
—Select an unused OAI Key Code from 1 to 14. To determine which Key
Codes are available for assignment, use the LOKC command to list
the AOKC Key Codes that are already assigned.
—Enter MSF as the facility to be assigned to the selected Key Code,
using the values on the screen.
—Enter the same Op-Code that was configured for the OW5000
Location Status Information in the OW5000.
The AKYD command can then be used to provide the Key used for a
Dterm User. Feature Key Indexes #34 to #47 have been designated for
use as OAI system keys and correspond to the 14 OAI key codes
available in the AOKC commands.
SV8300, SV9300
CMD7: (Assignment of MSF Operation Code)
Y=0: When pressing the OAI function key to start up MSF, assign the
operation code to the OAI function key assigned by CM90.
1st data:F1032 Function Key Number 0 –...
F1047 OAI Function Key Number 15
2nd data:128–191 Operation Code for MSF Key Codes
The Operation Code should match the OW5000 setting.
Then assign the key to the Dterms using the information below:
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-130
OW5000 Configuration
CM90: (Assignment of the OAI Function Key for MSF)
Assigns the OAI function key for starting up MSF to a Dterm.
1st dataMy line number + , + Key Number
2nd data
F1032 Function Key Number 0 –...
F1047 OAI Function Key Number 15
Step 9
You can change the LED Number that LSI lights when active on the
Dterm. Blank is assigned as the default value.
Step 10 Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
Directory Menu
Selecting Directory from the OW5000 Administration Control Panel
(Figure 2-8) displays Figure 2-148.
Figure 2-148 OW5000 Directory Menu
The following topics are included in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
People
Extension Management
User Management
Organization Management
Locations Management
Categories
Configuring Positions
Routes/Trunks Management
User Privileges Management
Configuring Specialties (refer to note on Page 2-178)
Restriction Classes
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-131
People
Selecting People from the OW5000 Directory Menu (Figure 2-148)
displays a Person Management page (Figure 2-149).
The logged in person cannot delete their own record while logged in.
The trashcan icon will be hidden for the logged in user's entry. If
MA4000 Integration is enabled and user's are synced to OW5000,
people who are linked to MA4000 cannot be deleted. Only unlinked
entries will have the trashcan icon.
For more information, refer to “Links menu box—Person Information page” on
page 2-132.
NOTE
Figure 2-149 Person Management page
Adding a New Person using Templates
If you frequently add users, employees, and person fields through the
OW5000 Administrator, creating and using a template containing the
fields most frequently used could be a time saver at your site. Using
templates will reduce data management time and avoid needing to
browse to multiple pages to complete the addition of a single user.
Step 1
Select a template from the Template drop list that's available by going to
Directory > People. Templates cannot be selected when using
Directory > Add New Person or when selecting the Add New Person
Link on the Person Management Page. (To create a new template go to
Platform > Templates.)
The selected template page opens with only the fields specified in the
template displayed.
Step 2
Enter the data for the fields displayed.
Step 3
Select Apply & Add New to save the person and stay on the page to
add another new person.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-132
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
Select Done to save the new person and return to the Person
Management page.
Step 5
Select Cancel to ignore data entered in the template page and return to
the Person Management page.
Searching the Database
Use the following steps to conduct a search in the Person database.
Step 1
Select the search criteria from the Filter drop list.
A Role, such as User and employee, is set in the Roles page. Select All in case a
Role is not assigned. Refer to “Adding a User Role” on page 2-136.
NOTE
Step 2
Select the Field in which to search from the drop list.

For example, Last Name, First Name, Contact Method, Login ID, SIP
URL, or Skills. Another way to search is to select Starts with and then
enter data in the text box and click Search. A Database Search Results
screen displays listing all previously entered data. A wildcard (*) is not
required. 

To display all Persons, set blank in the search field or set None as the
search target and then click Search.
Links menu box—Person Information page
The following items are available on the Links menu box—Person
Management Page (Figure 2-149).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PBX Management
Add New Person
Manage Custom Fields
Manage Guest Settings
Full Name Format
URI Format
Range Delete
Data Integration
Add New Person
Use the following steps to add a new record to the Person database.
Step 1
Click Add New Person from the OW5000 Directory Menu (Figure 2148), or select the Add New Person Link from the Links menu box. A
Person Management—Add Person Information page displays 
(Figure 2-150). 
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-133
Figure 2-150 Person Management—Add Person Information page
Links menu box—Add New Person page
The following Links are available on the Add New Person page 
(Figure 2-150):
•
•
•
•
•
•
People
Extension Management
Organization Management
Locations Management
Template Management
Skills Management
The Person manager page has 4 vertical sections. The sections are
collapsed when the page is opened. When adding a new person, the
person's basic information section is expanded.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-134
OW5000 Configuration
The Roles, Contact Methods and Addresses sections are locked until
the person is created by supplying values for at least the required fields
and clicking Apply. Once the person is created, the lower sections are
unlocked.
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
NOTE
Step 1
Enter the Last Name and the First Name for the new record.
Step 2
If desired, enter data into the Middle Name and Display Name fields.
Display Name is used when OW5000 applications display the person’s name on a
Dterm (call logs, calling party information, etc.). This name is limited to 16 characters
due to display size limitations and is auto generated using the person’s first and last
names. You may choose to enter a Display Name in the text box to override/prevent
auto generation. Should you wish to resume auto-generation of this field at a later
date, simply clear it by back spacing over any existing value.
• First character of Middle Name + .(dot) is used for the Full Name Display Format. If
the Display Name is blank, the Full Name Display Format is applied.
NOTE
• DBTool Person import — Display Name Generation checks this Display Name
parameter.
Step 3
If desired, select a Prefix or Suffix for this record.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
Enter a SIP URI if you are using a SIP Server. This SIP URI must be
unique in the system. If you are using a SIP terminal, it must be the same
as the SIP URI that was assigned in the Extension page or
prefix+extension SIP URI.
Select Auto Input to set auto generated SIPURI based on the regular
expression assigned in URI format page, overwrite the SIPURI that is
displayed, or do nothing if the regular expression is not configured.

In the URI Format Configuration page, if the Prefix + Primary Extension
or Primary Extension is selected as the SIP URI Key Parameter($0), the
Primary Extension must be set as the contact method before this step.
Step 5
Select a SIP Access Server from the drop list.
Step 6
Select a SIPUA Group name from the drop list.
Voice Mail Server, Subscriber ID and Photo are used for some OW5000 Applications
released in the U.S. market only.
NOTE
Step 7
Select a Voice Mail Server from the drop list.
Step 8
Enter the Mail Box Number.
Step 9
In the skills text box, you can enter multiple skills separated by a comma.
A maximum of 10 skills can be added. There is an autocomplete that
displays existing skills as you type. To disable autocomplete check
"Disable AutoComplete for Skills."
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-135
Step 10 Select the Time Zone from the drop list.
Time Zone is only seen when CMM Meeting is the selected Collaboration type.
NOTE
For more information, refer to “Assign the User a Timezone” on page 2-93
NOTE
Step 11
In the UserDefined fields, enter the desired value for the field.
The captions for UserDefined fields can be customized by navigating to Directory >
People and selecting the Manage Custom Fields link.
NOTE
Step 12 Enter comments in the Notes section.
Step 13 Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the record.
—Click Done to save the record and close the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
After creating a New Person, the Roles, Contact Methods, and Addresses links are
unlocked.
NOTE
To edit or delete a person, refer to “Editing or Deleting a Person” on
page 2-139.
Roles
Roles can be added to any person that is already configured in the
Person database. After selecting the desired person, click Roles to
display a Roles page (Figure 2-151). The following figure displays when
United States is selected as the Sales Regions.
Figure 2-151 Roles page
If the Healthcare license is available, Patient, Physician and Student roles become
visible.
NOTE
If the Hospitality license is available, the Guest role will be seen, but Guest Roles are
typically created automatically via UA5200 Guest Link, not manually.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-136
OW5000 Configuration
Adding a User Role
Step 1
Click Add new role. A User Roles—Add New page displays (Figure 2153). The following figure displays when United States is
selected as the Sales Regions.
The pages will differ depending on the type of role selected.
IMPORTANT
The following screens reflect the steps necessary for adding a User as
the role type. Multiple Roles can be assigned for one person.
Refer to “User Privileges Management” on page 2-175 for more information on roles.
NOTE
If XL Meeting is the configurated collaboration server, the Collaboration
Username and Password fields can be entered while creating or
updating a user role. See Figure 2-152.
Figure 2-152 XL Meeting Password
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-153 User Roles—Add New
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 2
Select User from the drop list.
Step 3
Enter the information in the following fields:
—Login ID
—New Password
—Confirm New Password
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-137
2-138
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
NOTE
For Windows Authentication, enter the NTLM Login ID for the user.
User must be selected if SOAP (Information API) is used and the user needs to login
to OW5000 Administrator. The length of the password must be at least 8 characters
long and include the following rules:
1 Uppercase letter (A-Z)
1 Lowercase letter (a-z)
1 Digit(0-9)
1 Special Character (excluding a space, square brackets, backslash, and single or
double quotes)
Step 5
To disable the user role for any reason, click the check box Login is
disabled.
Step 6
To set the password to never expire for the user, click the check box
Password never expires.
Step 7
To select the Security Roles for this user, click the checkbox for each
application the user is allowed to view or use, and then select the role
type. For example, an administrator, a user, a recipient, or an assistant.
The Group Notification Security Authorization is automatically checked when UCE
Emergency On-Site Security Authorization is checked by the user.
NOTE
When editing or adding a user role, the Group Notification checkbox is disabled if the
Group Notification License Count is exceeded.
Step 8
Select the Confidentiality Status for this role from the drop menu. This
is not required for configuration unless United States is selected as the
Sales Region.
Step 9
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to add the role and continue with the configuration.
—Click Done to save the information and close the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-139
Editing or Deleting a Person
To edit or delete a person, follow the steps below. If a person is linked to
a record in MA4000, the fields that are synced from MA4000 cannot be
edited and the field will be disabled or read only, depending on the
control. Refer to the section Unlink Button.
NOTE
When you edit a person, the communication logs, contacts, contact rules and other
personal data is retained.
It is recommended to create another person record if the Admin wants to assign this
record to another physical person.
Step 1
Click the Pencil icon next to the desired Person to edit the data 
(Figure 2-149).
Figure 2-154 Person Information—Editing
Step 2
To add a Photo, click Manage. A choose Avatar page displays 
(Figure 2-155).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-140
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-155 Choose an Avatar page
Step 3
Click on an already defined Avatar to upload it, or click Choose File to
navigate to other options, then click Upload.
Step 4
After you have completed the editing, do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Done to save the information and close the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Step 5
Click the Trashcan icon next to the desired Person to delete the data.
Unlink Button
The Unlink button appears at the bottom of the person page when
editing a person if the person is synced from MA4000.
Figure 2-156 Unlink Button
Clicking the Unlink button will make all of the fields editable in OW5000.
Unlinking is only a temporary solution to edit a person's information.
When MA4000 Integration is enabled and a bulk import is executed or
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-141
the unlinked person is updated in MA4000 a new link will be reestablished and any manual edits to synced fields in OW5000 will be
overwritten.
If the desire is to no longer have a certain person managed from
MA4000, then follow these steps:
NOTE
Step 1
Unlink the person in OW5000 by pressing the Unlink button on the
Person page.
Step 2
Uncheck the Publish to Directory check box for the user in MA4000.
Refer MA4000 Help in MA4000 for more information on the Publish to
Directory flag.
Changing the Publish to Directory option for a user in MA4000 will automatically
execute a bulk import in OW5000. This should only be performed during non-peak
hours. If the Publish to Directory check box is unchecked first, and the person is still
linked in OW5000, the user will be deleted from OW5000 during the bulk import.
Adding an Employee Role
After selecting the name, click Roles and select Employee from the
drop role type list box to display an Employee Role Type page 
(Figure 2-157). 

If the selected person already has a role assigned, you can edit or delete
the role by clicking the Pencil or Trashcan icon (Figure 2-151). The
following figure displays when United States is selected as the Sales
Regions.
Figure 2-157 Employee Roles—Add New
Step 1
Enter the Employee ID.
Step 2
The Employee Position is previously set. Refer to “Configuring
Positions” on page 2-172 for selecting a different position.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-142
OW5000 Configuration
Step 3
Select the Employee Type from the drop list. For example, a Contractor,
Permanent, or Part Time employee.
Step 4
To set an Organization for this employee, click Select and then choose
an organization. For configuring an Organization, see “Organization
Management” on page 2-160. To remove an organization, click Remove.
Step 5
To set a Location, click Select and then choose a location. For
configuring a Location, see “Locations Management” on page 2-164. To
remove a location, click Remove.
Step 6
Select the Confidentiality Status from the drop menu.
Step 7
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to add the role and continue with the configuration.
—Click Done to save the information and close the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Contact Methods
To add a contact method, select Contact Methods. A Contact Method
page displays (Figure 2-158). The following figure is an example when
the United States is selected as the Sales Regions.
The Links menu box in Figure 2-157 are also available for Contact Methods.
NOTE
Figure 2-158 Contact Method page
Step 1
To add a new Contact Method, expand the drop list showing the Add
New Contact Method entry.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-143
Figure 2-159 Contact Method—Type page
Step 2
Select a Contact Method from the drop list. A Contact Method—Add
page displays (Figure 2-160).
The Contact Method pages may differ depending on the type of contact
method you selected. Primary Extension, Secondary Extension and
Tertiary Extension are available as a SIP Presence feature. If you are
using a softphone collaboration feature, the Primary Extension should be
a collaborated extension, and the Secondary Extension should be the
softphone. 

For example, if you selected External Secondary Number from the drop
list, a Contact Methods—Primary Extension page displays 
(Figure 2-160). The following figure is an example when the
United States is selected as the Sales Regions.
Figure 2-160 Contact Method—Add External Secondary Number
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 3
Select the Country from the drop list.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-144
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
Enter the Number of the External Secondary number.
Step 5
Select the Priority from the drop list.
Step 6
Choose the Confidentiality Status from the drop list. (Only available for
the US market).
Pilot Number, Dterm Password, and Confidentiality Status are not used unless the
OW5000 Applications released in the US market are used.
NOTE
Step 7
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to add the contact method and continue with the
configuration.
—Click Done to save the information and close the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
Addresses
This is displayed only when the United States is selected as the Sales
Region.
Step 1
To add an address, select Addresses. To add a new Address, expand
the drop list showing the Add new address entry (Figure 2-161).
Figure 2-161 Addresses—Add New
Step 2
From the drop list, pick an Address Type to add. An Address Information
page displays (Figure 2-162).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-145
Figure 2-162 Address Information page
I
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
The Links menu box in Figure 2-157 are also available for Addresses.
NOTE
Step 3
Enter/select information in the following fields:
—Country/Region
—Street
—City
—State/Province/Add New State
—Zip/Postal Code
NOTE
Addresses added without a state selected will be assigned the state value of
“unknown”. A new state can be added to any country by pressing the Add New State
button. The States/Provinces from United States, Japan, Canada and China are prepopulated.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to add the address.
—Click Done to save the information and close the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-146
OW5000 Configuration
Manage Custom Fields
Use the following steps to add user defined fields in the Person
database.
This parameter is supported only when other OW5000 applications, which are
supported in US market, are installed in the system.
NOTE
Step 1
Click the Manage Custom Fields link (Figure 2-149). A Person Custom
Fields page displays (Figure 2-163).
Figure 2-163 Person Custom Fields page
Step 2
Select an available undefined UserDefined field and enter the desired
label for the field.
Step 3
Select the Required checkbox if the information to be entered in the
newly defined field is mandatory.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to update the changes.
—Click Done to save the information and close the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
NOTE
When MA4000 Integration is enabled in OW5000, corresponding Custom Fields can
be defined with the MA4000 Manager's MA4000 > Settings page, then mapped for
synchronization with OW5000 UserDefined fields at OW5000's Data Integration
page.
Manage Guest Settings
Use the following steps to add Guest Custom fields in the Person
database.
This parameter is supported only when other OW5000 applications, which are
supported in US market, are installed in the system.
NOTE
Step 1
Click Manage Guest Settings (Figure 2-149). A Manage Guest Settings
page displays (Figure 2-163).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-147
Figure 2-164 Manage Guest Settings page
Step 2
Enter the desired field name in the UserDefined fields.
Step 3
Click Apply to accept the changes or Cancel to return to the Person
Management page.
Full Name Format
Use the following steps to customize the display name of a Person. At
least one person must be assigned before changing this format.
Step 1
Select Full Name Format from the Person Manager page (Figure 2149). A Full Name Display Format page displays (Figure 2-165).
Figure 2-165 Full Name Display Format page
Step 2
Choose a format from the drop list to display a Preview of Full Name.
Available options are shown in Figure 2-166.
Step 3
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to update the changes.
—Click Done to save the changes and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-148
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-166 Full Name Display Options
URI Format
Selecting URI Format from Figure 2-149 displays a URI Format
Configuration page (Figure 2-167).
Figure 2-167 URI Format Configuration page
Step 1
Select one of the following keys from the URI Key Parameter drop list:
The selected key is treated as $0:
—Login ID
—Prefix + Primary Extension
—First Name
—Last Name
—First character of First name + Last Name
NOTE
NOTE
The Prefix + Primary Extension key is only available in the U.S. market. First Name,
Last Name, and First character of First name + Last Name are not available in the
U.S. market.
If Login ID is selected as the URI Key Parameter in the Person URI Derivation, User
Roles must be selected for creation in the Import Settings so that the Login ID
database field can be mapped to a Login ID column in the Input File. This column
MUST contain unique Login IDs for each person being added or updated. If an input
record specifies a Login ID that is already in use in the OW5000 database, data
associated with the existing Person can be overwritten by the data that's being
imported for that Login ID. Please ensure that if you are attempting to add a new
Person to the database, that the specified Login ID is unique relative to existing
Login IDs in the database and relative to other Login IDs in the DBTool Input File.
Step 2
Enter the Translation Pattern Regular Expression. Maximum of 100
characters, only single byte.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-149
Range Delete
Selecting Range Delete from Figure 2-149 displays a URI Format
Configuration page (Figure 2-167).
Figure 2-168 Person Range Delete page
Step 1
Select the desired filter of the range delete from drop list.
Step 2
If you use an alphabet or numeric value as the query parameter, enter
the value in the From and To text box fields.
The value in the To field acts as the upper limit for the range of people that would be
deleted.
NOTE
To delete a range of first names from Daniel to Marty, enter Daniel in the From field
and Marty in the To field (Figure 2-169).
For example, if the database has the following people (first names) - Marla, Mars,
Marty and Martyn, the table below (Table 2-12) shows the results.
TIP
Table 2-12 Range of Persons to Delete
From
To
Result
Daniel
Mar
None of the 4 people mentioned above would be
deleted, since they fall outside of the range.
Daniel
Mars
Marla and Mars would be deleted but Marty and Martyn
would remain.
Daniel
Marty
Marla, Mars and Marty would be deleted and Martyn
would remain.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-150
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-169 Range Delete
Step 3
If another query parameter is used, such as a multi-byte character, enter
the value in the From text box field only.
Step 4
Click Delete. This may take a few minutes depending on the number of
people to be removed. A maximum of 500 people can be deleted at a
time.
A Person cannot be deleted if they are in use by the system. In this case, retry the
range delete or execute after business hours.
NOTE
If you want to delete all persons in the OW5000 database, the recommended way is
to use DBTool—Bulk Delete.
NOTE
I
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-151
Extension Management
Selecting Extensions from the OW5000 Directory Menu (Figure 2-148)
displays an Extensions Management page (Figure 2-170).
Figure 2-170 Extensions Management page
From the Extensions page, you can search for an extension, add a new
extension, edit an existing extension, or delete an existing extension. To
sort the columns in ascending or descending order, click the column
headings.
A column named Assigned To is to show to what entities an Extension
is assigned. The entities to which an Extension may be assigned include
the following:
• Conference Bridge *
• Contact Method
• Location
• Reserved Line *
• Subline *
• Unit
* In previous versions, Conference Bridges, Reserved Lines and
Sublines were excluded from being displayed on the Extension
Management page.
Assigned To will display only the first assignment for extensions having
more than one assignment. The remaining assignments can be viewed
in the popup window by moving the mouse over the initial assignment.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-152
OW5000 Configuration
The entity to which the Extension is assigned will be displayed with text/
name that represents the entity and will be linked to the corresponding
page in OW5000 Administrator where it may be edited.
When more than one entry is present, an ellipse (...) will be displayed to
indicate that additional assignments are available for viewing.
Searching for Extensions
Step 1
Select a PBX from the drop list in the Filter field and click Search. 

You can also search by Number by clicking in the drop list and choosing
Starts with, Contains, Ends With, or Equals, and then entering a value
in the text box and pressing Search.

Wild card “*” is not required. To display all extensions after you have
filtered them, leave the text box blank and click Search again.
Add New Extension
Step 1
To add an extension, click Add New in the Extensions page 
(Figure 2-170). An Add New Extension page displays (Figure 2-171).
Figure 2-171 Add New Extension page
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 2
NOTE
2-153
Enter the Extension number.
Enter a private number for an IP Centrex environment.
Enter a PBX line and an ACD line for an ACD Agent/Supervisor terminal if you are
using SOAP (Call Notification API) or Call Notification API.
Step 3
Select a PBX from the drop list.
Step 4
Select the PhoneType from the drop list. PhoneType options are listed
below:
—Dterm
—Analog
—Mobility
—PS
—SIMPLE (used for SIMPLE terminal)
—SP30(SIP) (used for SIP protocol softphone)
—VoWLAN (used for MH2XX terminal)
Select Dterm as a Phone Type in the case of a Dterm (Protims Mode, SIP Mode) and
a SP30 (Protims Mode).
NOTE
Step 5
Select the Tenant number from the drop list.
Step 6
Select the Country from the drop list.
Step 7
Enter the DID Number.
The Country option is for the US market only.
NOTE
NOTE
Step 8
Enter the telURI (used for LCS/OCS Integration only). Refer to the
UNIVERGE OW5000 Installation Guide, OW5000 Remote Call Control
Service, or related documentation for more information.

If the URI format in set in the URI format page, the telURI is generated
automatically by clicking the Auto Input button. 

If the URI format is not configured, nothing displays, even if you click the
Auto Input button.
Step 9
Enter the SIPURI for this extension.
This field is required if you are using the SIP presence feature. It is unique per PBX
and consists of [email protected] name. Normally, XXXX is the same as the extension
number and the domain name must be the same as the name, which is assigned by
the PBX. For example, [email protected]
If the URI format in set in the URI format page, the SIPURI is generated
automatically by clicking the Auto Input button.
If the URI format is not configured, nothing is displayed even if you click
the Auto Input button.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-154
OW5000 Configuration
Step 10 Select the SIP Access Server from the drop list. Select the proper
Access Server for the SP30 (SIP) and the VoWLAN terminal, and select
Presence Gateway for any other type.
This field is required if you are using the SIP presence feature. If the SIP presence
feature is not required, select Not Assigned.
NOTE
Step 11
Select whether or not Collaboration is enabled for your phone to be a
handset of the Dterm SP30. If this flag is set, the presence for this
terminal is aggregated with the terminal selected from the drop list.
Please do not configure when the Microsoft LCS/OCS Integration and
SOAP (Call Control) API is used.
The Extension configuration for the handset must be configured before setting the
Collaboration.
NOTE
Step 12 Select whether or not this extension Is Monitored by clicking in the
check box.
NOTE
Is Monitored must be checked in the following case:
• Use presence for non SIP terminal
• Get history via OW5000 API (Call Control), OW5000 API (Call Notification), and
OW5000 (Information API)
Refer to the documentation for each OW5000 related application.
Step 13 Enter the number for a subline, then click Add Subline to assign a
subline.
Step 14 Select the SIP Registration Service Server from the drop list. This must
be assigned to the same PBX to which the Extension is assigned. If the
PBX is not assigned, none of it’s Extensions may be assigned.
Step 15 Enter your Softphone Login ID and Softphone Password. The Login
ID is optional.
Step 16
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the new extension.
—Click Apply & Add New to save the new extension and keep adding
another extension. (PBX, Phone Type, Tenant, and the SIP Access
Server configuration, used in the previous data, are continuously
displayed.)
—Click Done to save the new extension and return to the list page.
—Click Cancel to discard all changes and return to the list page.
If IsMonitored is enabled for an extension that does not exist, it causes extra traffic
between the PBX and the OW5000 system. When the PBX setting is changed,
please update the OW5000 configuration also.
IMPORTANT
Table 2-13 describes the required parameters for each function.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-155
Table 2-13 Parameter Requirements
OW5000 API OW5000 API
OW5000 API
(Call Notifica- (Information
(Call Control)
tion)
API)
Lync/OCS/
SIP Presence
LCS
Configuration
Integration
Extension
X
X
X
X
X
PBX
X
X
X
X
X
Phone Type
X
X
X
X
X
Tenant
X
X
X
X
X
Country
X
X
X
X
DID Number
telURI
X
SIPURI
X
SIP Access
Server
X
Collaboration
X
Is Monitored
X
Sublines
X
X
SIP Registration
Service Server
Softphone Login
ID
Softphone
Password
Note: Is Monitored must be checked in the following case.
• Use presence for non SIP terminal
• Get history via OW5000 API (Call Control), OW5000 API (Call Notification), and OW5000 (Information
API). Refer to the documentation for each OW5000 related application.
A subline must be configured only when the call log for subline is required.
NOTE
Editing or Deleting Extensions
Step 1
To edit an extension, click the Pencil icon next to the desired extension
(Figure 2-170).
Step 2
After making the necessary changes, do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the new extension.
—Click Done to save the new extension and return to the list page.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-156
OW5000 Configuration
—Click Cancel to discard all changes and return to the list page.
NOTE
When editing an extension, additional read-only fields may be displayed next to the
ones that are visible when adding a new extension. They contain additional
extension attributes that were imported from external sources, such as MA4000 (e.g.
MA4000 Location or emergency data).
Step 3
To Delete an extension, click the Trashcan icon next to the desired
extension.
Range Delete—Extensions
Use the following steps to delete a range of extensions.
Step 1
Click Range Delete from the Extension Management page 
(Figure 2-170).
Figure 2-172 Range Delete—Extensions page
NOTE
Step 2
Select the PBX and Tenant number from the drop list.
Step 3
Enter the Starting Extension and Ending Extension in the text boxes.
Step 4
Click Delete. Depending on the number of extensions you are deleting,
this may take several seconds or minutes.
A maximum of 500 extensions can be deleted at a time. If the specified range
includes more than 500 extensions, the remaining extensions can be deleted with
repeated Range Deletes.
During business hours, some extensions may not be deleted if the extension is in
use. In this case, try Range Delete again after business hours.
URI format—Extensions
Selecting URI Format from Figure 2-170 displays a URI Format
Configuration page (Figure 2-173).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-157
Figure 2-173 URI Format Configuration—Extensions page
By configuring this translation rule correctly, telURI and SIPURI can be
created easily when in Person Management, using the Auto Input
button.
Extension pattern regular expression (for telURI)
Defines the target extension range using the regular expression. Default
is ^([0-9,#,*]{1-16})$and indicates that all extensions are allowed by
the PBX. Refer to Appendix C for more information on the regular
expression.
Translation pattern regular expression - (for telURI)
Defines the translated pattern (telURI) in this filed. The extension is
treated as $0.
Example of setting:
Extension pattern regular expression: ^([0-9,#,*]{1-16})$
Translation pattern regular expression: $0:phone-context=nec.com
Extension number: 5000
Translation result of telURI: 5000:phone-context=nec.com
Extension pattern regular expression (for SIPURI)
Translation pattern regular expression - (for SIPURI)
Auto translation configuration for SIPURI. All specifications are the same
as telURI.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-158
OW5000 Configuration
User Management
Selecting Users from the OW5000 Directory Menu (Figure 2-148)
displays a User Management page (Figure 2-174). This option allows
you to manage user information, and to add or change application and
role privileges. The following figure is an example when the United
States is selected as the Sales Regions.
Figure 2-174 User Management page
Use the steps below to change passwords, application privileges, or to
delete a user account.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-159
Modifying a User Account
Use the following steps to modify an account.
Step 1
Select the Pencil icon next to the desired person from the list of
displayed names (Figure 2-174), or enter data in the Filter By field and
click Search.
Step 2
Enter the Login ID.
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 3
Enter a new password in the New Password field.
The length of the password must be at least eight characters long and include the
following rules:
NOTE
1 Uppercase letter (A-Z)
1 Lowercase letter (a-z)
1 Digit (0-9)
1 Special Character (excluding a space, square brackets, backslash, and single or
double quotes)
Step 4
Enter the new password again in the Confirm New Password field.
Step 5
For Windows Authentication, enter the NTLM Login ID for the user.
This parameter is displayed only when the United States is selected as the Sales
Region or if OW5000 Applications which are released in US market is installed.
NOTE
Step 6
Enter the Jabber ID. A unique Jabber ID can be entered manually or you
can allow a Jabber ID to be automatically generated by clicking the
Apply button after entering all other information desired for the User
account. The default Jabber ID will follow the format [email protected]
Maximum 1023 characters. All ASCII characters are accepted.
Step 7
To disable the user role for any reason, click the check box Login is
disabled.
Step 8
To set the password to never expire for the user, click the check box
Password never expires.
Step 9
Select the desired privilege for OW5000 Administrator as well as any
installed applications. See each application's installation guide for a
definition of each available choice.
Step 10 To Enable calendar Link Registration for this user, click the check
box.
Step 11
If you enabled Calendar Link Registration, enter the Registration
Status: Primary Email address. This allows pre-population in the
Primary Email field if the user has a Work Email contact method.
Step 12 Click Apply.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-160
OW5000 Configuration
Modifying an Administrator Account
Follow the steps below to edit the password for an administrator account
ONLY.
The delete icon in Figure 2-174 is not available for an administrator account.
NOTE
Step 1
Select the Pencil icon next to the desired administrator account from the
list of displayed names.
Step 2
Enter the new password in the New Password field, then enter the
password again in the Confirm Password field and click Apply.
You cannot change any other fields for an administrator account, only the password.
NOTE
Deleting a User Account
Step 1
Select the Trashcan icon next to the desired user from the list of
displayed names (Figure 2-174), or enter data in the Filter By field and
click Search. A delete confirmation dialog displays.
Step 2
Click OK to delete the user role for this person.
Organization Management
Organization is used to create entries such as company, division or
department data. In the Employee Role page, the user can make a
relation between an employee and an organization.
Selecting Organizations from the OW5000 Directory Menu (Figure 2148) displays an Organizations Management page (Figure 2-175).
Figure 2-175 Organizations Management page
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-161
Use this page to add, edit, or delete organizations. Use Expand All to
view all Organizations or Collapse All to only view the parent
organization.
To remove or edit an existing organization, highlight the organization and click Edit
or Delete.
NOTE
Adding an Organization
Step 1
NOTE
Click Add New from the Organization page. An Organization—Add New
page displays (Figure 2-176).
Highlight Organization to add a new parent organization.
• Select a row in the grid of an organization entry that has an organization type with a
hierarchy and click the Add New button to add a child organization.
• Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
You can also use the plus and minus symbols to Collapse or Expand the view.
NOTE
Figure 2-176 Organization—Add New page
Step 2
Select the Organization Type of number to add from the drop list, either
Internal or External.
Step 3
Enter the Name of the organization.
Step 4
Select the Type of organization from the drop list.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-162
OW5000 Configuration
Step 5
Enter any desired Notes.
Adding Locations
Step 1
If no locations are assigned, or you wish to add more locations, click Add
New in the Locations section. An Organization—Add Locations page
displays (Figure 2-177).
Figure 2-177 Organization—Add Locations page
Step 2
Select the location to add from the drop list and then click Select.
Adding Phone Numbers
Step 1
If no phone numbers are assigned, or you wish to add more numbers,
click Add in the Phone Numbers section. An Organization—Add Phone
Numbers page displays (Figure 2-178).
Figure 2-178 Organization—Add Phone Numbers page
Step 2
Select the PBX from the drop list.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-163
Step 3
To find a number, select a Filter option from the drop list and then click
Search.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to update the changes.
—Click Done to save the changes and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Creating Custom Hierarchies
Click Organization Type Hierarchy Management from the Links
menu box (Figure 2-176) to display a list of Organization Hierarchies or
to add a new custom hierarchy (Figure 2-186).
Figure 2-179 Organization Hierarchy
Step 1
Click Add New Hierarchy to display Figure 2-180.
Figure 2-180 Add New Hierarchy—Organization
Step 2
Enter the Description of the new hierarchy.
Step 3
Enter the Code for the description.
Step 4
Select the Add Unit Type button to create the Organization.
Step 5
Repeat Step 2 thru Step 4 to continue adding child location types to the
hierarchy. The Hierarchy Under Construction—Location page displays 
(Figure 2-181).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-164
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-181 Hierarchy Under Construction—Organization page
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 6
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to update the changes.
—Click Done to save the changes and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Locations Management
Location is used to create entries such as for buildings, rooms, or
geographical areas. In the Employee Role page, the user can make a
relation between an employee and a location.
Displays only if the United States is selected as the Sales Regions.
NOTE
Selecting Locations from the OW5000 Directory Menu (Figure 2-148)
displays a Location Management page (Figure 2-182).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-165
Figure 2-182 Location Management page
Adding a Location
Step 1
NOTE
Click Add New from the Location Management page. An Add New
Location page displays (Figure 2-183).
• Select Home and press Add New to add a new parent location.
• Select a row in the grid of a location entry that has a location type with a hierarchy
and click the Add New button to add a child location.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-166
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-183 Add New Location page
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 2
Enter the Name of the location.
Step 3
Select the Type of location from the drop list (required).
The Type will be pre-selected if the new location has a parent.
NOTE
Step 4
Enter any desired Notes.
Step 5
To assign phone numbers, click Add New. An Add Location Internal
Phone page displays (Figure 2-184). See Figure 2-185 for adding an
External Phone.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-167
Figure 2-184 Add Location Internal Phone page
Step 6
Select the PBX or choose <All> from the drop list.
Step 7
To find a number, select a Filter option from the drop list and then click
Search.
Step 8
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to update the changes.
—Click Done to save the changes and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-168
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-185 Add Location External Phone page
Step 9
Select a Country from the drop list.
Step 10 Enter the Number and press Add.
Creating Custom Hierarchies
Click Location Type Hierarchy Management from the Links menu
box (Figure 2-182) to display a list of Location Hierarchies or to add a
new custom hierarchy (Figure 2-186).
Figure 2-186 Location Hierarchy
Step 1
Click Add New Hierarchy to display Figure 2-187.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-169
Figure 2-187 Add New Hierarchy
Step 2
Enter the Description of the new hierarchy.
Step 3
Enter the Code for the description.
Step 4
Select the Add Location Type button to create the Location.
Step 5
Repeat Step 2 thru Step 4 to continue adding child location types to the
hierarchy. The Hierarchy Under Construction—Location page displays 
(Figure 2-188).
Figure 2-188 Hierarchy Under Construction—Location page
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 6
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to update the changes.
—Click Done to save the changes and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-170
OW5000 Configuration
Categories
Selecting Categories from the OW5000 Directory Menu (Figure 2-148)
displays Figure 2-189. This option is used to group organizations,
locations, and people together.
Displays only if the United States is selected as the Sales Regions.
NOTE
Prior to adding categories, the Organizations, Locations, and People
must already be configured by OW5000 Administrator. Please refer to
“Organization Management” on page 2-160, “Dialing Locations” on
page 2-19, and “People” on page 2-131.
Figure 2-189 Category Management page
Adding Categories
Step 1
To add a new category, click Add New. Figure 2-190 displays.
Figure 2-190 Add New Category page
Step 2
Enter the Category Name and a Category Description.
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 3
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the changes.
—Click Done to save the changes and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-171
Figure 2-191 Category Added page
Editing Categories
Step 1
Select the desired category name and click Edit. Make the necessary
changes and then do one of the following.
—Click Apply to save the changes.
—Click Done to save the changes and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Assigning Categories
Select the desired category name and click Assign Categories. Figure 2-192
displays.
Figure 2-192 Assign Categories page
Step 1
Select an Organization or use the Search option to link an organization
with the category.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-172
OW5000 Configuration
Step 2
Select the search criteria from the Filter drop list.
Step 3
Select the Field in which to search from the drop list.

For example, select Contains, Equals, or Starts With and click Search. A
Database Search Results screen displays listing all previously entered
data.
Configuring Positions
Selecting Positions from the OW5000 Directory Menu (Figure 2-148)
displays a Position Management page (Figure 2-193). The following
figure is an example when the United States is selected as the Sales
Regions.
Figure 2-193 Position Management page
Step 1
To find a position, enter data in the Filter text box and click Search.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-173
Adding a Position
Step 1
Click Add New Position from the Position Management page (Figure 2193). A Position—Add New page displays (Figure 2-194).
Figure 2-194 Position—Add New page
Step 2
Enter the position name in the Title field.
Step 3
(Optional) Enter the position abbreviation in the Abbreviation field.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Done to save the information and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
To remove or edit an existing position, select the Pencil or Trashcan icon.
NOTE
Routes/Trunks Management
Selecting Routes/Trunks from the OW5000 Directory Menu 
(Figure 2-148), displays a Route/Trunk Management page 
(Figure 2-195).
Figure 2-195 displays only if the United States is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
Figure 2-195 Route/Trunk Management page
Use the following steps to add, edit, or delete a Route Trunk:
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-174
OW5000 Configuration
Adding a Route Trunk
Step 1
Click Add New Trunk from the Route Trunks page. A Route Trunks—
Add page displays (Figure 2-196).
Figure 2-196 Route Trunks—Add page
Step 2
Enter the number for this trunk in the Route Number field.
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 3
Enter the Name associated with this trunk number.
Step 4
Enter the Beginning Trunk and the Ending Trunk number.
Step 5
Select a PBX from the drop list.
Step 6
Select the Tenant Number from the drop list.
Step 7
Enter the desired values in the UserDefined fields.
Step 8
Click the Pencil or Trashcan icon to edit or delete a Route/Trunk.
Step 9
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information without closing the page.
—Click Done to save the record and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit the page without saving the record.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-175
User Privileges Management
User Privileges provides a way to assign User Roles, Application Roles,
Organization and Location to people in bulk. It also provides a way to
modify application permissions for multiple UC700 and UA5200 users
through the Permissions tab.
Selecting User Privileges from the OW5000 Directory Menu 
(Figure 2-148) displays a User Privilege Management page \
(Figure 2-197).
The following figure is an example when the United States is selected as the Sales
Regions.
NOTE
Figure 2-197 User Privilege Management page
Step 1
To search for users, enter the name in the Filter field. You can find
people by Organization, Location, Roles and Application Security. For
Example: Selecting Employee under Roles will show a list of all
Employees in the Results box. The Filter text field searches the names
seen in the Results box. You can select one or more people from the
results box and move them to the Selected Members box by clicking the
right arrows.
You cannot pick a different filter option such as search by Organizations
after you have already selected members. The selected members box
will be cleared.
Step 2
Click Apply once the list of selected members is finalized.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-176
OW5000 Configuration
Application Security
Selecting the Security tab displays Figure 2-198.
Figure 2-198 Application Security
Step 1
Select the desired User Roles for the selected members. Employee,
Physician or Student are common selections. A person can have more
than one role. Depending on the vertical market, the Guest or Patient
role will be visible, however guests or patients are typically added to the
system by the Patient Link or Guest Link applications.
Step 2
If the User check box is checked, a list of installed applications and the
applications security authorizations are seen (Figure 2-198).
Step 3
Check the desired application and application security authorization to
add in bulk to the selected members.
Step 4
Optional, select Location or Organization.
When creating a user, a default user login id and password is created.
NOTE
NOTE
If the person being modified does not have an assigned role but Organization/
Location is selected on this page, an Employee role will be created for this person
and associated with the selected Organization/Location.
If the person is already assigned a role, like Physician/Employee/Patient, and has an
associated Organization/Location, they will simply be updated with the new values.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-177
If multiple people are assigned User Roles using the User Privilege page, the
default password that the OW5000 uses for the created logins is Passw0rd$.
NOTE
A maximum of 500 people can be modified at one time.
NOTE
An Employee role is required for the UC700 and MC550 applications. Employee will
automatically get created for those roles.
NOTE
Step 5
Click Apply.
Changing Permissions for UA5200 and UC700
Selecting the Permissions tab from Figure 2-198 displays an
Application Permissions page.
Figure 2-199 Application Permissions page
Step 1
Expand the desired application (UC700 or UA5200) and select one of the
application's security authorizations.
Step 2
Select members from the results list with the arrow button.
Step 3
Select the desired permissions to assign to the users and then press
Apply.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-178
OW5000 Configuration
Configuring Specialties
Selecting Specialties from the OW5000 Directory Menu 
(Figure 2-148) displays a Specialty Management page.
Specialty Management is displayed only when UA5200 is installed on the system
and if the Medical System license key is installed.
IMPORTANT
Figure 2-200 Specialty Management page
Adding a Specialty
Step 1
Click Add New Specialty from the Specialty Management page. A
Specialty—Add New page displays (Figure 2-201).
Figure 2-201 Specialty—Add New page
Step 2
Enter a name in the Description field.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 3
2-179
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the specialty.
—Click Done to save the changes and exit the page.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Step 4
To remove or edit an existing specialty, select the Pencil or Trashcan
icon next to the specialty name.
Restriction Classes
The Restriction Class (RC) page allows a way to add a meaningful label
to the restriction class assigned to a phone. Applications such as
UA5200 Client that integrates with Room Direct displays the restriction
class of a phone for a patient for example.
The restriction class tells an attendant if the patient has phone control
on or off. The different RC values are programmed in the PBX. The label
assigned to an RC value should match the behavior when the Restriction
Class is assigned to the phone. For example, RC 0 could be programmed
as "No phone service" in the PBX, so the label Restriction Class 0 could
be updated to read "No phone service". When the patient with a phone
that has RC0 set is seen in the directory, instead of the attendant seeing
RC0, the attendant will now see "No phone service".
Selecting Restriction Classes from the OW5000 Directory Menu
(Figure 2-148) displays Figure 2-202.
Figure 2-202 Restriction Classes page
Step 1
Select the Pencil icon for the Restriction Class Code to update.
Step 2
Erase the default description and enter your desired text.
Step 3
Click Apply to save, or Done to save and return to the main restriction
classes page, or Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-180
OW5000 Configuration
Help Menu
Selecting Help from the OW5000 Administration Control Panel displays
Figure 2-203.
Figure 2-203 Help Menu
Selecting Version Information displays the latest version information
for OW5000 Administrator.
Figure 2-204 OW5000 Version Information
By default, 20 items are listed on one page. This can be increased to a maximum of
500 items per page.
NOTE
The other entries in the Help menu (i.e. Message Center and Procedure
Manager) are links to individual online Help files. These menu options
will only be seen when the applications are installed.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-181
Licensed Information
This page displays the current number of licenses in a system and only
the region using License Manager.
Selecting Licenses from the Help Menu Figure 2-203 displays 
Figure 2-205.
Figure 2-205 does not display when Asia is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
Figure 2-205 Licensed Information page
Licenses - This field is sortable.
Total Licenses (PBX) - This field is sortable and indicates the total
licenses in a system using the same PBX as the LMS host PBX. For
example, if three OW5000 servers are connected with the same LMC, all
administrators can see the same number of total licenses from the
Admin License Management page.
Total Licenses (Server) - This field indicates the total number of
licenses assigned to this server. This is assigned at the LMC web page.
Used Licenses (Server) - This field is sortable and indicates the used
licenses in a system using the same PBX as the LMS host PBX. For
example, if three OW5000 servers are connected with the same LMC, all
administrators can see the same number of used licenses from the
Admin License Management page.
Results per page - This sets the number of records to be displayed on
each page.
Page - This sets the target page to be displayed.
Licenses can also be accessed from Platform > License.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-182
OW5000 Configuration
MA4000 Integration
Please refer to Chapter 7, "OW5000-MA4000 Integration" on page 7-1
for more information.
Exiting OW5000 Administrator
The OW5000 Administrator user interface can be exited by closing your
browser or by clicking Log Out in the OW5000 Administrator Control
Panel (Figure 2-8).
NOTE
OW5000 Administrator will automatically time out if there is no activity after 15
minutes (default). If this happens, you will need to login again to continue the
configuration.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
3-1
3
WatchDog
WatchDog is a utility in the OW5000. It operates in the background and
monitors selected software service applications.
Should a service encounter some type of data error, it may shutdown
and disable the network service it was providing. Since these services
cannot restart themselves, WatchDog can detect the service outage and
then restart the service application. WatchDog can monitor multiple
service applications residing on the local server.
When WatchDog detects a monitored service shutdown, it first makes a
log entry, and after a set interval, restarts the service. Log entries can
aid in application troubleshooting. If the monitored service has any
dependent services set up (typically automatically set during the
installation of the application), they will be stopped before the
monitored service is restarted.
The following topics are included in this chapter.
Chapter Topics
• Verifying the WatchDog Status
• WatchDog Helper
Verifying the WatchDog Status
WatchDog is installed during the initial OW5000 installation. No
additional installation is required. It is configured by default to
automatically start every time the OW5000 Server boots.
These settings can be verified through the Administrative Tools window.
WatchDog cannot monitor the service if it is installed on another server.
WatchDog Helper
WatchDog Helper is the graphical user interface (GUI) for the OW5000
WatchDog application. The following sections describe the windows and
functions of WatchDog Helper.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
3-2
WatchDog
Main Window
Starting the WatchDog Helper program displays the WatchDog Helper
main window (Figure 3-1).
Step 1
Start WatchDog Helper by clicking the Start button on the workstation
desktop, and then select All Programs > NEC OW5000 > Runtime
Platform > WatchDog Helper.
Figure 3-1 WatchDog Helper main window
The columns in the WatchDog Helper main window (Figure 3-1) are
described in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 WatchDog Helper main window—columns
Option
Action
OW5000
Application
Services that have been assigned to be monitored by
WatchDog.
Host Machine
Name of the local Host server where services are
monitored by WatchDog.
Monitoring
Indicates whether WatchDog monitoring is currently
enabled for a service. A service may be listed to be
monitored, but can have monitoring temporarily turned
off to allow for specific testing of the service
application. This would be useful if testing could
generate errors or changes in the operating status of
the service.
Retry Interval
Displays the time interval (in seconds) that WatchDog
will wait, after it monitors a service shutdown, before it
restarts the monitored service. This interval is set as
appropriate for the service and its specific
requirements in restarting.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
WatchDog
3-3
Option
Action
Service Status
Additional way to determine if the service itself is
running. A Service Status of "Running" could indicate
a service that was started. A Service Status of "Not
Running" could indicate a service that was shut down.
A Service Status of "Invalid/Non Existing Service"
could indicate the service is not registered to the OS.
A Service Status of "WatchDog not running" could
indicate that service monitoring is shutdown. A Service
Status of "Not Monitored" could indicate that the
Monitoring setting is inactivated or that service
monitoring is not set.
Main Window Display Options
The main window Tool and Status bars can be enabled or disabled. From
the menu bar, under View select to enable or disable the tool and status
bars.
The main window application listing can be sorted by selected column.
Click on a column label (OW5000 Application, Host Machine, Monitoring,
Retry Interval, or Service Status) to sort the list by that column.
Alternate selection of the sort column will alternately sort the list in
ascending or descending order.
The main window listing can be further sorted and the display enhanced
for readability.
Step 1
Select View > Options from the main window. A WatchDog Helper
Options page displays (Figure 3-2).
Figure 3-2 WatchDog Helper Options page
The Options page provides the selection of a secondary sort parameter.
Step 2
Select the secondary column from the Apply secondary sort on drop
list.
Step 3
The main window listing can be displayed with a different line color for
other service applications for easier readability. Select the Use alternate
colors to display list items box to apply the Multi Color display style.
Step 4
Click OK.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
3-4
WatchDog
Main Window Toolbar
The main window toolbar (Figure 3-3) provides toolbar buttons to
quickly access the primary WatchDog Helper functions.
Figure 3-3 WatchDog Helper main window toolbar
The seven buttons (left to right) provide quick access to the functions
described in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2 Main window toolbar
Add Service item
Delete Service item
Update Service item
Stop Service
Start WatchDog
Stop WatchDog
About (Shows the “About This Program”
information)
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
WatchDog
3-5
The functions can also be selected by clicking the right mouse button to
display the context (shortcut) menu (Figure 3-4). Select the desired
function as indicated. These functions are described in detail in the
following sections.
Figure 3-4 WatchDog Helper shortcut menu
Adding a Service
Use the following steps to add a service application for monitoring by
WatchDog.
Step 1
Do one of the following in the main WatchDog Helper window:
—Click Tools > Add Service.
—Right-click the name of any OW5000 Application in the main window
and select Add Service.
—Click the Add Service
Roles button.
A WatchDog Helper Add Service page displays (Figure 3-5).
Figure 3-5 WatchDog Helper Add Service page
Step 2
Select the desired Host from the drop list of available machines in the
Host Machine field.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
3-6
WatchDog
Step 3
Select the OW5000 application to be monitored by WatchDog for the
specific Host Machine from the Installed OW5000 Application field.
If nothing is shown, all the OW5000 applications are already monitored by
WatchDog.
NOTE
NOTE
Step 4
Select the Monitor Service box under Options if WatchDog monitoring is
to be enabled at this time.
Step 5
Enter the Retry Interval (in seconds) for the restart of this application
following a shutdown.
Some applications take longer to completely shut down than others. Selecting a retry
interval that is too short may result in a service race condition where a service may
try to restart before it is completely shut down. This can result in serious problems
with Windows and the services may not start properly.
Step 6
Select the Add button to add the service item, or Cancel to leave this
function without saving your changes. Once an application item is added,
it will then be listed on the WatchDog Helper main window of monitored
service applications.
Deleting a Service
Use the following steps to delete a monitored service application from
WatchDog.
Step 1
Do one of the following in the main WatchDog Helper window:
—Select OW5000 Application, then click Tools > Delete Service.
—Right-click the name of any OW5000 Application in the main window
and select Delete Service.
—Select OW5000 Application, then click the Delete Service
button.
A WatchDog Helper Delete Service page displays (Figure 3-6).
Figure 3-6 WatchDog Helper Delete Service page
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
WatchDog
3-7
The information in the page verifies the service to be removed from
WatchDog monitoring.
Step 2
Click Delete to delete the item.
Updating a Service
Use the following steps to update WatchDog settings for any monitored
service application.
Step 1
Do one of the following in the main WatchDog Helper window:
—Select OW5000 Application, then click Tools > Update Service.
—Double click the name of any OW5000 Application in the main window.
—Right-click the name of any OW5000 Application in the main window
and select Update Service.
—Select OW5000 Application, then click Update.
A WatchDog Update Item page displays (Figure 3-7).
Figure 3-7 WatchDog Update Item page
Step 2
Select or clear the Monitor Service box under Options if you want to
change this choice.
Step 3
If desired, change the Retry Interval (in seconds) for the restart of this
application following a shutdown.
Step 4
Select Update to save the changes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
3-8
WatchDog
Stopping a Service
Use the following steps to stop an OW5000 application from WatchDog
Helper.
Step 1
Do one of the following in the main WatchDog Helper window:
—Select OW5000 Application, then click Tools > Stop Service.
—Right-click the name of any OW5000 Application in the main window
and select Stop Service.
—Select OW5000 Application, then click the Stop Service
Roles
button. 

A WatchDog Helper page displays verifying the selected service
application to stop. This function can aid in troubleshooting services.
Step 2
NOTE
Click Yes. 

A few seconds after stopping a service, the main window Service Status
for the selected service should indicate 'Not Running'. But, if WatchDog
service is started, after the Retry Interval time is passed, the status will
go back to 'Running'.
A Service can be stopped from the Services window. But if WatchDog service is
running, the service cannot be stopped. To stop the service from the Services
window, stop OWWatchDog first.
If OW5000 Access Server is installed on a separate server, it cannot be monitored by
WatchDog service. Stop the service from the installed server's Service window.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
There is a case that the status of the Access Server keep displaying "Stopping" when
the user tries to stop/restart. In this case, stop the AccessServer.exe from Task
Manager.
When stopping a service for OWTelephony Event Notification and OWOaiServer, the
terminal which has been in a call shows the on-phone status until the on-hook event
is occurred after restart. (non SIP terminal presence feature is used)
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
WatchDog
3-9
Starting WatchDog
Starting WatchDog will enable and start WatchDog monitoring for all
listed service applications. Select Start WatchDog from the menu bar,
toolbar, or click the right mouse button. A few seconds after starting
WatchDog, the main window Service Status should indicate the current
status for each service.
Step 1
In the WatchDog Helper main window, follow one of the options below:
—Click the Start WatchDog button
.
—Right-click at the main window and then click WatchDog > Start
Service.
WatchDog can start from Control Panel > Administrative Tools> Services and
then start OWWatchDog service.
NOTE
OW5000 Access Server which is installed in a separate server cannot be monitored
by WatchDog.
NOTE
Stopping WatchDog
WatchDog monitoring can be stopped for all service applications. This
could be useful in application maintenance activities. Select Stop
WatchDog from the menu bar, toolbar, or click the right mouse button.
The main window Service Status should indicate 'WatchDog Not
Running' for all services.
Follow the steps below to stop WatchDog.
Step 1
Do one of following from the WatchDog Helper main window.
—Click the Stop WatchDog button
.
—Right-click in the main window and then select WatchDog > Stop
Service.
WatchDog can be stopped from the Services window. (OWWatchDog service)
NOTE
Exiting WatchDog Helper
Exit the WatchDog Helper application from the menu bar, under the File
menu and select Exit.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
3-10
WatchDog
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-1
4
Log Viewer
Log Viewer is a utility in the UNIVERGE OW5000. OW5000 applications
generally log events to the OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor). These
logs are then stored into log file.
Log Viewer gives a system administrator the ability to:
• Connect to the OW5000 Log Server, display logged event, and change
the log level.
• Open .LOG files generated by the Log Server to query, filter, and
display their contents.
• Open the current log file which is created by the OW5000 Log Server
and display the Real-time log information.
The following topics are included in this chapter.
Chapter Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Log Viewer Support Feature
Starting Log Viewer
Log Viewer Main Window
Standard Query Mode
Print Log Information
Real-time Query Mode
Configuration of OW5000 Application Log Level
Log File Maintenance
Change Query Mode
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-2
Log Viewer
Log Viewer Support Feature
Log Viewer support features are different based on the environment and
the conditions.
There are two operating environment choices:
• Using Log Viewer on the OW5000 Platform installed server (Local).
• Using Log Viewer on a separate server from the OW5000 Platform
installed server (Remote).
There are two start-up modes available:
• Connecting with the OW5000 Log Server (Log Server)
• Connecting with the OAI.LOG file
#
Features
Local
Remote
Log Server
OAI.LOG
Log Server
OAI.LOG
1
Query/Display current log file
(Standard Query)
X
-
X
-
2
Query/Display saved log file
(Standard Query)
-
X
-
X
3
Filtering by text
(Standard Query)
X
X
X
X
4
Search by text
(Standard Query)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5
High light display
(Standard Query)
6
Day Light Saving adjustment
(Standard Query)
X
X
X
X
7
Display attached data
(Standard Query)
X
X
X
X
8
Print out event information
(Standard Query)
X
X
X
X
9
Save search result
(Standard Query)
X
-
-
-
10
Bookmark
(Standard Query)
X
-
-
-
11
Query/ Real-time Display current log
file (Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
12
Filtering by text
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
13
Search by text
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
14
High light display
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
15
Day Light Saving adjustment
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
16
Display attached data
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
#
NOTE
Features
Local
4-3
Remote
Log Server
OAI.LOG
Log Server
OAI.LOG
17
Print out event information
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
18
Save search result
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
19
Bookmark
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
20
Change Log Level
X
-
X
-
21
Maintenance Log File
X
-
X
22
Change Query Mode
X
-
X
-
Multiple Log Viewers can be used on the same server. However, it might be a
problem when the Log Viewer configuration is changed. Therefore, do not change
any configurations while multiple Log Viewers are being used.
Starting Log Viewer
Log Viewer connects to the OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor) or the log
file which was created by the OW5000 Log Server.
Use the following steps to start Log Viewer:
Step 1
From the desktop, click the Start button, and then select All Programs >
NEC OW5000 > Runtime Platform > Log Viewer. A Connect to
OW5000 Log page displays (Figure 4-1).
Figure 4-1 Connect to OW5000 Log page
Step 2
In the Location field, type the name where the Log Server is to connect.

If this is a Local Server, type the OW5000 Platform computer name
where it connects to the OW5000 Log Server.

If this is a Remote Server, type the OW5000 Platform server IP Address
and port number (5690). For example, 127.0.0.1:5690. If the DNS is
available, the OW5000 Platform computer name is available even if it is a
remote server. You can also use the browse button (...) to select a log file
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-4
Log Viewer
or use the drop list to display all previously opened machines and .LOG
files in the Location field.
Step 3
Click the Connect button, A Log Viewer Main Window displays if it is
connected successfully. A Connect Failed page displays if it failed
(Figure 4-2).
Step 4
Click OK and try again beginning with Step 2.
Figure 4-2 Connection Failed page
Log Viewer Main Window
Starting the Log Viewer program displays the Log Viewer Main Window,
shown in Figure 4-3. Standard Query mode is applied when the Log
Viewer starts.
From the Log Viewer Main window, you can:
• Specify the applications that are displayed.
• Search the log files for specific information, including events, dates,
and text. See “Searching for Logged Events” on page 4-13, for more
information.
• View log file information. See “Viewing Event Data” on page 4-14, for
more information.
• Print log file information. See “Print Log Information” on page 4-15,
for more information.
• Save query results and bookmark them for easy access. See “Saving
Search Results and Working with Bookmarks” on page 4-16, for more
information.
• In Real-time Query mode, Real-time event information displays. See
“Real-time Query Mode” on page 4-18 for more information.
• Change the application log level. See “Configuration of OW5000
Application Log Level” on page 4-20 for more information.
• Maintenance of log files. See “Log File Maintenance” on page 4-22 for
more information.
• Change query mode between Standard Query mode and Real-time
Query mode. See “Log File Maintenance” on page 4-22 for more
information.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-5
Figure 4-3 OW5000 Log Viewer Main window
The Log Viewer window contains the following components:
Title Bar
Displays the name of the application and the name of the OW5000 Log
Server or log file to which Log Viewer is connected.
Figure 4-4 Log Viewer Title Bar
Menu Bar
The menu bar displays at the top of the Log Viewer window and contains
two pull-down menus: File and Help (Figure 4-5).
Figure 4-5 Log Viewer Menu Bar
Menu Bar
Each menu item contains various menu options. Each menu item and its
corresponding menu options are described below:
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-6
Log Viewer
File Menu
The File menu options are Open Log, Print, Print Setup, and Exit. A brief
description of each option is listed below.
Figure 4-6 File Menu
Open Log
Opens a page which enables you to connect to a specified OW5000 Log
Server or .LOG file. When connected to a Log Server, you can view and
configure its log parameters.
Print
Opens the Print page and enables you to print the events that are
currently displayed.
Print Setup
Opens the Print Setup page where you can select your printing options.
Exit
Closes Log Viewer.
Help Menu
The Help menu option is About OW5000 Log Viewer. A description of
this option is listed below (Figure 4-7).
Figure 4-7 Help Menu
About OW5000 Log Viewer
Displays version information for the Log Viewer.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-7
Application Group Box
The Applications Group Box displays the application log sessions so the
user can select a session to perform searches (Figure 4-8). The
Application Group Box displays information for each log session
performed by an application as follows:
Figure 4-8 Application Group Box
Application
The name that the application used for the log session (typically the
name of the application performing the logging).
Start Time
The time of the first event logged by the application for this log session.
Last Logged Time
The time of the last logged event by the application for this log session.
Record Count
Number of records/events logged by the application for this log session.
Applications Displayed Box
The Applications Displayed in the Application Group Box can be altered
so that only the more relevant application log sessions are displayed by
using the controls in the Applications Displayed Box (Figure 4-9).
The Applications Displayed Box is activated only in the Standard Query
Mode. It is deactivated in the Real-time Query Mode.
The controls and their functions are described below:
Figure 4-9 Applications Displayed Box
Logged in the Past XX XXXX
When checked, the user is able to specify the most recent log sessions
by Days, Hours, Minutes or Seconds. If checked, and an application
sessions last log event is not within the specified time, that application
will not be displayed in the Application Group Box.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-8
Log Viewer
Hide Apps With Only Application Headers
When this option is checked, applications are hidden that have not
logged any information, other than the initial Application started logging
message. This is normally checked so that log sessions that have not
logged anything other than the start of the log session are not
displayed.
Connected Only
When checked, applications that currently have a logging session
connected with the OAIMonitor service is displayed. Typically this will be
the applications that are currently running. To see log sessions of
applications that have ended their log session, you must unselect this
option.
Reload App List Button
If an application has started a new log session (which typically happens
when an application starts or restarts), you can reload the applications
in the Application Group Box by clicking on Reload App List to get the
most recent list of applications.
This is available only when the Log Viewer is connected with the
OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor).
Configure Button
The following functions are available when selecting Configure 
(Figure 4-3).
• Configure event type of applications which are connected to OW5000
Log Server (OAI Monitor.) See “Configuration of OW5000 Application
Log Level” on page 4-20 for more information.
• Configure the maximum file size of OAI.LOG and the maximum
number of files of OAI.LOG which stored in the server. See “Log File
Maintenance” on page 4-22 for more information.
• Backup current OAI.LOG file which is the log file of OW5000 manually.
See Page 4-22 for more information.
• Change query mode between the Standard Query Mode and Real-time
Query mode. Also able to configure the parameter. See Page 4-24 for
more information.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-9
Search Criteria Box
The search criteria box allows you to set the search condition of the
OW5000 application log (Figure 4-10).
The Date, Time, Severity and search text are used as search conditions.
Figure 4-10 Search Criteria Box
Search from Begin/End of File or Relative to Last Search Radio Button
Selecting this option allows the user to search from a point in the file
(beginning, end, or from the last search position). The following types of
relative searches are available:
Last
Backward search starting from the end of the file.
First
Forward search starting from the beginning of the file.
Previous
Backward search starting from the first record displayed on the
previous search.
Next
Forward search starting from the last record displayed on the previous
search.
Include Previous
Same as Previous except the current search results are not cleared.
The new search results are inserted in front of the current search
results.
Include Next
Same as Next except the current search results are not cleared. The
new search results are appended to the end of the current search
results.
The range can be specified by either a time range or number of records.
HH:MM:SS
Indicates the range to be displayed specified by the number of Hours,
Minutes and Seconds from the first record displayed.
Records
Indicates the number of records to be displayed.
This will override the Max. Number of Results in the Application Log Properties
page—Maintenance tab. This is deactivated when in Real-time Query Mode.
NOTE
Selecting Search by Begin Time Radio Button allows the user to
search by specifying a begin time. The end of the search can be
specified by one of the following ways:
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-10
Log Viewer
Figure 4-11 Search by Begin Time
End Time
Indicates the user will specify the absolute end date and time for the
search.
Record Count
Indicates the user will specify the number of records that the search
will display.
End Time Span
Indicates the user will specify how many Hours, Minutes, and Seconds
past the Begin Time that the End Time will be for the search.
This will override the Max. Number of Results in the Application Log Properties
page—Maintenance tab. This is deactivated when in Real-time Query Mode.
NOTE
Severity Box
The Setting Severity Box allows the user to select search conditions
based on an event type. There are 4 types of events; such as Debug,
Information, Warning, and Error. The user can set the type per
selected application.
Filter Field
Type a word or phrase in the Filter field to filter the list for a word or
phrase (Figure 4-12).
Figure 4-12 Filter Field
Select the Also filter data check box if you want to filter the
information in the attached data.
Daylight Saving Time Check Box
Setting this parameter allows the user to adjust Daylight Savings Time.
Start Time and Last Logged Time in the Application Group box, and Time
in the Event Display Area are the target of this adjustment.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-11
Start Search Button
Clicking the Start Search button allows the user to start the search
using search conditions which are assigned in the Search Criteria for
application(s) assigned in the Application Group Box. Search results
displayed in the Event Display Area and the total event number is
displayed in the search result display area per event type.
Start Auto Refresh Button
Clicking the Start Auto Refresh Button allows the user to start a Realtime display. It is deactivated when in the Standard Query Mode.
Search Results Display Area
The total number of events information is displayed in this area for each
event type (Figure 4-13).
Figure 4-13 Search Result Display Area
Find Field
Step 1
Type a word or phrase in the Find box to find a specific word or phrase in
a log file (Figure 4-14).
Figure 4-14 Find Field
Step 2
The specific word is highlighted in yellow by clicking the ON button.
Step 3
Clicking the right or left arrow allows you to scroll through the display to
reach the next target event.

Log Viewer searches above or below the currently selected log event,
depending on the arrow you select.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-12
Log Viewer
Event Information Display Area
The Event Information Display Area displays the searched event
information (Figure 4-15).
Figure 4-15 Event Information Display Area
Time
The Time when the application event happened
Severity
Event Type
Application
Name of log session for the application
Description
Description of log information
Data
Data size for the event
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-13
Standard Query Mode
The Standard Query Mode allows the user to search and display the
event information.
• Connect to the OW5000 Log Server to search and display the logged
events which have been logged when the Start Search was clicked.
• Open the log file created by the OW5000 Log Server to search and
display the logged events.
Searching for Logged Events
Use the following items to filter a search of logged events in the Log
Viewer.
• the application
• the time period
• the log file severity type - such as Debug, Information, Warning,
or Error
• Text Filter
Starting a Search
NOTE
Step 1
Select the application whose files you want to search from the
Application group box. To select more than one application, hold down
the Ctrl key while you click each application.
Step 2
Set the search time period from Search from Begin/End of File or
Relative to Last Search or Search by Begin Time.
Step 3
Select one or more checkboxes in the Severity type group box: Debug,
Information, Warning, Error.
Step 4
If you are searching for a particular event, extension, or pattern, type this
text in the Filter field.
Step 5
Click the Start Search button to begin searching the log files. Search
results are displayed in the Event Information Display Area, also the total
number of Debug, Information, Warning and Error events are displayed
in the Search Result Display Area.
If the data for a given time period seems incomplete, check the Max Number of
Results on the Configure > Maintenance tab. It is possible that more entries exist
for this time period, but the logged entries exceed the maximum number of results
configured. To solve this problem, either issue another query where the Start Time
begins from the point where the last entry leaves off, or increase the Max Number of
Results.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-14
Log Viewer
Searching Logged Events for Specific Test
Once the list of logged events is displayed, you can search or filter the
list for a specific word or phrase.
Finding a specific word or phrase
Step 1
Type a word or phrase in the Find box to find a specific word or phrase in
a log file. Click ON button if the highlighted word/phrase displays.
Step 2
Click the Prev or Next arrow to scroll through the log events. Log Viewer
searches above or below the currently selected log event, depending on
the arrow you select.
Filtering the list for a word or phrase
Step 1
Type a word or phrase in the Filter field to filter the list for a word or
phrase.
Step 2
Select the Also filter data check box if you want to filter the information
in the attached data.
Step 3
Click the Start Search button to begin the search. The log events, from
your search containing the specified word or phrase, are displayed.
Viewing Event Data
If data is attached to a log event, the size of the data displays in the
Data column of the box displaying the logs. To view data attached to a
log event, double-click the desired logged event that contains attached
data. The data and a brief description of the data is displayed in a list
box.
Reload Application List
If an application has started a new log session (which typically happens
when an application starts or restarts) you can reload the applications in
the Application Group Box by clicking on Reload App List to get the
most recent list of applications.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-15
Print Log Information
Once the list of logged events is displayed, you can print one or more
log events from the Logs tab.
To print one or more log events:
Step 1
To select more than one log event, hold down the Ctrl key to select each
event or hold down the Shift key to select a range of events.
Step 2
Click File > Print from the menu bar. Figure 4-16 displays.
Figure 4-16 Print Log Query Results page
Step 3
Select the printer Name that you want to use.
Step 4
To print the binary data as well as the log event, select the Print binary
data associated with events checkbox.
Step 5
To print warnings in bold, select the Warnings in Bold checkbox.
Step 6
To print errors in bold, select the Errors in Bold checkbox.
Step 7
Click OK. The selected log events print.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-16
Log Viewer
Saving Search Results and Working with Bookmarks
Log Viewer allows you to save the results of a query to a text file, to set
a bookmark in the results, and to jump to a bookmark once it is set. To
use these features, click the right mouse button on the results of a
query to open a shortcut menu with the save results, and bookmark
options (Figure 4-17).
Figure 4-17 Log Viewer Shortcut menu
Saving Query Results
Use the following steps to save the results of a query to a text file.
Step 1
Select the log event(s) to be saved. To select more than one log event,
hold down the Ctrl key to select each event, or hold down the Shift key
to select a range of events.
Step 2
Click the right mouse button on the result(s) selected to open the
shortcut menu (Figure 4-17), and then do one of the following:
—Select Save Results with Event Data As to save the Log Events and
Log Event Data of the search results.
—Select Save Results without Event Data As to save only the Log
Events of the search results. 

Refer to “Viewing Event Data” on page 4-14, for more information on
Event Data.
Step 3
Click Save.
Creating a Bookmark
Use the following steps to create a Bookmark:
Step 1
Click the right mouse button on the desired log event to set a bookmark.
A shortcut menu opens.
Step 2
Select Add Bookmark. An Add Bookmark page displays 
(Figure 4-18).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-17
Figure 4-18 Add Bookmark page
Step 3
Enter the name of the bookmark and click OK. The new bookmark is
saved and displayed in the Bookmarks on the shortcut menu 
(Figure 4-19).
Opening a Bookmark
A Bookmark is available only when the query result is displayed.
NOTE
Use the following steps to open a Bookmark.
Step 1
Select the Bookmarks from the shortcut menu to go to an existing
bookmark.
Step 2
Select the desired bookmark. The log results will scroll so that the
bookmarked event is visible and selected (Figure 4-19).
Figure 4-19 Selecting a Created Bookmark
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-18
Log Viewer
Real-time Query Mode
Real-time Query Mode allows the user to search event information and
display the information in the event window. Connecting with the
OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor) displays the event information after
the time set for Start Auto Refresh is clicked.
Real-time display of event information
Use the following items to filter a search of logged events in the Log
Viewer.
• the application
• the log file severity type, such as Debug, Information, Warning, or
Error
• Text Filter
Start/Stop search
NOTE
Step 1
Click the Configure button. After an Application Log Properties page
displays, click the Maintenance tab.
Step 2
Click the Real-time Query radio button, configure the Max. Number of
Lines (if required), and then click OK.
Step 3
Select the application whose files you want to search from the
Application group box. To select more than one application, hold down
the Ctrl key while you click each application.
Step 4
Select one or more checkboxes in the Severity type group box: Debug,
Information, Warning, or Error.
Step 5
If you are searching for a particular event, extension, or pattern, type this
text in the Filter field.
Step 6
Start the event information search by clicking the Start Auto Refresh
button. The searched event information will be displayed in the event
information display area. The total number of the following will display in
the Search result display area, Debug, Information, Warning and Error.
Step 7
Click the Stop Auto Refresh button to stop the Real-time display.
You cannot change the search application during the Real-time display. To change
the application, stop the Real-time display, change the search application, and then
click the Start Auto Refresh button.
When the total number of lines displayed in the event information display area
exceeds the Max. Number of Lines, which is assigned using the Maintenance tab,
the oldest information in the event display area is deleted.
If the OAI.LOG file reaches the maximum file size, the Real-time display will not
continue the back up process.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-19
Real-time display is available only for the application which is connected with the
OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor), and also displayed in the Application Group box.
NOTE
Finding a Specific Word or Phrase
Once the list of logged events are displayed, you can search or filter the
list for a specific word or phrase. To find a specific word or phrase in a
log file, follow the steps below.
Step 1
Type a word or phrase in the Find box.
Step 2
Click the Prev or Next arrow to scroll through the log events. Log Viewer
searches above or below the currently selected log event, depending on
the arrow you selected.
Filtering the list for a word or phrase
Step 1
Type a word or phrase in the Filter field to filter the list for a word or
phrase.
Step 2
Select the Also filter data check box if you want to filter the information
in the attached data.
Step 3
Click the Start Search button to begin the search. The log events from
your search that contain the specified word or phrase displays.

All events display when pressing the Enter key. You do not need a value
in Filter field.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-20
Log Viewer
Configuration of OW5000 Application Log Level
OW5000 Log Viewer allows a user to set or change an event type of the
application that is connected to the OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor).
Step 1
Click the Configure button in the Log Viewer Main Window 
(Figure 4-3). Figure 4-20 displays.
This feature is available only when the Log Viewer is connected to the OW5000 Log
Server (OAI Monitor).
NOTE
Figure 4-20 Application Log Properties page—Applications tab
Application Name Box
Displays the Application names that are connected to OW5000 Log
Server (OAI Monitor).
Applications Displayed Box
Using this configuration, applications strongly related to the OW5000
only will display.
Connected Only
This check box is available only when the application is connected with
the OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor).
When selected, only the applications that have a current log session
with the OW5000 Log Server (OAIMonitor) will be displayed. Usually
these applications get together with the applications which are currently
working. To display all applications, this check box should be unchecked.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-21
Hide Apps With Only Application Headers
If this check box is checked, the applications that do not have an event
log will be hidden in the event information display area.
Severity Filter Box
The Severity Filter allows the user to set or change the display event
type of the applications selected in the Application Name box. There are
four event types (Debug, Information, Warning and Error) and can
be selected per application. Unchecked events are not logged nor
displayed in the event information display area.
Click Apply to save the configuration. The selected event type
configuration will be applied after this process in the log file (OAI.LOG),
which is created by the OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor).
Change Log Level Process
Select the application name from the Application Name box. The
current configuration of the selected application will display in the
Severity box. To select more than one application, hold down the Ctrl
key while you click each application. In this case, the last application
configuration displays.
Select one or more checkboxes in the Severity type group box: Debug,
Information, Warning, or Error.
Click Apply or OK. The same configuration is applied if more than one
application is selected.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-22
Log Viewer
Log File Maintenance
The OW5000 Log Viewer allows the user to maintain a log file that is
created by OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor).
Step 1
Click the Configure button in Log Viewer Main Window (Figure 4-3).
Step 2
Click the Maintenance tab. Figure 4-21 displays.
Figure 4-21 Application Log Properties page—Maintenance tab
Logfile Parameters Box
The Logfile Parameter Box allows the user to set a maximum log file size
(OAI.LOG), and a maximum number of files stored in the disk. You can
also create a manual backup.
The required maximum log file size can be changed based on the
feature and traffic. Choose the proper settings based on the servers’
available disk size and backup period of the log file.
This feature is available only when Log Viewer is connected to the OW5000 Log
Server (OAI Monitor).
NOTE
Maximum Log Size (MB) Field
Configure maximum file size of OAI.lOG (MB)
The Default is 50MB and it is configurable between 1MB and 1024MB.
The configuration is applied when the Apply button is clicked. The
Backup file name format is OAI_MMDDYYYY_HHMMSSmmm.Log.

(MM:month, DD:day, YYYY:year, HH:hour, MM:minute, SS:second,
mmm:millisecond)
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-23
The OAI.LOG file is stored in OW5000 Platform install folder. For
example, C:\Program Files\NEC\OW5000\Runtime Platform\
The Underline(_) is the path which is selected during OW5000 Platform
install step.
Backup files are stored in following path.
C:\Program Files\NEC\OW5000\Runtime Platform\archive
Maximum Log Files Field
Configure the maximum number of backup files.
The Default value is 2 and it is configurable between 2 to 999.
The Configuration is applied when the Apply button is clicked. The
oldest file is deleted when the backup files reach this maximum value.
Backup Current Log Button
Click this button to backup the OAI.LOG file manually. The Backup file is
stored in the backup file folder as:
M_OAI_MMDDYYYY_HHMMSSmmm.LOG file format.
(MM:month, DD:day, YYYY:year, HH:hour, MM:minute, SS:second,
mmm:millisecond)
The following step is for a manual backup.
Step 1
Click Backup Current Log button. Figure 4-22 displays.
Figure 4-22 Delete Log File page
Step 2
Click OK to delete the log file or Cancel to suspend this process. 

Figure 4-23 displays, with the stored file path information, when a backup
is successful. If the backup fails, a Delete Log File—Delete NG page
displays. Try executing again at a later time.
Figure 4-23 Delete Log File—Backup Copy page
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-24
Log Viewer
If the backup fails, a Delete Log File—Delete NG dialog displays. Try
again after a short period.
NOTE
Having enabled Debug level statements for the appropriate applications, to minimize
the size of a log that will be sent to NTAC for a support issue, the Backup Current
Log button can be used immediately before and after reproducing a problem. Then
the most recent backup found in the .\OW5000\Runtime Platform\Archive\. folder can
be sent to NTAC.
Change Query Mode
The OW5000 Log Viewer allows a user to change the query mode by
clicking the Configure button in the Log Viewer Main Window 
(Figure 4-3). An Application Log Properties page displays.
Step 1
Click the Maintenance tab.
Standard/Real-time Query Configuration Box
Select Standard Query Mode or Real-time Query mode as the Log
Viewer query mode.
The following configurations are available for each mode.
Standard Query Radio Button
Select this options if the Standard Query mode is used.
This mode is selected when Log Viewer starts up.
Max. Number of Results Field
Set the maximum events number which displays in the Event
Information Display Area when in Standard Query Mode.
Click Apply after the proper value is set in the Max. Number of Results
field.
The default value is 500 and it is configurable between 1 and
4294967295.
Entering smaller numbers will allow users to view the query results
faster. However, if the time period of a search is too short, the desired
results may not be viewable due to the volume of events within the time
specified in the query. If this happens, either increase this number to
the desired size or narrow the window of time to retrieve fewer
matches.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-25
Real-time Query Radio Button
Select if Real-time Query mode is used.
Real-time Query mode is available only when the Log Viewer is used on
the OW5000 platform server.
Max. Number of Lines Field
Set the maximum events number which displays in the Event
Information Display Area in Real-time Query Mode.
Click Apply after the proper value is set in the Max. Number of Lines
field.
The default value is 500 and it is configurable between 1 and
4294967295.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-26
Log Viewer
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
5-1
5
IM Archive Viewer
IM Archive Viewer is the application to manage IM (Instant Message)
archive files created by OW5000. The System Administrator can open
single or multiple IM archive files and query by the following conditions:
• Beginning Date/Time and End Date/Time
• Sender SIPURI/Receiver SIPURI
• Keyword in the message text
• Delivered or not
This application can also search specific key words from a query result
and save it into a local file.
This chapter includes the following topics.
Chapter Topics:
• Starting IM Archive Viewer
• Using IM Archive Viewer
Starting IM Archive Viewer
Please follow the steps below to start IM Archive Viewer.
Step 1
Select Start > All Programs > NEC OW5000 > IM Archive Viewer >
OW5000 IM Archive Viewer. A Choose Archive Files page displays
(Figure 5-1).
Figure 5-1 Choose Archive Files page
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
5-2
IM Archive Viewer
NOTE
Step 2
Click the Add button to add IM archive files into the Archive Files field.
IM archive files can be added into this field using drag and drop. Note
that the total size of IM archive files must be less than 500 MB.
Step 3
Enter the password, which is specified by OW5000 Administrator to
create an archive, in the Password field and click Open. After decrypting
the archive files, Figure 5-2 displays.
The Password for the IM Archive files is specified using OW5000 Administrator:
Platform > Instant Messages > Configuration page—IM Archiving Password
parameter.
If added files require a different password, the IM Archive Viewer decrypts the files
that use the specified password.
NOTE
Figure 5-2 IM Archive Viewer Main Window
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
IM Archive Viewer
5-3
Using IM Archive Viewer
IM Archive Viewer can show IM information from the archive files by
specifying a condition. If a condition is not specified, the entire IM log is
shown.
The following topics are included in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Specifying a Search Condition
Displaying IM Information
Saving IM Logs to a File
Daylight Saving Time
Keyword Searching from IM Text
Exiting IM Archive Viewer
Specifying a Search Condition
Use the following parameters to search the IM Archive Viewer log.
Begin date/time, End date/time
This parameter specifies the period of the IM log. To specify the period,
check each parameter then set the date time.
The Begin parameter shows the date/time of the first IM log and the
End parameter shows the last IM log in the archive as default.
From URI To URI
Search by a specified SIPURI from the archive file. This parameter is
case insensitive.
Message text
Search by a specified Message text from the archive file. This
parameter is case insensitive.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
5-4
IM Archive Viewer
Delivered flag
Select from Both, True or False. Each parameter searches by
message, whether it is delivered or not.
Both: Search both delivered and undelivered IM
True: Search delivered IM only
False: Search undelivered IM only
Displaying IM Information
IM logs, specified by a search condition, are listed in the IM information
fields (Figure 5-3).
Figure 5-3 IM Information Fields
Saving IM Logs to a File
Search results can be saved as a local file. To save the logs, select the
desired IM logs to save and click Save Result. To select multiple logs,
click the desired logs using the CTRL key.
To select all logs, click in the left top of the list.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
IM Archive Viewer
5-5
The saved file is in CSV format and stores each field name and the IM
information.
The saved file is not encrypted. IM Archive Viewer cannot open saved CSV file.
NOTE
Daylight Saving Time
By checking the Daylight Saving Time box, the date/time information of
the search result is shifted as daylight savings time.
Keyword Searching from IM Text
The IM Archive Viewer can find an IM log by keyword using the search
option.
Step 1
Enter the desired word to search in the Find field and click OK. IM
Archive Viewer queries the search and highlights the word in yellow if the
word is found.
Figure 5-4 IM Search Results
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
5-6
IM Archive Viewer
Step 2
Use the right allow button to jump to the next keyword and the left allow
button to jump to the previous keyword.
Step 3
Click Off to cancel the keyword search.
Exiting IM Archive Viewer
Step 1
Click the X button on the IM Archive Viewer to exit.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-1
6
Database Operations
The OW5000 database can be populated in a number of ways, including
OW5000 Administrator and DBTool.
OW5000 Administrator
OW5000 Administrator is part of the OW5000 Runtime Platform. Refer
to “OW5000 Configuration” on page 2-1 for more information on
OW5000 Administrator.
DBTool (Database Import/Export)
DBTool is a utility in the OW5000 Platform. It provides a system
administrator the capability to import and export data between the
OW5000 databases and Text files. DBTool can also import data via LDAP.
The DBTool utility allows data to be imported into or exported from
OW5000 databases. Specifically, this tool imports and exports Calendar
Link, Extension, Group Call Pickup, License, Organization, Person, SIPUA
Group and States/Provinces, Locations, Organization level,
Organization/Location Hierarchy, Reserved Number, Room Direct DID
Number, and Route/Truck data records between text files and a specific
OW5000 database. LDAP can also be a source for import. The data fields
can be mapped to existing database fields. The configuration and field
mapping settings can be saved as a profile, so these operations can be
easily repeated manually for later single or repeated occurrences.
The following topics are included in this chapter.
Chapter Topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Database Backup
Database Restore
DBTool
Import Data
Export Data
Help fields
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-2
Database Operations
Database Backup
It is recommended that you backup the database in the event that data
is imported incorrectly.
If you want to make a backup, you have to backup both "master" and "OW5000".
As for the "master" database, you should make a backup when you install/upgrade
OW5000. Frequent backups are not necessary.
IMPORTANT
Backed up data can be reused (restored) only when the same version of the
OW5000 Platform is used with the same computer name and the same IP address.
IMPORTANT
Data before a version upgrade cannot be used when the OW5000 Platform is
upgraded, so backup the data again after the version upgrade.
Use the following steps to backup the OW5000 database.
Step 1
Log into the server where SQL Server 2005/2008 R2 is in operation
using an account that has Administrator rights.
Step 2
Click the Start button on the desktop, and then select All Programs >
Accessory > Command Prompt to enter the command below.

In the following example, connection is made to the default instance
name, SQLEXPRESS, of SQL Server 2005/2008 R2 Express Edition.

SQL Server 2005 Express Edition case, move to following folder
C:\Program Files\Microsft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\Binn 

SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition case, move to following folder
C:\Program Files\Microsft SQL
Server\MSSQL10.SQLEXPRESS\MSSQL\Binn

C:sqlcmd -S (local)\SQLEXPRESS
1>BACKUP DATABASE OW5000
2>TO DISK='ow5000.bak'
3>GO
After completing the backup, enter exit to end the SQLCMD command.

1>exit

A backup file (ow5000.bak) is stored in the Backup folder of SQL Server
2005/2008. The backup file is stored in the following folder:

SQL Server 2005 Express Edition case
C:\Program Files\Microsft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\ Backup\

SQL Server 2008 Express Edition case
C:\Program Files\Microsft SQL
Server\MSSQL.10.SQLEXPRESS\MSSQL\ Backup\
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-3
SQL Server 2008 R2 Express Edition case
C:\Program Files\Microsft SQL
Server\MSSQL.10_50.SQLEXPRESS\MSSQL\ Backup\
To create an OW5000 database backup in another location, specify the
storage destination as follows:

2> TO DISK='D:\sqlbackup\ow5000.bak'
To backup the master database, run the following command.

1> BACKUP DATABASE master
2> TO DISK='master.bak'
3> GO
Database Restore
By restoring a backup file, the OW5000 database can be restored to the
same database condition as when the backup was created.
Backed up data can be reused (restored) only when the same version of the
OW5000 Platform is used with the same computer name and the same IP address.
IMPORTANT
Data before a version upgrade cannot be used when the OW5000 Platform is
upgraded, so backup the data again after the version upgrade.
Use the following steps to restore the OW5000 database:
Step 1
Log into a server where the OW5000 Platform is in operation using an
account that has Administrator rights.
Step 2
Click the Start button on the desktop, and select Control Panel >
Administrative Tool > Services to stop the following services in the
Service window. Use the order listed below.
• OWWatch Dog
• OW OAIMonitor*
• OWAccessServer (only when this is installed. Also, stop
Access Server installed on another server.)
• Remote Call Control (only when this is installed)
• World Wide Web Publishing Service
* Dependent services are also stopped.
Step 3
End the Database Import Tool and Database Export Tool when they are
started.
Step 4
Log into the server where the SQL Server 2005/2008 R2 is in operation,
using an account that has Administrator rights.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-4
Database Operations
Step 5
Click the Start button on the desktop, and then select All Programs >
Accessory > Command Prompt to enter the following command. 

In the following example, connection is made to the default instance
name, SQLEXPRESS, of SQL Server 2005/2008 R2 Express Edition
using NT Authentication.

SQL Server 2005 Express Edition case, move to following folder
C:<SQL Server installed folder>\90\Tools\Binn
SQL Server 2008/2008 R2 Express Edition case, move to following
folder
C:<SQL Server installed folder>\100\Tools\Binn
C:sqlcmd -S (local)\SQLEXPRESS
1>USE master
2>GO
Enter the following command to delete the OW5000 database:
1>DROP DATABASE OW5000
2>GO
After deleting the database, enter the following command to restore the
OW5000 database.
1>RESTORE DATABASE OW5000
2>FROM DISK='ow5000.bak'
3>GO
Step 6
After restoring the database, enter the following command to enable
Service Broker:
1> ALTER DATABASE OW5000 SET ENABLE_BROKER
2> GO
Step 7
Enter exit after the restore is completed.
1> exit
Step 8
Start the services listed below, in the following order, on a server where
the OW5000 Platform is in operation.
• World Wide Web Publishing Service
• OWWatch Dog
• OAI Monitor
• OWAccessServer (when installed on another server)
• Remote Call Control (when installed on another server)
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-5
DBTool
The DBTool application provides OW5000 customers the ability to import
and export data to and from the OW5000 Database. DBTool is installed as
part of the OW5000 Platform. DBTool can also be installed separately on a nonOW5000 Platform machine, using DBTool's installer.
NOTE
An Import/Export file can be viewed at a remote PC, but the scheduler will fail if the
OW5000 system cannot access the file at the same location as specified when the
DBTool profile was saved.
Available parameter validation is described in the “Specifications for OW5000
Admin” on page Appendix C-1.
NOTE
Step 1
From the desktop, click the Start button, and then select All Programs >
NEC OW5000 > Runtime Platform > DB Tool. A Connect to DBTool
Login page displays (Figure 6-1).
Figure 6-1 Connect to DBTool Login page
Step 2
Enter the information as described in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 DBTool Login fields
Field
OW5000 Server/IP Address
Description
The OW5000 server name or IP Address.
User Name
LoginId for OW5000 User.
Note: DBTool - Import/Export OW5000 Data application should be
enabled for the user.
Password
The Password for OW5000 User.
Connect
Validate the information and login to DBTool utility.
PBX configuration from OW5000 Administrator must be completed before starting
the DBTool.
NOTE
Step 3
Click Connect. A DBTool Main Screen displays (Figure 6-2).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-6
Database Operations
Figure 6-2 DBTool Main Screen
DBTool provides the following feature set:
• Import
Imports data from the text file or LDAP. Refer to “Import Data” on
page 6-7 for more information.
• Export
Exports data from the OW5000 database to a text file. Refer to
“Export Data” on page 6-59 for more information.
• Admin
The user is able to selectively delete Persons (by Role), Contact
Methods, and all other types available for Import/Export using the
Bulk Delete feature. The user can also delete existing import/export
profiles which were created for DBTool. Refer to “Admin” on page 6-64
for more information.
• Help
Indicates the version and database information. See “Help” on
page 6-66.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-7
Import Data
Figure 6-3 shows the data import flow using the DBTool. DBTool
currently supports 13 import types. DBTool supports importing data
from a text file or from LDAP. Default values can be entered from the
Settings menu option for some of the Import Types.
Figure 6-3 Data Flow using DBTool
l
Import Procedure
Use the following procedures to Import data. Note that the Database
Import Tool cannot import all the items that can be set with OW5000
Administrator. Some settings differ depending on the functions to be
used.
To import data, follow the steps below:
Step 1
From the DBTool Main screen, select File > Open or New and then
select Import.
Step 2
Go to the menu and select Settings > General. This dialog will contain
values specific to each import type.
Step 3
Go to the menu and select Settings. Depending on the import type,
other menu options may be available: such as URI Generation Rules or
Contact Methods for the Person import type. Configure your settings, as
needed, for the import type selected.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-8
Database Operations
Step 4
Select the import file (an import file should already be created with the
appropriate column headers to match with OW5000 data appropriate for
the import type selected).
Step 5
Bind column headers from the import file (Source Fields) to the OW5000
Database fields.
Step 6
Press the Import Data button to proceed with the import.
Step 7
Review the OAI.log through Log Viewer to see any data entries that may
have failed to be imported.
Please assign the PBX and Access Server information in order to import the Person
data correctly from DBTool.
IMPORTANT
Viewing DBTool Profile Execution Logs in OW5000 Administrator
The results/logs for the import can also be viewed in OW5000
Administrator using the Systems > Data Integration page.
This page displays a list of profiles (DBTool and MA4000) along with
their status, last run time, and last results. If there are any critical
errors while executing a profile, the Last Results column text is marked
red. Click on the link in the Last Results column to see profile execution
logs. The logs are sorted by Processed Time for a record in descending
order.
Each log entry indicates the type of entity processed, for example,
Person, Extension, log type (information, warning, error), and a hyper
link in the OW5000 Entity column. This hyper link highlights the main
value of the entity, for example, Full name (if a person), extension
number (if an extension) along with the nature of the operation (insert
or update).
Clicking the hyper link redirects to the corresponding page for that
entity in OW5000 Administrator.
For example, if a Person, the user is directed to the Person edit page
and the details of the person are loaded for the log entry that was
selected.
Organization import logs cannot be viewed on the Systems > Data Integration
page.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-9
Creating a New Profile
A profile is not required when a user wants to import the data using
DBTool. However, by saving a profile, the user does not need to
reconfigure the mapping every time. DBTool allows the user to confirm
the mapping and save the information as profile data, or cancel the
settings when closing the tool or session.
NOTE
Once a Profile is created and saved, you can schedule it to run at designated
recurrent times through OW5000 Administrator at Platform > Scheduling. There is
no limit to the recurrence. A saved Import profile can also be launched on demand,
by clicking its Play button on the OW5000 Administrator's Data Integration page.
Opening a Profile
Once the user creates a profile, anyone with DBTool privileges can open
the profile (Figure 6-4) by selecting File > Open > Import.
A user can be given DBTool user privileges by logging in to OW5000
Administrator, as an OW5000 Administrator, and navigating to
Directory > Users. Select the User and then check the checkbox for
DBTool - Import/Export OW5000 data. Refer to “User Management”
on page 2-158 for more information.
Figure 6-4 Open Profile page
Table 6-2 Profile fields
Field
Profile
Description
List of profiles already created for import.
When you select New or Open profile from the database, the following
import main screen displays (Figure 6-5).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-10
Database Operations
Figure 6-5 DBTool Import Screen
Selecting Import Type
Select the target import type from the Import Type drop menu. (All
unsaved mapping data will be cleared). Table 6-3 lists all possible import
types.
Table 6-3 DBTool Import Type
Number
Import Type
1
Calendar Link
2
Extensions
3
Group Call Pickup
4
Licenses
5
Locations
6
Organization
7
Organization/Location Hierarchy
Settings
8
Person
Note
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Number
Import Type
9
Room Direct DID Number
10
Route/Trunk
11
SIPUA Group
12
States/Provinces
13
Reserved Numbers
6-11
Note
Select Source Import File
Clicking the Source link from Figure 6-5 displays Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-6 Profile Import Source dialog
Table 6-4 Create Profile fields
Field
Source
Input File
Description
Select the import source. This can be File or LDAP.
The full path, including the file name, of the file that will be imported.
If you use the Scheduler functionality, you must save the import file.
The following delimiters are available as an import file:
• Comma (,)
Column Delimiter
• Pipe (I)
• Space
• Tab
Delimiter is automatically detected once the input file is selected.
Use Quoted Field
Select this option if a double quotation mark (“) is used in the import
file. This is checked by default. If your selected file has double
quotation marks, this check box is checked automatically.
When LDAP is selected as the Source, LDAP related configurations are
required, as described in the section below.
NOTE
If the Import source is a manually created import file, do not put a space after the
field delimiter even if using quoted fields. This will cause inconsistent reading of field
names and data.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-12
Database Operations
LDAP
OW5000 DBTool LDAP Integration synchronizes the OW5000 directory to
an LDAP compliant directory, making it possible for an LDAP compliant
directory to be the source of employee directory data used in the
OW5000 directory. This eliminates the need for employee data
administration of the OW5000 server, as it automatically gets updated
information from the directory server. The LDAP Integration application
can load all data from the LDAP compliant directory or changes since the
last synchronization if this feature is supported by the LDAP server.
OW5000 DBTool LDAP Integration lets administrators specify an LDAP
source to populate the OW5000 directory of employees and external to
populate the OW5000 directory of employees and external numbers.
Because the structure and elements of an LDAP directory can vary, a
user interface is provided for entering specific queries to retrieve key
data elements from the LDAP server. After the discovery process,
returned fields can then be mapped to OW5000 fields. If supported by
the LDAP server (only LDAP V.3 is supported), queries can be formulated
to only get records that have been added or modified in a given time
interval since the query was last run.
The LDAP source name, query, and mapping can be saved and
scheduled through web-based OW5000 Administrator to run at
designated recurrent times. There is no limit to the recurrence. The
query can be run as often as once a minute or as little as once a quarter.
Because the LDAP source, query, mapping, and scheduling are stored as
a unit, it is possible to gather OW5000 data from multiple LDAP sources
or queries and schedule these queries independently.
Any LDAP v.3 compliant server will work as an OW5000 DbTool source,
including the following:
— IBM Tivoli Directory Server
— IBM Lotus Notes/Domino
— Microsoft Active Directory
— Microsoft Exchange Server
— Microsoft ADAM
— Novell eDirectory
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-13
Configuring LDAP
The LDAP menu is available when LDAP is selected as the source in the
Profile Import Source page (Figure 6-6).
In order to use LDAP, you must register the LDAP license. Please refer to the
OW5000 Installation Guide for more details. A license is not required for the Asian
and Russian market.
NOTE
Figure 6-7 LDAP Configuration page
To connect with the LDAP source, the following LDAP Server settings are
required.
•
•
•
•
LDAP Server
Base DN
Other Settings
Search Filter
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-14
Database Operations
LDAP Server
Use the information below to set the LDAP server information. The
Username and Password is for the LDAP server, not OW5000.
Figure 6-8 LDAP Server page
Table 6-5 LDAP Server fields
Field
Description
Host
The computer name of the LDAP server.
Port
The port number that the LDAP server is listening on for
connections. The default is port number 389.
Username/Password
The user name and password to connect LDAP server for the query.
Test
Try to connect LDAP server. Connection successful is displayed
on the bottom of the window in green if it is connected.
Base DN
Figure 6-9 Base DN page
Table 6-6 Base DN fields
Field
Description
Base Distinguished Name
The distinguished name (DN) that identifies the starting point of a
search.
Fetch NDs
Press the Fetch DNs button to discover possible Base DN’s.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-15
Other Settings
Figure 6-10 Other Settings page
Table 6-7 Other Settings fields
Field
Description
Denotes the date and time the last import occurred. If "Use Last
Import Time in Search" is checked, the Search Filter will
automatically be altered so that only those records changed since
Use Last Import Time in Search the last import will be returned from the query. This option uses
Microsoft's Active Directory "modify Time Stamp" operational
attribute.
Import Status
Indicates whether or not an import is currently being performed. Two
simultaneous searches for the same profile cannot occur because
an import will check this setting first before performing the search.
WARNING: Modifying this setting may result in overlapping
searches.
Search Filter
Figure 6-11 Search Filter page
Table 6-8 Search Filter fields
Field
Description
Search Filter
Enter a valid LDAP search filter. For example, to search for all users
in Active Directory, enter
"(&(objectcategory=person)(objectclass=user))."
e Directory "modify Time Stamp" operational attribute.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-16
Database Operations
For more information about forming LDAP search filters, please refer to the article
RFC2254.
NOTE
Step 1
After entering all required configurations, press Search to discover which
attribute lists are available for the specified LDAP server. Next, select the
list of attributes for the desired import. If no attribute strings were
returned by the search, contact your LDAP directory administrator.
Step 2
Provide the necessary information in each section as described below.
Table 6-9 Search fields
Field
Description
Available Attributes
A list of fields in the LDAP directory that the user has not selected to
import.
Selected Attributes
A list of fields in the LDAP directory that will be imported and shown
in the DBTool GUI. This list will vary depending on the LDAP server
directory structure. Select the list of attributes appropriate for the
desired import.
Step 3
Click OK to add the new profile.
If you cannot find the attribute string, please contact the LDAP Directory
Administrator.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-17
Mapping Import Fields
The Data shown in Figure 6-12, displays an example of field mapping
from an import file to the OW5000 Database.
The fields displayed in the Source Fields frame are the column headers
read from the first record of the specified Source file. They do not have
to be spelled the same as the respective Database Fields to which they
will be mapped, but doing so can facilitate use of the Bind All feature.
After selecting a field within the list of Source Fields, right-click the
Database field to which it should be mapped, and then click the Bind
button to perform the field mapping between the Source and the
OW5000 Database. Clicking the Bind All icon on the top center enables
batch mapping of Source and Database Fields with matching names.
To cancel mapping, select the field from the Database Fields list, right
click, and then click Unbind. Clicking the UnBind All icon, on the top
right, enables batch cancellation of mapping. Existing mappings are
unaffected when Bind All is selected.
Figure 6-12 Example of Import Field Mapping page
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-18
Database Operations
Table 6-10 Import Field Mapping
Icon
Description
Attempts to bind Source Fields to Database Fields by matching
names.
Removes all the bindings between Source Fields and Database
Fields.
Indicates that the associated field must be mapped.
Starts the importing.
Import Type Settings
The following sections describe the functions of the Database import
tool. The Database import tool can be configured from the Settings page
and other parameters, which might be different depending on the
import type.
PBX Lookup Function
This function enables you to automatically lookup the Office Code
(PBXID). This function is available when importing Calendar Link,
Extension, Licenses, Locations, Organization, Organization/Location
Hierarchy and Person (Contact Method).
To enable this function, select Settings > General and check
Automatically lookup PBX of Extension when the imported PBX
column is not mapped.
Figure 6-13 PBX Lookup
The DB Tool will use the following rules to search/use Office Code.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-19
Table 6-11 PBX Lookup—Rules
Office Code
Assigned
Extension Import Use assigned value
Other Import
Use assigned value
Office Code not Assigned
Multiple extensions
Only one extension found found
Not found
Update found extension
Record error log and
skip the entry
Create extension
using Default PBX
Use found extension
Record error log and
skip the entry
Record error log and
skip the entry
Import Types
Calendar Link
Select Calendar Link from the Import Type drop list (Figure 6-5).
General
Step 1
To import settings for Calendar Link, select Settings > General. 
Figure 6-14 displays.
Figure 6-14 Calendar Link Settings
Table 6-12 Calendar Link Settings fields
Field
Description
PBX
PBX for the Exchange Server
Exchange Server
Exchange Server for the data
Automatically lookup PBX
Refer to “PBX Lookup Function” on page 6-18.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-20
Database Operations
Database Field Reference—Calendar Link
Table 6-13 Calendar Link
Type
SubType
Database Field
Email Server
Extension
First Name
Calendar Link
Last Name
LoginId
Office Code(PBX Id)
Work Email Address
Extensions
Select Extensions from the Import Type drop list (Figure 6-5).
General
Step 1
To import settings for Extensions, select Settings > Extensions. Figure
6-15 displays.
Figure 6-15 Extension Settings
Table 6-14 Extension Settings fields
Group
Description
PBX
If a PBX is not specified when an Extension and person are imported, a
default value, selected here, is used.
Wireless PBX
Not used in this version
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Group
6-21
Description
Automatically lookup PBX Refer to “PBX Lookup Function” on page 6-18.
Extension Derivation
Extension derivation rules can be created, deleted, or applied using the
Extension Derivation Rule.
Step 1
Click Setting > Derivation Rules. An Extension Derivation Rules List
page displays (Figure 6-16).
Figure 6-16 Extension Derivation Rules List page
Table 6-15 Extension Derivation fields
Field
Description
Edit the rule which is already created.
Delete the rule which is already created.
Applied
Check the rule which should be applied. Top rule is applied as
highest priority rule.
Changes the priority of the applied rule.
Step 2
To create new rules, click the Add New button on the rules list page 
(Figure 6-16). An Assign or Create Derivation Rules for Extensions page
displays (Figure 6-17).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-22
Database Operations
Figure 6-17 Assign or Create Derivation Rules for Extensions page
Table 6-16 Extension Derivation fields
Field
NOTE
Description
Rule Name
Rule name of this derivation rule.
Begins with
The target extension which begins with the value set in this edit box.
Use Last Digits
The number of available digits to use from the source number,
starting at the end. If the digits of the Extension is smaller than the
“Begins with” field value plus the “Use Last Digits” field value, the
Extension Derivation rule does not match.
Prefix
Optional prefix to add to the beginning of the number.
PBX
If the Rule matches, the PBX which is selected from this drop list is
applied. This drop list shows the PBXs that were assigned using
OW5000 Administrator.
The PBX selected on this page is used as the inserted value, not the query
parameter. The OfficeCode is selected as a mapping parameter. If the extension
matches this rule, this PBX is used as the OfficeCode.
If the imported Extension does not exist in the OW5000 Database, the DBTool
decides on the PBX based on the Extension Derivation Rule.
NOTE
If the imported Extension exists in the OW5000 Database, the current Extension in
the database is deleted and DBTool decides the PBX based on the Extension
Derivation Rule.
Extension of URI Derivation means Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Extension.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-23
URI Generation Rules
URI Generation Rules can be created, deleted, or applied using the URI
Generation Rule.
Step 1
Click Settings > URI Generation Rules to display Figure 6-18.
Figure 6-18 URI Generation page
Table 6-17 URI Generation fields
Field
Description
Add New
When you click Add New to create a new rule, the field is cleared to
be able to create a new rule. The value cleared is not saved.
OK
Closes the dialog.
Figure 6-19 Assign or Create URIs for Extension
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-24
Database Operations
Table 6-18 URI Derivation fields
Field
Description
Apply
(tel URI or SIP URI)
Regular Expression ($0)
Translation Pattern
Save
OK
Cancel
Select which URI applies to this rule.
This determines the first half of the rule, to extract or modify the
extension.
Gives an example of the URI generated after applying the rule. $0
has to be included if the telURL and SIPURI have both $0 and @.
Saves the rule to the list.
Save the rule and close the dialog.
Close the dialog without saving.
This form is used to create both telURIs and SIPURIs. The data grid
shows all rules, and distinction is made using the column type; either
telURI or SIP URI.
The rules entered through OW5000 Admin are also shown but cannot be
deleted or modified. The delete buttons are disabled when the selection
is on Admin rule.
The rule entered through Admin can only be applied for a Profile in
DBTool.
The Translation Pattern value demonstrates the type of values that will
be generated when the Rule is used. Only one rule may be applied to a
telURI or SIP URI at a time.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-25
Database Field Reference—Extension
Table 6-19 Extension Type Database Fields
Type
SubType
Database Field
CollaborationExtension
E164 Country Code
E164 Number
Emergency Number ANI
Emergency Number Comment
Emergency Number ELIN
Emergency Number Location Address
Emergency Number Location Name
Emergency Number XML (Note)
Emergency Number XML Version (Note)
Extension
Extension
Is Monitored
Login ID
Office Code(PBX Id)
Password
Phone Type
SIP Access Server
SIP Registration Server
SIP URI
Subline
Tel URI
Tenant
The Emergency Number XML Version are is for US market only.
NOTE
The database fields in bold are required.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-26
Database Operations
Group Call Pickup
Select Group Call Pickup from the Import Type drop list (Figure 6-5).
Database Field Reference—Group Call Pickup
Table 6-20 Group Call Pickup Type Database Fields
Type
SubType
Database Field
Allow Pickup
First Name
Group Name
Group Call Pickup
Last Name
Office Code
Primary Extension
The database fields in bold are required.
NOTE
Licenses
Select Licenses from the Import Type drop list (Figure 6-5).
General
Step 1
To import settings from Licenses, select Setting > General. 
Figure 6-20 displays.
Figure 6-20 Licenses page
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Table 6-21 License fields
Field
Default PBX
Automatically lookup PBX
Description
PBX for the licenses.
Refer to “PBX Lookup Function” on page 6-18.
Database Field Reference—License
Table 6-22 License Type Database Fields
Type
SubType
Database Field
API
CSTA
Extension
License
GCP
Office Code (PBX Id)
PRESENCE
SOAP
The database fields in bold are required.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-27
6-28
Database Operations
Locations
Select Locations from the Import Type drop list (Figure 6-5). A separate
location import will need to be executed for each location hierarchy
type. Multiple location types can be in the same import file, however
only one can be selected to be imported per Import Data execution.
Locations that have the same extension may cause Hotel vertical applications to not
display data accurately or cause some features not to function properly.
IMPORTANT
General
Step 1
To import settings from Locations, select Setting > General. 
Figure 6-21 displays.
Figure 6-21 Locations page
Table 6-23 Location fields
Field
Description
Default PBX
PBX for the location.
Hierarchy Selector
Automatically lookup PBX
Choose one of the predefined hierarchies from the list.
Refer to “PBX Lookup Function” on page 6-18.
Hierarchies
When OW5000 is installed, a pre-determined set of hierarchies are
installed for Location and Unit (organization) data. Hierarchies are
discovered by querying the OW5000 database. After the user selects
Organization or Location as the Import Type, the database will be
queried to find available values for either the Unit or Location
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-29
hierarchies. The user needs to map the fields from the file to these
types. While importing, the hierarchy structure is enforced on the data.
The record not obeying the hierarchy is rejected.
An example of a virtual hierarchy type for locations is shown below
(Table 6-24).
Table 6-24 Hierarchy Type For Locations
Building
Room
BL1
A1
Bed
Telephone
BD1
1001
BL1
Notes
Patient1
2000
BL1
A2
BL1
BD2
BL1
A2
2001
Break Room
2002
Patient 2
DB3
Patient 3
In the example above (Table 6-24), the 2nd to last record will be rejected during
Import, as it is invalid.
NOTE
Step 2
After selecting a Location hierarchy, a new database field will be added
to the Database Fields list. If the selected hierarchy has multiple levels,
the additional levels will appear indented. Map the Source Fields and
select Import Data.
Step 3
Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 for each location type needed to be imported.
Refer to Figure 2-186 on page 2-168 for more information.
Database Field Reference—Locations
Table 6-25 Locations Type Database Fields
Type
SubType
Database Field
Notes
Locations
Number
Office Code(PBX Id)
Area
Hierarchies
Hotel Building | Hotel Room
Campus
Hospital | Nurse Station | Room | Bed
Office
Unknown Location
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-30
Database Operations
Import Custom Hierarchies
To import a custom hierarchy, you must first create the hierarchy
structure in OW5000 Administrator. Refer to “Creating Custom
Hierarchies” on page 2-168
Custom hierarchies will be displayed in the Location Hierarchy list from
the Settings > General dialog and can be selected and imported using
the same steps as a system hierarchy.
Location data that uses a Custom Hierarchy cannot be exported using DBTool
Export.
IMPORTANT
Figure 6-22 Custom Hierarchies
Organization
When OW5000 is installed, a pre-determined set of hierarchies are
installed for organization data. Organization has the same hierarchy
mechanism as locations. Refer to “Import Custom Hierarchies” on
page 6-30 for details on selecting hierarchies and importing custom
hierarchies.
If a hierarchy is not selected, then the Organization levels will not be available in the
Database Fields list.
NOTE
Locations that have the same extension may cause Hotel vertical applications to not
display data accurately or cause some features not to function properly.
IMPORTANT
General
Step 1
To import settings from Organization, select Setting > General. 
Figure 6-23 displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-31
Figure 6-23 Organization page
Table 6-26 Organization fields
Field
Default PBX
Hierarchy Selector
Location Types
Automatically lookup PBX
Description
PBX for the organization.
Choose one of the predefined hierarchies from the list. Refer to
Table 6-27.
Select the location type for this organization. Refer to Table 6-27.
Refer to “PBX Lookup Function” on page 6-18.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-32
Database Operations
Database Field Reference—Organization
Table 6-27 Organization Type Database Import Fields
Type
SubType
Database Field
Is External
Notes
Number
Office Code(PBX Id)
Organization
Hierarchies
Company I Division I Department
Hotel
Locations Types
Area
Campus
Hospital
Hotel Building
Office
Unknown
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-33
Organization/Location Hierarchy Settings
The Organization/Location Hierarchy import type provides the import
capability of organization and location simultaneously with hierarchy
and also links the location to the organization. If the location hierarchy
import has multiple levels, the lowest level of the hierarchy is the level
that is associated with the organization. This location will be displayed in
the locations list when viewing the organization in OW5000
Administrator.
Step 1
To import settings from Organization/Location Hierarchy, select Setting
> General. Figure 6-24 displays.
Figure 6-24 Organization/Location Hierarchy Settings
Table 6-28 Organization/Location Hierarchy fields
Field
Default PBX
Description
PBX for this hierarchy.
Hierarchy Selector
Choose one of the Location hierarchies from the list. Refer to Table
6-29.
Unit Types
Select the unit type for this Organization hierarchy. Refer to Table 629.
Automatically lookup PBX
Refer to “PBX Lookup Function” on page 6-18.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-34
Database Operations
Database Field Reference—Organization/Location Hierarchy
Table 6-29 Organization/Location Hierarchy Type Database Import Field
Type
SubType
Organization/Location
Hierarchy
Database Field
Is External
Database Fields
Note
Number
Office Code(PBX Id)
Hierarchies
Hotel
Company
Area
Area Extension
Area Note
Area Office Code
Campus
Campus Extension
Campus Note
Campus Office Code
Office
Office Extension
Office Note
Office Code
Hospital
Nurse Station
Room
Bed
Hospital Extension
Hospital Note
Hospital Office Code
Nurse Station Extension
Room Extension
Nurse Station Note
Room Note
Nurse Station Office Code
Room Office Code
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Type
SubType
6-35
Database Field
Bed Extension
Bed Note
Bed Office Code
Person
NOTE
Before importing Person data, make sure the Office Code(PBX Id) field matches the
data being importing. Log in to OW5000 Administrator and browse to System >
PBXs and then select the desired PBX to edit, or create a new PBX. From the PBX
Management page, select PBX Settings to confirm the Office Code(PBX Id)
settings. For more information, refer to “PBX Management” on page 2-57.
Select Person from the Import Type drop list (Figure 6-5). This screen
also displays three different mapping options: Contact Methods, Roles,
and Addresses. Refer to Table 6-33.
Person Import Type has three Settings options: General, Contact
Methods, and URI Generation Rules.
General
Step 1
To define import settings, select Settings > General. Figure 6-25
displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-36
Database Operations
Figure 6-25 Person Settings page
Table 6-30 Person Settings fields
Group Name
Field
Person Access
Server
Description
Set the default Person Access Server in the following
cases:
• Person Access Server is mapped but the imported
value is incorrect.
• Person Access Server is not mapped.
General Options
Sync or Update
Database
Select the desired method of synchronization.
• Update: Only adding/modifying the data which is in the
Profile source.
• Sync Method 1: Every Person that was deleted from
the Profile source is deleted from the database.
• Sync Method 2: Every Person not in the Profile source
is deleted from the database.
For more information on Sync Methods, refer to
“Understanding Update Method” on page 6-37.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Group Name
Field
6-37
Description
The case conversion options allow the user to decide if
the records in the database will be in mixed case, only
upper case, only lower case, or left as they are when
imported.
• Mixed: Imports names with the leading character in
uppercase (capitalized).
Case Conversion
• Upper: Converts the mapped fields to all upper case
characters.
• Lower: Converts the mapped fields to all lower case
characters.
• Leave As Is.
Note: This feature is applied to First Name, Last Name
and Middle Name.
This option defines how to create the Display Name from
the Display Name Generation page, using the drop
menu.
• Update Display Names in all records
This selection looks at a flag in the database to
determine if the existing Display Name has been
modified. If so, then it is not updated during the import.
Display Name
Generation
• Update non-modified Display Names only
This results in the regeneration of Display Name based
on the import data regardless of the modified flag.
• Do not update the Display Names
When this option is selected, the Display Name is not
built from Full Name for any matching employee.
Note: Updates non-modified Display Name only and
does not update the Display Names. Works only
when DBTool can determine the target Person.
Automatically lookup
Refer to “PBX Lookup Function” on page 6-18.
PBX
Understanding Update Method
This method allows Person records to be modified or added, but not
deleted. If the Import source file contains records that were previously
Exported using DBTool, the last column of the Export file will contain a
system-generated Unique ID that OW5000 creates whenever a new
Person record is added to the database by any means.
This OW5000 Unique ID can later be extracted via Person Export and
used to insure that duplicate Person records are not created when you
run a Person Import with the Update method.
Note, however, that if the OW5000 Unique ID (obtained from a prior
Export) is being used with the Update Method Person Import, every
record in the source file must have an OW5000 Unique ID in the
designated column. This means that you can only Update existing
Person records and cannot add new Person records when making use of
the OW5000 Unique ID to ensure uniqueness.
Thus, if you want to use the Update Method to add new Persons to the
OW5000 database you have two options:
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-38
Database Operations
1) You can create a separate source file containing only the Person
records to be added and run the Person Import a second time (without
using OW5000 Unique ID) after first running it to Update existing
Persons (while using OW5000 Unique ID).
2) You can use the Update Method without requiring Unique ID for
Updating existing Persons, in which case you can have a mix of updated
Person records and new Person records within a single source file, but
the existing Persons will run a slight risk of duplication, even though
OW5000 uses a “Check If Exists” algorithm that makes every effort to
determine uniqueness in the absence of a system-generated OW5000
Unique IDs (or User Defined Unique IDs - see Sync Methods 1 and 2.)
Understanding Sync Methods
Sync Method 1 - This data synchronization method allows data to be
maintained based on the association with a particular import file and
Profile name. All other data that already exists in the database or is
imported with a different import file or Profile name is not affected.
Step 1
Select Sync Method 1 from the Settings dialog for a Person import type
(Figure 6-25).
Step 2
Create the import file such that there is a unique identifier column that
contains a unique value for each row of data in the import file. This
unique identifier column does not have to be bound when mapping data
fields, but will be used on future sync executions internally to match data
records from the file with existing records in OW5000. Optionally, you
can bind the unique identifier column to an OW5000 database field, in
addition to designating it as a user-defined unique ID.
Step 3
Select the Source file to be imported.
Step 4
Bind the data fields.
Step 5
Right-click on the unique identifier column name from the Source fields
and select Set UniqueId > User Defined. The icon will change to a key
icon for this Source Field.
Step 6
From the Menu select File > Save. A Save Profile As... dialog displays.
Enter a Profile Name to identify this Sync Method 1 import file.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Step 7
NOTE
6-39
Press the Import Profile button.
If the data in the import file already exists in the OW5000 database and was exported
using DBTool Export, the Unique Id column could be specified as OW5000-defined
instead of as User-defined. This instructs the Sync Method 1 Person Import to match
data records to existing records using the OW5000-defined unique ID, rather than
relying on a User-defined unique ID. The distinction here is that when relying on the
OW5000-defined unique IDs, records imported via Sync Method 1 Person Import
must already exist in the OW5000 database, having originated from a source other
than this particular Import profile.
The only way to obtain the OW5000-defined Unique IDs needed for a Sync Method 1
Import that uses them is to perform a Person Export in advance of the Import.
Therefore, it is impossible to use Sync Method 1 Person Imports to add new
Persons, when relying on OW5000-defined unique IDs. Sync Method 1 can rely on
OW5000-defined unique IDs only for the purpose of modifying or deleting existing
Person records that were not added to the OW5000 database by this Import profile,
and the only Person records that can be deleted from the OW5000 database using
Sync Method 1 with OW5000-defined unique IDs are those which originated from
other sources, were exported to obtain their OW5000-defined unique IDs, and then
imported at least once using this Sync Method 1 profile, with or without modification
to the data fields. Only then can one or more OW5000 Person records be deleted by
removing the corresponding records from this profile's source file prior to another
execution of the Import.
The circumstances where you might want to do this are extraordinary, as when
wanting to export all Person data, applying some type of filtering or global
replacements (i.e. to change the domain name for the work email address contact
method), then importing them all back into the OW5000 database (overwriting the
existing records with the updated email domains). This could be accomplished using
the default Update method for Person Imports, but Update does not allow you to
delete selected records, just by removing them from the Import source file in a
subsequent execution of the same profile.
The point to remember when using OW5000-defined Unique IDs with Sync Method
1, is that deletions cannot occur by removing a Person record from the Import file
until at least one Sync Method 1 Import was performed without deleting any records.
That first Sync Method 1 import (which can be performed without modifying any of
the exported data) associates those Person records with this Sync Method 1's profile
name and source file - after which, you can safely delete records from the source file
to affect a deletion from the OW5000 database without deleting any Persons from
the database that are not within this Profile's control.
You can also confine this ability to control deletions externally, by importing only a
subset of all of the exported Person records with this profile.
Use of User-defined Unique IDs with Sync Method 1 Person Imports works the same
way as with OW5000-defined Unique IDs, except there is no need to first export any
Person records and because you are supplying the determiner of uniqueness for
each Person record (with an Employee ID column, for example), you can add new
Persons to the OW5000 database via Sync Method 1, in addition to modifying or
deleting Persons who originated from previous runs using this same profile and
source file. An OW5000-defined Unique ID will still be created when a new Person
is Imported, but you will not rely on that Unique ID with this profile.
Every time this import profile is imported, only data associated with this import file will
be added, updated or deleted.
IMPORTANT
Sync Method 2 - This sync method treats the import data file as the
master and when complete the people in the database will match the
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-40
Database Operations
people in the import file. All other data that already exists will either be
deleted or updated to match the data in the import file.
WARNING
Sync Method 2 can delete Person records that were added to the OW5000
database by other methods. Make a SQL backup of the OW5000 database before
performing a Sync Method 2 Person Import, as it will delete every Person record in
the OW5000 database that does not exist in the import file!
Step 1
Select Sync Method 2 from the Settings dialog for a Person import type
(Figure 6-25).
Step 2
Create the import file such that there is a unique identifier column that
contains a unique value for each row of data in the import file. This
unique identifier column does not have to be bound when mapping data
fields, but will be used on future sync executions internally to match data
records from the file with existing records in OW5000. Optionally, you
can bind the unique identifier column to an OW5000 database field, in
addition to designating it as a user-defined unique ID.
Step 3
Select the Source file to be imported.
Step 4
Bind the data fields.
Step 5
Right-click on the unique identifier column name from the Source fields
and select Set UniqueId > User Defined. The icon will change to a key
icon for this Source Field.
Step 6
From the Menu select File > Save. A Save Profile As... dialog displays.
Enter a Profile Name to identify this Sync Method 2 import file.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Step 7
NOTE
6-41
Press the Import Profile button.
If the data in the Import file already exists in the OW5000 database and was
exported using DBTool Export, the Unique ID column could be specified as
OW5000-defined instead of as User-defined. This instructs the Sync Method 2
Person Import to match data records to existing records using the OW5000-defined
unique ID, rather than relying on a User-defined unique ID. The distinction here is
that when relying on the OW5000-defined unique IDs, records imported via Sync
Method 2 Person Import must already exist in the OW5000 database, having
originated from a source other than this particular Import profile.
The only way to obtain the OW5000-defined Unique IDs needed for a Sync Method 2
Import that uses them is to perform a Person Export in advance of the Import.
Therefore, it is impossible to use Sync Method 2 Person Imports to add new
Persons, when relying on OW5000-defined unique IDs. Sync Method 2 can rely on
OW5000-defined unique IDs only for the purpose of modifying existing Person
records that were not added to the OW5000 database by this Import profile.
The point to remember with Sync Method 2, is that every Person record not found in
the Source file will be deleted from the OW5000 database. You don't need to match
an OW5000-defined Unique ID to accomplish either a deletion or an add. Thus, the
only benefit of using OW5000-defined Unique IDs with Sync Method 2, is to ensure a
match with Person records you intend to modify, rather than add or delete, but
modifying Person records can be accomplished with the less hazardous Update or
Sync Method 1 Person Imports.
Use of User-defined Unique IDs with Sync Method 2 Person Imports works the same
way as with OW5000-defined Unique IDs, except there is no need to first export any
Person records and because you are supplying the determiner of uniqueness for
each Person record (with an Employee ID column, for example), you can still ensure
matching of source records to database records when modifying Persons who
originated from previous runs using this same profile and source file. An OW5000defined Unique ID will still be created when a new Person is Imported, but you will
not rely on that Unique ID with this profile.
Refer to “Update and Synchronization” on page 6-54 for details on how
to synchronize data.
Contact Methods
Step 1
To import Contact Methods for Person type, select Setting > Contact
Methods. Figure 6-26 displays.
Figure 6-26 Person Contact Method Settings page
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-42
Database Operations
Table 6-31 Person Contact Method Settings fields
Person Contact Method Setting
PBX
If a PBX is not specified when a Contact Method and
person are imported, a default value selected here is
used.
• PBX
• Wireless PBX (Not used in this version)
This setting is applied only when importing extension
contact methods for a Person like Primary or Secondary
Extensions, and when a DTerm password is mapped.
Extension
Contact
It is used by the user to indicate whether or not the
source password for the Extension is encrypted.
Method
Settings
Password already If the setting is selected as "NO", the source password is
encrypted?
not encrypted so DBTool will encrypt the password using
encryption OW5000 algorithm (not SHA-1) before
storing it.
If the setting is selected as “YES”, the password is
assumed to have been previously encrypted with
OW5000 algorithm so it is not modified.
URI Generation Rules
Step 1
To import URI Generation Rules for Person type, select Setting > URI
Generation Rules. Figure 6-27 displays.
Figure 6-27 Person URI List page
Table 6-32 Person URI Derivation Icons/Buttons
Field
Description
Edit the rule which is already created.
Delete the rule which is already created.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-43
Field
Description
Add New
When you click the Add New button to create a new rule, the field
is cleared in order to create a new rule. The value cleared is
not saved.
OK
Close the dialog.
Figure 6-28 Person URI Derivation
Figure 6-29 Person URI Derivation fields
Field
Description
Apply IM URI
Select applying rule from the created rule.
Apply SIPURI
Select applying rule from the created rule.
Provides a list of available Key parameters.
• First character of First Name + Last Name
• First Name
URI Key Parameter
• Last Name
• LoginId
• Prefix + Primary Extension
• Primary Extension
Note: Primary Extension and Prefix + Primary Extension keys are
only available and displayed in the US Market.
Translation
Save
OK
Cancel
Gives an example of URI generated after applying rule. $0 and @
must be included in this field.
Saves the rule and adds to data grid.
Save the rule and close the dialog.
Close the dialog without saving.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-44
Database Operations
NOTE
If Login ID is selected as the URI Key Parameter in Person URI Derivation, User
Roles must be selected for creation in Import Settings so that the Login ID database
field can be mapped to a Login ID column in the Input File. This column MUST
contain unique Login IDs for each person being added or updated. If an input record
specifies a Login ID that is already in use in the OW5000 database, data associated
with the existing Person can be overwritten by the data that's being imported for that
Login ID. Please ensure that if you are attempting to add a new Person to the
database, that the specified Login ID is unique relative to existing Login IDs in the
database and relative to other Login IDs in the DBTool Input File.
Assigning Contact Methods, Roles, and Addresses to a Person
Refer to Table 6-33 to view the Database Fields for each option on the
DB Tool Import Screen (Figure 6-5).
—Assigning Organization or Location
The Roles associated with a Person can have an organization and/or
location assigned to them (Employee, Physician, and so forth). To make
an assignment using DBTool, the following two things must be
considered:
• The location or organization must already exist in the database. A
Person import will only make an assignment between the role and
organization/location.
• A Fully Qualified Name of the Organization or Location must be
specified in the Import File. This is required for DBTool to determine
accurately which organization or location the role will be assigned.

For example, if a Person belongs to an organization department
Admin and is under the division Retail, which is under the company
AAA Corporation, the field should be specified in the input file as
follows: AAA Corporation~Retail~Admin.
NOTE
Use a ~ (tilde) character as the delimiter between qualifiers of a fully qualified
hierarchical Location or Organization name. This is treated as one value or a single
column. For example, a fully qualified Organization name of
“Acme~Furniture~Manufacturing” could be imported when the
Company|Division|Department hierarchy has been selected in the Import Settings.
If the fully Qualified name is incorrect or DBTool is unable to find an organization
following the exact hierarchy in the database, an assignment is not made.
NOTE
—Assigning Skills to a Person
The Roles associated with a Person can have Skills assigned to them. To
make an assignment using DBTool, do the following:
• In the import file under the Source field column for skills, enter the
skill for the entry. If more than one skill needs to be added per entry,
separate each skill with a "~". For example: Java~C++
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Database Field Reference—Person
Table 6-33 Person Type Database Fields
Type
SubType
Database Field
Add Photo
Authorization Code
Display Name
First Name
IM Access Server
IM URI
Last Name
Middle Name
Note
Prefix
SIP Access Server
SIP URI(Person)
Base
SIPUA Group
Skills
Special Dial Code
Suffix
Unique Id
User Defined 1
User Defined 2
User Defined 3
User Defined 4
User Defined 5
User Defined 6
Voice Mail Server
Employee Confidentiality Status
Employee ID
Employees
Employee Location
Employee Organization
Employee Position
Employee Type
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-45
6-46
Database Operations
Type
SubType
(cont’d)
Database Field
Do Not Disturb
Guest Address Line1
Guest CheckIn Date
Guest Checkout Date
Guest City
Guest Company
Guest Confidentiality Status
Guest Confidentiality Status Code
Guest Country
Guest CS FileName
Guest Folio
Guest Group Name
Guest Group Number
Guest
Guest Language
Guest Room
Guest State Name
Guest Status
Guest Status Code
Guest Suite Id
Guest Type
Guest Type Code
Guest Unit Name
Guest UserDefined1
Guest UserDefined2
Guest UserDefined3
Guest UserDefined4
Guest UserDefined5
Guest UserDefined6
Guest Zip
IsNRG
IsVIP
Room Extension
Room Office Code
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Type
SubType
(cont’d)
Database Field
Allow Visitors
Nurse Desk Location
Nurse Desk Unit
Patient Account
Patient Admit Date
Patient
Patient Birth Date
Patient Confidentiality Status
Patient Discharge Date
Patient Gender
Patient Location
Patient Number
Patient Unit
Physician Confidentiality Status
Physician End Date
Physician Location
Physicians
Physician Organization
Physician PID
Physician Specialty
Physician Start Date
Student Confidentiality Status
Student
Student Number
Student Start Date
Student Suspend Date
Login ID
MC550 Privilege (Note)
NTLM Login ID (Note)
Password
User
Password (Encryption Key)
Password (Hash Value)
Privilege (Note)
UC700 Privilege (Note)
User Confidentiality Status
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-47
6-48
Database Operations
Type
SubType
Contact Methods
Database Field
Alpha Pager
Confidentiality Status(Alpha Pager)
Alpha Pager
Country(Alpha Pager)
Is Two Way(Alpha Pager)
PIN(Alpha Pager)
Priority(Alpha Pager)
Provider(Alpha Pager)
Assured Mobility WiFI
Confidentiality Status(Assured Mobility WiFI)
Assured Mobility WiFi Dterm Password(Assured Mobility WiFI)
Office Code(Assured Mobility WiFI)
Priority(Assured Mobility WiFI)
Confidentiality Status(Dual Mode Number)
Dual Mode Number
Dual Mode Number
Office Code(Dual Mode Number)
Priority(Dual Mode Number)
Confidentiality Status(External Fax)
External Fax
Country(External Fax)
External Fax
Priority(External Fax)
Confidentiality Status(External Primary Number)
External Primary
Number
Country(External Primary Number)
External Primary Number
Priority(External Primary Number)
Confidentiality Status(External Secondary
Number)
External Secondary
Number
Country(External Secondary Number)
External Secondary Number
Priority(External Secondary Number)
Confidentiality Status(External Tertiary Number)
External Tertiary
Number
Country(External Tertiary Number)
External Tertiary Number
Priority(External Tertiary Number)
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Type
SubType
Contact Methods (cont’d)
6-49
Database Field
Confidentiality Status(Fax)
Dterm Password(Fax)
Fax
Fax
Office Code(Fax)
Priority(Fax)
Confidentiality Status(Home Email Address)
Home Email Address Internet Address(Home Email Address)
Priority(Home Email Address)
Confidentiality Status(Home Phone Number)
Home Phone Number
Country(Home Phone Number)
Home Phone Number
Priority(Home Phone Number)
Confidentiality Status(Instant Messaging)
Instant Messaging
Instant Messaging
Priority(Instant Messaging)
Confidentiality Status(Mobile Phone)
Mobile Phone
Country(Mobile Phone)
Mobile Phone
Priority(Mobile Phone)
Confidentiality Status(Other Email Address)
Other Email Address Internet Address(Other Email Address)
Priority(Other Email Address)
Confidentiality Status(Other Email Pager)
Other Email Pager
Internet Address(Other Email Pager)
Priority(Other Email Pager)
Confidentiality Status (Other Work Phone
Number)
Other Work Phone
Number
Dterm Password (Other Work Phone Number)
Office Code(Other Work Phone Number)
Other Work Phone Number
Priority(Other Work Phone Number)
Confidentiality Status(Personal Homepage)
Personal Homepage Internet Address (Personal Homepage)
Priority(Personal Homepage)
Phone Pager
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Confidentiality Status(Phone Pager)
6-50
Database Operations
Type
SubType
Contact Methods (cont’d)
Database Field
Phone Pager (cont’d) Country(Phone Pager)
Phone Pager
Priority(Phone Pager)
Confidentiality Status(Primary Extension
Dterm Password(Primary Extension)
Primary Extension
Office Code(Primary Extension)
Primary Extension
Priority(Primary Extension)
Confidentiality Status (Secondary Extension)
Dterm Password (Secondary Extension)
Secondary Extension Office Code (Secondary Extension)
Priority(Secondary Extension)
Secondary Extension
Confidentiality Status (Tertiary Extension)
Dterm Password (Tertiary Extension)
Tertiary Extension
Office Code(Tertiary Extension)
Priority(Tertiary Extension)
Tertiary Extension
Confidentiality Status(Text Messaging)
Text Messaging
Internet Address (Text Messaging)
Priority (Text Messaging)
Confidentiality Status (Wireless)
Wireless
Office Code (Wireless)
Priority (Wireless)
Wireless
Confidentiality Status (Work Email Address)
Work Email Address Internet Address (Work Email Address)
Priority (Work Email Address)
Confidentiality Status (Work Email Pager)
Wireless Email Pager Internet Address (Work Email Pager)
Priority (Work Email Pager)
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Type
SubType
Addresses
Database Field
Billing City
Billing Country/Region
Billing Address
Billing Postal Code
Billing State
Billing Street
Home City
Home Country/Region
Home Addresses
Home Phone Number
Home Postal Code
Home State
Home Street
Shipping City
Shipping Country/Region
Shipping Addresses Shipping Postal Code
Shipping State
Shipping Street
Work City
Work Country/Region
Work Addresses
Work Postal Code
Work State
Work Street
The database fields in bold are required.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-51
6-52
Database Operations
Room Direct DID Number
Select Room Direct DID Number from the Import Type drop list
(Figure 6-5). Room Direct DID Number import allows a set of DID
numbers to be imported and associated with a group.
How to Import Room Direct DID Numbers
Before executing a Room Direct DID import, complete the following:
• The DID Groups must already be created in OW5000 Administrator,
using the Room Direct Manager page (see the Room Direct Operations
Guide for more details). The DID number's PBX association is
determined through the DID Group it is assigned.
• The extension and re-direct values in the import file must already
exist in OW5000. Extensions and PBX reserved numbers (monitored
numbers) will not be created by this import. Extension values can be
left blank. Re-direct values can be physical extensions or PBX
reserved numbers.
• The extensions and re-direct numbers must belong to the same PBX.
• If the DID Number already exists, the state will be updated based on
the assigned/unassigned rules below.
Creating Unassigned DID Numbers:
• If the Extension value and the ReDirect value are the same for a DID
number in the import file, then the Extension field is ignored. The DID
will be imported as unassigned and redirected to the ReDirect number.
• Leave the Extension field blank.
Creating an Assigned DID Number:
• If the Extension number provided is different from the ReDirect
number and the Extension is already associated with a Location (must
be of type Hotel Room or Bed) in OW5000 Administrator and a Guest
or Patient record is already associated with the Location, the DID's
state will be assigned.
When the Room Direct service is first started, processing and assigning
the imported DID numbers to their initial redirection value will occur.
Database Field Reference—Room Direct DID Number
Table 6-34 Room Direct DID Number Type Database Fields
Type
SubType
Database Field
DID Group
DID Number
Room Direct DID
Number
* DID Number Description
Extension
* Listed Number
ReDirect
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
The database fields in bold are required.
NOTE
* The Listed Number and DID Number Description fields are only displayed in the
Hospitality Industry Vertical. These fields are not used in the Health Care vertical.
NOTE
Route/Trunk
Database Field Reference—Route/Trunk
Table 6-35 Route/Trunk Type Database Fields
Type
SubType
Database Field
Beginning Trunk
Ending Trunk
Office Code(PBX Id)
Route Name
Route Number
Route/Trunk
Tenant
User Defined1
User Defined2
User Defined3
User Defined4
The database fields in bold are required.
NOTE
SIPUA Group
Database Field Reference—SIPUA Group
Table 6-36 SIPUA Group Type Database Fields
Type
Sub Type
SIPUA Group
The database fields in bold are required.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Field
Group Name
6-53
6-54
Database Operations
States/Provinces
Database Field Reference—States Provinces
Table 6-37 States/Provinces
Type
SubType
States/Provinces
Database Field
Country Name/Description
Name
State/Province Code
The database fields in bold are required.
NOTE
Reserved Numbers
Update and Synchronization
The OW5000 database may be synchronized with customer data
sources. This means that users can choose to have records that were
previously available in a data source to automatically be deleted by
DBTool.
Data synchronization occurs as a part of importing data. The most
significant differences when comparing Update mode to Synchronization
mode is that a unique identifier (Unique Id) is required for
Synchronization mode and data may be deleted in Synchronization
mode. In Update mode, mapping the unique identifier is optional.
Refer to “Understanding Update Method” on page 6-37 for more
information.
Synchronization mode is only available for Person import type.
NOTE
The following example (Figure 6-30) shows how to specify the UniqueId
from the Person Import Type.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-55
Figure 6-30 Select UniqueId
Unique ID Type
Description
OW5000 Defined
Select this definition when using all or a portion of DBTool exported
data as the import file.
User Defined
Select this definition when using data from an external source as the
import file and designating one of the columns as UniqueId, such as
employee ID or login ID.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-56
Database Operations
Figure 6-31 Update Mode
Figure 6-32 Sync Method 1
Figure 6-33 Sync Method 2
DBTool determines whether or not the person exists in the OW5000
database using the following logic (Figure 6-34).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-57
Figure 6-34 OW5000 Database Check
IMPORTANT
If a person in the import file has a first and last name and does not contain one of the
other key fields used to determine uniqueness and a record already exists in
OW5000 with the same first and last name, a match will not be made. A new person
for the record in the import file with the first and last name will be created.
Only the Work Email Address is checked. Home Email Address and Other Email
Addresses are not checked.
NOTE
Importing Data
After mapping all of the fields, data can now be imported.
Step 1
Click Import Data (Figure 6-12) to start an import operation. Depending
on the selected Import Type and the number of fields mapped, the import
operation may take several minutes for the import operation.
Step 2
Click the Stop button to cancel the import when changing a mapping or
when canceling an import. The main screen of the import displays. When
an import is stopped, data processed up to that point will remain in the
database.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-58
Database Operations
Step 3
When the import is finished, Done is displayed in the Import Progress
dialog. From the bottom of the dialog, the user can know how much data
has been correctly stored in the database.
Step 4
Click Done to return to the import main screen. If an error occurred,
check the import log via OW5000 LogViewer and recheck the import file
format.
If there are any errors or warnings during the import, a link displays in
this form (Figure 6-35). Clicking this links opens a list of errors/warnings
(Figure 6-37).
Figure 6-35 Import Summary
If there are a large number of error/warning messages, it may take a few minutes for
the dialog to open.
NOTE
When clicking the Error/Warning Messages link, the link text changes to Loading
Error/Warning messages, please wait. Click here to Cancel., and a visual
indication is given indicating that the results are being loaded (Figure 6-36). You can
cancel the operation by clicking the link.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-59
Figure 6-36 Import Progress—Loading error/warning messages
Figure 6-37 Error/Warnings dialog
Export Data
Figure 6-38 shows the data export flow using DBTool. DBTool supports
13 export types, which are the same as import.
Figure 6-38 Data Export using DBTool
If UC700/MC550 is not installed and it is a Japanese market, States/Provinces, User
Privileges and Person Addresses are not displayed.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-60
Database Operations
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-61
Open Profile
Once the user creates a profile, anyone with DBTool privileges can select
the profile by selecting File > Export > Profile.
Figure 6-39 displays.
Step 1
To create or open a profile for export, click Export on the menu bar
(Figure 6-39).
Figure 6-39 Open Export Profile page
Table 6-38 Profile fields
Field
Profile Name
Description
List of profiles already created for export.
Figure 6-40 DBTool Export Screen
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-62
Database Operations
Table 6-39 Exported Data fields
Icon
Description
Moves the DataBase Field selected to Exported Fields list box,
indicating this field would be exported.
Moves the Exported field selected to DataBase Fields list box,
indicating this Field would not be exported.
Moves the selected field in Exported Fields up in the list box.
Indicates the order in which columns would be exported.
Moves the selected field in Exported Fields down in the list box.
Indicates the order in which columns would be exported.
Removes a field from Exported Fields list box and adds it back to the
DataBase Fields list box indicating the field would not be exported.
Starts the Exporting.
Table 6-40 Export Settings fields
Icon
Description
Write File Header
Output File
Output file path and name.
Hierarchy Selector
Location Types
Unit Types
Determines whether or not a header (column names) should be
added to the beginning of the file.
Choose one of the predefined hierarchies from the list.
This parameter displays only when Location, Organization or
Organization/Location Hierarchy is selected as the Export Type.
Select the correct hierarchy based on the configuration.
Select the location type for this organization.
This parameter is displayed only when Organization is selected as
the Export Type. Select the correct location type based on the
configuration.
Select the unit type for this organization/location hierarchy.
This parameter is displayed only when Organization/Location
Hierarchy is selected as the Export Type. Select the correct unit type
based on the configuration.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-63
Figure 6-41 Export Complete page
When the export is finished, Export Completed is displayed in the
Export Progress dialog. The amount of data correctly written in the file is
displayed at the bottom of the page.
Step 2
Click Done to return to the export main screen. If an error occurs, check
the export log via OW5000 LogViewer.
When you select an existing file name, the file is overwritten by the Exported file.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-64
Database Operations
Admin
The Delete Options screen (Figure 6-42) shows the Admin flow using
DBTool. Two delete functions are supported: Bulk Delete and Profile
Delete.
Figure 6-42 Delete Options
Bulk Delete
To delete records using bulk delete, a Delete Options page displays
(Figure 6-43). The objects are segregated by category.
Figure 6-43 Delete Options page
Parameters displayed in Figure 6-43 are different depending on the market and
conditions.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Step 1
6-65
Select the desired objects and then click Delete. A Delete Confirmation
dialog displays (Figure 6-44).
Figure 6-44 Delete Confirmation dialog
Step 2
Click Yes to delete or No to cancel the deletion. The process begins. The
process is interruptible, but any deletes that have occurred to that point
will be committed.
Step 3
Click Done to finish the process.
Delete Profile
Selecting Delete Profile displays Figure 6-45.
Figure 6-45 DbTool Profiles Deletion page
Step 1
Click the desired profile to delete and then click Delete. Figure 6-46
displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-66
Database Operations
Figure 6-46 Delete Profile Confirmation dialog
Step 2
Click Yes. A Confirmation dialog displays (Figure 6-47).
Figure 6-47 Confirmation dialog
Step 3
Click Ok to finish.
Help
Selecting Help from the DBTools Options page (Figure 6-2) displays
basic version information in an About page (Figure 6-48).
Figure 6-48 About page
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Table 6-41 Help fields
Field
Description
DBTool
OW5000 DBTool software build version
Database
OW5000 database version
.NET Framework
.NET Framework version used by DBTool
Database Server
The SQL Server instance name.
OW5000 Server
The name of the OW5000 server.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-67
6-68
Database Operations
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-1
7
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
OW5000 consists of a base platform (OW5000 platform) and a suite of
applications that utilize this platform. The base platform consists of the
OW5000 database, the OW5000 web administrator tool, and various
system services and web services. The applications include UA5200, OnCall, Message Center, Procedure Manager, Room Direct, Calendar Link,
UC700, and MC550, among others.
In the absence of MA4000 Manager, the OW5000 platform requires an
administrator to input PBX, extension and user information to the
OW5000 database, by importing it with DBTool or manually entering it
with the OW5000 Administrator web application. The MA4000 database
may already have much of the information that the OW5000 needs.
When MA4000 is defined to OW5000 as a source for Data Integration,
information common to both databases can be mapped so that OW5000
receives that data from MA4000. As mapped data is added, modified, or
deleted at the MA4000 Manager, changes are automatically
synchronized to the OW5000 database with Incremental Imports that
can run in the background continuously. Bulk Imports can also be
executed on-demand at any time, for synchronization of all mapped
data from MA4000. The following topics are included in the chapter.
Chapter Topics:
•
•
•
•
•
Integration Configuration
Synchronization Entities
Organization
VoiceMail Server
User
The OW5000 database synchronization (DBSync) service for MA4000
Integration and OW5000 database service (DBService) are installed
along with the OW5000 platform. When Incremental Import is running,
DBSync listens to change notifications from MA4000 and passes the
information to DBService which updates OW5000. The following entities
and sub-entities in MA4000 will be synchronized into OW5000, as shown
in Table 7-1 and Table 7-2.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-2
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
Table 7-1 MA4000 to OW5000 Integration
MA4000 Entity
PBX
OW5000 Entity
PBX
Extension
TelephoneNumber (Extension)
User
Person
Organization
Unit (Organization)
Voicemail Server
VoiceMail Server
Table 7-2 MA4000 to OW5000 Integration—Sub-Entity
MA4000 Sub-Entity
OW5000 Sub-Entity
Line appearance on an Extension Sub-line on an Extension
VoiceMailbox of a User
VoiceMail subscriber ID of a Person
Only one OW5000 server can be integrated to any given MA4000 and only one
MA4000 can be integrated to any given OW5000.
NOTE
The availability of MA4000 and OW5000 services are critical. If the
DBSync Service is not running, an error will be displayed on the Data
Integration page and neither Incremental Imports nor Bulk Imports will
be able to run. If the NEC MA4000 Database Change Notification Service
is not running, Incremental Import can be running, but change
notifications from the MA4000 may be missed by Incremental Import
and a bulk-sync must be performed to sync the OW5000 with the
MA4000.
To start a Bulk Import on demand, the Start icon must be pressed on
the Data Integration page in OW5000 Administrator. This can be done
even when no Configuration changes have been made to MA4000
Integration. The synchronization status will be updated with the sync
progress. The user must refresh the page to see the status update.
There are two synchronization types; Incremental and Bulk. An
incremental sync listens to change notifications from MA4000 and
consequently updates OW5000. Incremental sync can never be stopped
once started, it can only be paused or resumed. A bulk sync, also known
as full sync ensures both MA4000 and OW5000 are in synchronization.
Bulk sync can be stopped and re-started. Bulk sync cannot be paused.
NOTE
Stopping the OW5000 Database Synchronization service (OWDBSync) has the
effect of "pausing" Incremental Sync if it is running. The Data Integration page will
display a Status of "DBSync service is Stopped!" for the MA4000 Incremental and
Bulk Imports.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-3
Integration Configuration
To enable MA4000 integration, select Systems > Data Integration
(Figure 7-1).
Once an administrator enables MA4000 integration on the OW5000, if
the system was using the OW5000 database for authentication (Default)
and not NEC CAS (Centralized Authentication Service), the OW5000
Administration Login page no longer uses the OW5000 database for
authentication, but instead will use NEC CAS (Default ) or Windows
Authentication, if enabled in the system. For more information regarding
NEC CAS and configuring the different authentication options available,
refer to the UC for Enterprise (UCE) NEC Centralized Authentication
Service (NEC CAS) Installation Guide.
What this means for the administrator is that in order to login from the
Default OW5000 administration web page from that point on, the
administrator account used must not only have the administrator User
Role within the OW5000 database, but the login and password for that
User Role must match the information in NEC CAS or the NTLM Login ID
in the case of Windows Authentication. For more information regarding
managing Roles, refer to “Adding a User Role” on page 2-136.
A secondary page exists that can be used to administer the OW5000
and allows the administrator to use the OW5000 authentication used
prior to enabling MA4000 integration using the following link: replacing
%Server_Name% with the actual name of the OW5000 server: http://
%Server_Name%/OW5000/Default2.aspx.
Figure 7-1 OW5000 Systems Menu—Data Integration
A Data Integration—Add MA4000 Integration page displays 
(Figure 7-2).
If this is the first time you are logging into the OW5000 Administrator, use the default
Login ID admin and the default password admin.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-4
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
Figure 7-2 Data Integration—Add MA4000 Integration
Step 1
Click Add MA4000 Integration to display Figure 7-3.
Figure 7-3 Data Integration —Enable MA4000 Integration page
When creating a new MA4000 profile, History and Data Mapping
options are locked until the configuration is tested and applied.
Selecting Cancel or Done at this point will take you back to the Data
Integration page (Figure 7-2).
Selecting Apply attempts to save and deregister the service since it is
not yet enabled.
The information below describes the MA4000 Integration Configuration
page.
Enable MA4000 Integration
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-5
To enable MA4000 integration within OW5000, click the Enable
MA4000 Integration check box.
Disable MA4000 Integration
To disable MA4000 integration within OW5000, uncheck the Enable
MA4000 Integration check box. OW5000 will prompt you to confirm
that you want to do this (Figure 7-4). Once unchecked and saved,
OW5000 will forget all of its links to MA4000. Note that OW5000 will not
delete any of the directory records (Person, Extension, Org Level, etc)
that it imported from MA4000. However, all of those records will be
indistinguishable from manually entered data, therefore they will be
allowed to be edited through the OW5000 Administrator.
Figure 7-4 Disable MA4000 Integration confirmation page
If your intention is to temporarily stop MA4000 integration, you should
instead Pause the incremental sync, as described in the next section.
Pause MA4000 Integration
In special situations, for example when it is required to do bulk data
change in OW5000 using DB Tool, the administrator may need to
temporarily pause the MA4000 Integration.
To pause MA4000 synchronization, do the following:
• Go to Systems > Data Integration.
• Click on the Pause icon
in the Incremental Sync row.
Resume MA4000 Integration
To resume MA4000 synchronization when it is paused:
• Go to Systems > Data Integration.
• Click on the Resume
icon in the Incremental Sync row.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-6
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
OW5000 Connection
This is the OW5000 URL of the format http://%SERVER_NAME%/
OW5000. This URL is registered with MA4000 and used by MA4000 for
deep links.
Deep Links in MA4000
A Deep Link is a link in the MA4000 application for a PBX, Extension, or
a User. When selected, the user is taken to the corresponding OW5000
page. In MA4000, the deep link appears as Edit in OW5000.
Figure 7-5 Deep Link in MA4000
MA4000 Connection
Fields in the MA4000 section are described below:
MA4000 URL - This is the URL to the MA4000 application. For example,
http://<servername>/MA4000).
Login - A login with Administrator privileges is required.
Password - The password for the above login.
The default value for both the login name and the password is admin.
NOTE
MA4000 SQL Server Connection
The OW5000 needs the MA4000 SQL Server details and a read-only SQL
Server Login. This login is used by the OW5000 database
synchronization service to read the MA4000 database.
The following information describes the MA4000 fields in Figure 7-3.
MA4000 Server Name - The server name where the MA4000 SQL
Server is located.
Server Instance - The named instance of the SQL Server where the
MA4000 Database is installed. If this is the default instance, the value is
not required.
MSSQL Login - A login for the SQL Server which has read-only user
access to the MA4000 database. It is recommended that you use the
"reader" account that is created by MA4000.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-7
MSSQL Password - The password for the SQL Server login.
Database Name - The MA4000 database name.
DB Sync Listen Port - This is the port where the OW5000 DBSync is
listening to the change notifications from MA4000. This is an http port
hosted by the DBSync service itself and is not IIS dependent.
If MA4000 and OW5000 are installed on different servers, the firewall will have to be
opened on this port for incoming connections in the OW5000 server.
NOTE
NOTE
Overtime, SQL statistics can cause queries to become slow. A regularly occurring
maintenance plan that includes execution of “sp_updatestats” is recommended.
Running the following script against the MA4000 database using SQL Management
Studio Express will correct the time-out condition: “exec sp_updatestats”.
Testing the Configuration
The configuration must be tested before it can be saved. After entering
all the appropriate values, click the Test button. This Test runs four
separate tests for verification.
Verify the MA4000 URL - This is done by the system connecting to the
MA4000 web services to retrieve the NECCAS URL. If the MA4000 URL is
not specified or is invalid, this test will fail.
Verify the MA4000 login and password - This is done by connecting
to the MA4000 private web services. This test is executed only if the
MA4000 URL is verified successfully.
Verify the SQL server machine name, instance name, login, and
password - This is done by the system connecting to the SQL server
and querying the SQL server version. There is no connection to the
MA4000. If the SQL connection information is not specified, this test will
fail.
NOTE
If the MA4000 database resides within an instance of SQL Express edition, specify a
value of "SQLEXPRESS" for the MSSQL Instance field, instead of
"<hostname>\SQLEXPRESS".
Verify the MA4000 database name - This is done by connecting to
the SQL server and querying a value from the MA4000 database. This
test is only executed if the SQL server information was verified
successfully.
When the test is complete, the results are shown for each piece of
information. For example, the MA4000 URL may have passed but the
MA4000 login and password failed. In this case, the MA4000 URL will be
shown as valid and the MA4000 login and password will be shown as
invalid.
Clicking Apply without performing a successful test displays an error
and the configuration will not be saved.
—A configuration failure displays as a red X icon.
—A correct configuration displays as a green check-mark icon.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-8
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
Figure 7-6 Data Integration Text—Passed
Step 1
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the configuration, refresh the page and unlock
History and Data Mapping.
—Click Done to save the configuration and start the imports.
—Click Cancel to return to the Data Integration page. The imports will
not start and a warning message displays (Figure 7-7).
Figure 7-7 Cancel Imports—Warning message
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-9
Figure 7-8 Edit Data Integration information
The meaning of the various icons are listed below:
• Red Cross icon
—Stop/Cancel Import
• Green Pause icon
• Blue Play icon
—Pause Import
—Start
• Blue Resume icon
—Resumes paused incremental import
• Blue UpArrow icon
—Import is Running
• Red Exclamation icon
• Green Check icon
—An Error has occurred during Import
—Import has finished without any Errors
• Magnifying glass icon
—displays the History page (Figure 7-10).
Figure 7-9 Data Integration—History
Step 2
Clicking the Pencil icon (Figure 7-8) displays a warning message 
(Figure 7-10).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-10
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
Figure 7-10 Data Integration—Edit
Step 3
Clicking the Trashcan icon displays a warning message.
Figure 7-11 Data Integration—Delete
Step 4
Click OK.
OW5000 performs a registration with MA4000 when the test is
successful. The menu structure, deep links, database change
notification URLs, and other integration information is registered with
MA4000. If the registration is successful, the integration information will
be stored in the OW5000 database and the database synchronization
service will be notified of the change.
The synchronization time depends on the number of users newly defined or modified
in MA4000 since the last synchronization.
NOTE
Data Mapping
This section is enabled only after the basic configuration settings in
“Integration Configuration” on page 7-3 are applied and saved. This
section provides options to map MA4000 fields to the OW5000 fields and
to set-up custom integration options.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-11
Options
Figure 7-12 General Mapping Options region
Unit Type Hierarchy to import MA4000 Units - In MA4000,
organizations are created as Org Levels and there is no type associated
with them. OW5000 Orgs or Units are defined as a certain type-for
example, Company or Division. The hierarchy of the Org in OW5000 has
to follow a rigid type defined in this page.
This allows you to select the unit type hierarchy when Org is imported to
OW5000. If this option is not set, the Org will not be imported from
MA4000. Refer to “Organization” on page 7-19.
Sort the MA4000 Extensions for any User - Prime line extensions
can be imported into OW5000 in ascending or descending order.
The ordering of the extensions for each person can be changed in OW5000 using
the Person page.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-12
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
NOTE
Prior to MA4000 version 10, the first MA4000 extension was mapped as a Primary
Extension in OW5000. Thus, in ascending order, the MA4000 Primary Extension in
OW5000 will have the lowest number for the Person. In descending order, the
MA4000 Primary Extension will have the highest number. For example, if extensions
2001 and 1001 are assigned to User A in MA4000 and the user is imported as
Person A in OW5000, the MA4000 Primary Extension (value from OW5000) will be
either 1001 if we have ascending order, or 2001 if we have descending order.
Since MA4000 version 10, you can set the Primary flag to any one of the extensions.
OW5000 will map all of the extensions in ascending/descending order (as it did prior
to MA4000 version 10) but will always map the extension that has the Primary flag
set to the MA4000 Primary Extension in OW5000 (regardless of the ordering).
Moving the Primary flag in MA4000 from one extension to another will also change
the extensions assignment order in OW5000.
This label changes to MA4000 First Extension when integrating with MA4000 prior
to version 10.
NOTE
Extension / Contact Method Mapping
Map MA4000 Line Appearances to OW5000 Sublines - The line
appearances in MA4000 can be ringing or non-ringing appearances. Line
appearances on an extension in MA4000 are imported as sub-lines on
the extension in OW5000. This allows the option of either importing only
ringing line appearances or all line appearances.
UCE Attendant (UNIVERGE ) and UCE Desktop Client (UNIVERGE
UC700) sublines and subline sync options must be properly configured
in order to avoid their deletion on synchronization with MA4000.
If the attendant/user sublines are configured to ring in the voice
platform, select the Only ringing Line Appearances option.
OW5000 does not support synchronization of sub-lines that are not in the same TN
as the My-Line. In this case the sub-lines will not be synced.
NOTE
If the attendant/user sublines are non-ringing, check the option Map
MA4000 Line Appearances to OW5000 Sublines, and select All
Line Appearances.
NOTE
It is not advisable to sync non-ringing sublines for the entire system. Uncheck the
Sync with MA4000 check box for the attendant/user extensions, to prevent the
subline from being removed on sync.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-13
User Roles
This section allows you to enable the automatic creation of UC700,
MC550 and CMM users during the import of MA4000 users. The
application check boxes to assign roles are disabled unless the application is
installed and licensed. The Password field is always enabled because a user role
can be created for a user if certain user role fields are mapped and contain data
such as Login ID.
When MA4000 integration is used to create users, the password that is assigned to
those users at creation time is [email protected]$.
NOTE
The SIP and IM Access Servers should be defined in “Access Server
Configuration” on page 2-46.
The SIP and IM URI parameters and translation patterns are defined in
“People” on page 2-131.
OW5000 to MA4000 Mappings
The MA4000 data is imported and saved to the corresponding OW5000
fields as specified in the mappings in this section. There are 2 types of
mappings: static and dynamic.
The static mappings are system defined and cannot be altered. They are
used to import mandatory fields, as person's first name or last name.
The dynamic mappings are used to import optional fields. One can
define new mappings or alter the predefined set of system defined
dynamic mappings.
Dynamic mappings can be defined only for Person entities import.
NOTE
The dynamic mappings allow the various User Defined Fields or Custom
Fields (UDF) for a User in MA4000 to be mapped to a predefined set of
OW5000 fields of a Person. The same MA4000 UDF fields can be
mapped to more than one OW5000 field.
For example, a custom field called DID can be imported to the External
Primary Number of an OW5000 person.
MA4000 supports LDAP integration. This allows certain employeerelated data to be imported into MA4000 as custom or native fields,
which can then be imported into OW5000 fields using the above
mapping. The data can include Employee Title, Position, Type, or some
different types of contact methods as External FAX, External Primary
Number, External Secondary Number, Mobile Phone Number, or Home
Phone Number.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-14
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
The Override Blank/Null data option allows blank data in MA4000 to be
overwritten in the OW5000 database.
The User Defined Fields will have the (Custom) text prefixing the field name in order
to distinguish them from the Native Fields.
NOTE
Synchronization
When a configuration is applied or saved in the Data Integration
Configuration page, the user is asked if a bulk import should
automatically be started. The latest defined settings or mappings will
not be used until a bulk import runs. The entities will be processed as
per the rules and matching algorithms. The entities that were previously
imported from MA4000 and do not come across during a bulk import are
automatically removed in OW5000 since they are obsolete.
Synchronization Entities
PBX
The PBX is the most basic entity in both the OW5000 and MA4000
application. All the other entities are either directly or indirectly
dependent on the PBX. The PBX holds specific attributes like IP address
and OfficeCode.
PBX Matching Algorithm
• MA4000 PBX is matched by the IP address with a PBX in the OW5000
database. Multiple MA4000 PBXs with the same IP address are
matched to the same (single) PBX in OW5000.
• If no matching PBX is found using the IP address, it is matched by
PBX name. The PBX Name is unique in OW5000. This OW5000 PBX
should not already be matched to a different MA4000 PBX.
• If no match is found, a new OW5000 PBX is created.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-15
Table 7-3 Fields Mapping—PBX
MA4000 Field
OW5000 Field
Data Type/Length
Name
PBXType
Name
String / 50
PBXType
N/A
Predefined types in OW5000
String / 15
Uses OaiHostIP first. If blank, HostIP is used.
OfficeCode
String / 4
OfficeCode is unique in OW5000. The value
is set only if a new PBX is created in
OW5000.
IsSplitCallForward
Bool
HostIP or OaiHostIP IPAddress
PBXOfficeCode
CallForward
N/A
SIP Registration
Comment
PBXClientServerPort Int
Finds the max in OW5000 DB and
increments it by 1. If none is found, assign
44000.
SIP Registration
Servers
Refer to “SIP Registration Import” on page 716.
N/A
Other Import Rules and Algorithms
PBX Type Matching
Regardless of a PBX being created or updated in OW5000, the type of
the PBX is matched to the type in MA4000.
If MA4000 PBX Type = 71 (PBX 2000), Then
Begin
If PbxSysInfoIPSType = 'SV9300' Then
Match it to SV9300 in OW5000
ElseIf PbxSysInfoIPSType = 'SV8300' Then
Else
Match it to SV8300 in OW5000
Match it to NEAX 2000 IPS in OW5000
End
If MA4000 PBX Type = 51 (SV7000 MPS), Then
Begin
If PbxIsSv9500 = 'Yes' Then
Match it to SV9500 in OW5000
ElseIf PbxIsSv8500 = 'Yes' Then
Match it to SV8500 in OW5000
ElseIf IsMPS flag is set Then
Else
Begin
Match it to SV7000 MPS in OW5000
If LicensedPirCount = 0 And LicensedVpimCount =0 Then
Match it to NEAX 2400 IPS in OW5000
ElseIf LicensedPirCount is between 1 and 4
End
End
And LicensedVpimCount is between 1 and 16 Then
Match it to SV7000 in OW5000
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-16
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
If MA4000 PBX Type = 81 (SV8100) Then
Begin
End
Match it to SV8100 in OW5000.
The PBX type is not supported if it is not matched by the above algorithm. The PBX
will not be imported when the PBX type is not supported.
NOTE
OfficeCode Import
The Officecode value is set in OW5000 only when a PBX is being
created. If the PBX is being updated, it will retain the existing value.
Officecode is unique in OW5000 and is set to the PBXOfficeCode in
MA4000. If the value of Officecode is already set for another PBX in
OW5000, a new, unique Officecode is formed and set in OW5000.
A unique Officecode is created by taking the first 4 characters of the PBX
name. If that officecode already exists, a unique 4 digit number starting
from 1234 is assigned.
SIP Registration Import
The SIP registrations for a PBX in the MA4000 are imported to OW5000
along with the PBX based on the following rules:
• The SIP Registration Server Name is following the pattern:
PBX_Name
(SIP_Registration_IP_Address:SIP_Registration_IP_Port);
• The SIP Registration IP Address is saved as it is;
• The SIP Registration Port is saved as it is;
• The SIP Registration Type is matched based on the following
algorithm:
If MA4000 SIP Registration Type = 1 Then
Match it to Standard SIP in OW5000
ElseIIf MA4000 SIP Registration Type = 2 Then
Match it to Internal SIP (LAN1 IpAddress) in OW5000
ElseIIf MA4000 SIP Registration Type = 3 Then
Match it to Internal SIP (LAN IpAddress2) in OW5000
ElseIIf MA4000 SIP Registration Type = 11 Then
Match it to DT700 series in OW5000
ElseIIf MA4000 SIP Registration Type = 12 Then
Match it to SIP control in OW5000
NOTE
When there is no SIP Registration Address for the imported PBX in MA4000, all the
SIP Registration server entries that were manually added into OW5000 for that PBX
will be deleted on Bulk/Incremental import.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-17
Extension
The Extension is dependent on a PBX. The same extension number can
exist on multiple PBXs. Before synchronizing an extension, the DBSync
will synchronize the PBX of the extension. Other attributes of the
extension are also imported—for example, phone equipment type and
line appearances (sub-lines).
Extension Matching Algorithm
• The MA4000 extension is matched to OW5000 by the number and the
PBX it belongs to.
• The Extension number is unique in a PBX.
• If the extension number for the PBX does not already exist in
OW5000, a new extension is created.
• If a new extension is created, the Is Monitored flag will be set to true.
An extension that is flagged as Is Monitored will be watched by OW5000 for activity,
such as incoming calls.
NOTE
Table 7-4 Fields Mapping—Extensions
MA4000 Field
OW5000 Field
Data Type/Length
Number/NetworkNumber
/ Physical Number / Number
Station Number
Tenant
StationNumber
Line Appearance
Phone Type
Tenant
String / 32
N/A
For PBX Type = 51
(SV7000 or NEAX 2400),
the NetworkNumber is
used. If not available,
PhysicalNumber(Station
Number) is used.
int
Number /
NetworkNumber /
PhysicalNumber/
StationNumber
Sub-line
String / 32
Phone Equipment Type N/A
DID Number
String / 50
SIP Registration Server N/A
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Predefined types in
OW5000
Not visible in OW5000
Admin; used by the EOSN application
(Emergency On-Site
Notification).
Emergency Data Location NENA Emergency Data
XML
XML
Primary DID
Comment
7-18
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
Other Import Rules & Algorithm
Conference Extension Import
If an Extension in MA4000 is a conference extension, it is not imported
to OW5000.
Phone Equipment Type Matching:
If MA4000 Phone Type ID = 1 or 50 or 51 (Analog) Then
OW5000 Phone Equipment type of the extension is Analog.
ElseIf MA4000 Phone Type ID = 38 (SP30) Then
OW5000 Phone Equipment type of the extension 
is SP30(SIP).
ElseIf MA4000 Phone Type ID = 43 (SIP-BASIC) Then
OW5000 Phone Equipment type of the extension is SIMPLE.
ElseIf MA4000 Phone Type ID = 14 (DTR-16D) Then
OW5000 Phone Equipment type of the extension is DTerm.
ElseIf MA4000 Phone Type ID is any other Then
OW5000 Phone Equipment type of the extension is DTerm.
Line Appearances (Sub-lines)
The line appearances in MA4000 can be ringing or non-ringing
appearances. Line appearances on an extension in MA4000 are imported
as sub-lines on the extension in OW5000.
Depending on the settings in the MA4000 integration page in OW5000
Admin, either only ringing or all line appearances are imported for an
extension. Refer to “Database Synchronization” for more information.
If the extension already exists in OW5000, the sub-lines are exactly
matched with the MA4000. Therefore, depending on the pre-existing
sublines on the extension, sub-lines may be added or removed from the
extension in OW5000.
For each extension on the Extension page in OW5000 Admin, there is an
option called Synchronize Subline from MA4000. If this setting is
turned OFF for an extension, the MA4000 line appearances are not
imported as sub-lines in OW5000 for that extension. Refer to “Range
Delete—Extensions” on page 2-156 for more information.
NENA Emergency Location Data
MA4000 captures location information for an Extension for emergency
purposes. The location data is stored as XMLs in the NENA format.
Currently, only NENA versions 2.1 and 3 are supported.
The location XML is stored ‘as is’ in the OW5000 DB. Certain fields are
parsed out and stored separately as well. The fields ANI, Address
(formed by linking various fields like house number, street, city, state,
zip and so forth), Location Name, and Comments are parsed out from
the XML and stored separately.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-19
This data is not shown on the OW5000 Admin. It is only available to the
E-OSN application (Emergency On Site Notification). The E-OSN client
displays these details.
Sip Registration Server
The MA4000 doesn't offer a relation between an extension and a SIP
Registration on the PBX where the extension is defined. Therefore,
custom association rules must be used, as outlined below:
• if the extension's Intended Use setting in MA4000 is a Smart Device,
associate the extension with the active SIP Registration (the one
displayed in the MA4000 Admin pages while editing the PBX);
• if the extension's Intended Use setting in MA4000 is different than a
Smart Device, associate the extension with the Standard SIP
registration, if available; otherwise use the active SIP Registration
also for this case.
Organization
Organization in MA4000 is defined as the Organization-Level. It is a
hierarchical representation of the orgs. The user is assigned to an org in
MA4000 and the corresponding person in OW5000 is assigned after
importing.
In MA4000, organizations are created as Org Levels and there are no
types associated with them. In OW5000, Orgs or Units are defined as
certain types, such as Company, Division and so forth. The hierarchy of
the Org in OW5000 has to follow a rigid type defined in the Unit Type
Hierarchy page.
To import Orgs into OW5000, the Unit Type Hierarchy should be selected
in the MA4000 Integration page in OW5000 Admin. Refer to “Data
Mapping” on page 7-10.
The number of levels of the Orgs that are imported from MA4000
depends on the number of levels selected that the type hierarchy
actually supports.
For example, assume MA4000 contains a 5 level org hierarchy as
follows:
NEC
NEC America
CTG
Enterprise Apps
Development
In OW5000, a unit type hierarchy of Company | Division | Department is
selected.
After the sync, OW5000 will only have 3 levels of the Org since the unit
type hierarchy supports only 3 levels. The root Org NEC will be created
as type Company, NEC America will be created as type Division and
CTG will be as type Department. The next two levels Enterprise Apps
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-20
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
and Development will not be imported. A 5 level unit type hierarchy
should be selected in order for them to be imported.
Organization Matching Algorithm
The root Org level is matched by the Org Name to a root level Unit(Org)
in OW5000.
All other orgs are matched to the name and parent org in that particular
level.
Table 7-5 Fields Mapping—Organization
MA4000 Field
OW5000 Field
Data Type/Length
Name
Description
N/A
Parent
Comment
UnitName
String /100
Note
String / 1000
UnitType
N/A
Assigned based on the
Unit Type Hierarchy
selected.
Parent
N/A
Parents should be the
same.
Other Import Rules & Algorithm
Unit Type Hierarchy ‐ If a Unit Type Hierarchy is not selected in the MA4000 Integration page, the Orgs are not imported.
Employee Role - In OW5000, the Orgs are assigned to the Person via
Employee Role.
The extensions added to OrgLevels in MA4000 do not come across to OW5000
during import.
NOTE
VoiceMail Server
VoiceMails in UC can be stored in external NEC voicemail server systems
or 3rd party voicemail server systems. Every User is assigned a
VoiceMail box which is associated with a VoiceMail server.
VoiceMail Server Matching Algorithm
The criteria to match an MA4000 voicemail server to OW5000 is the
name of the voicemail server.
If a voicemail server does not exist, a new voicemail server is created in
OW5000. The name is unique in OW5000.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-21
The type of voicemail server is also imported to OW5000. OW5000 only
supports the following VoiceMail server types.
—UNIVERGE UM8500 (V3.5)
—UNIVERGE UM8700
Table 7-6 Fields Mapping—VoiceMail
MA4000 Field
OW5000 Field
Data Type/Length
Name
VMS Type
Description
String / 50
VoiceMailServerType
N/A
Comment
Assigned based on the
voicemail server types.
User
Users in MA4000 are imported as Persons in OW5000. The extensions
assigned to a User in MA4000 are imported as Contact Methods in
OW5000, depending on the mapping defined in the Database Mapping
section in the MA4000 Integration page in OW5000 Admin. Refer to
“Data Mapping” on page 7-10 for more information.
The Custom Fields or UDF defined in MA4000 can also be imported to
OW5000 to one or many of predefined fields in OW5000.
User Matching Algorithm
An MA4000 User is matched to an OW5000 Person by the combination
of First Name, Last Name, Email Address, Login ID and the extension
assigned in MA4000.
Match on Name + Email
If the Email Address is not empty in MA4000, find a person with the
same First and Last names and Email address and is not linked. Any
valid email address assigned to a Person may be used for a match, work
or personal; however, if the Email address from MA4000 is matched to a
Home Email address in OW5000 for example, then the Home Email
address will be converted to be of type Work Email address.
If the Email is found but the First and Last names are not matched to
the same person that matched the Email contact method, then a new
person will be created. The Email for the new person will not be synced
because Email contact methods are unique across users in OW5000.
Match on Login ID
If the OW5000 Login ID is mapped to a field in MA4000 and the MA4000
field is not empty, the Login ID by itself will be used for uniqueness.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-22
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
Match on Name + Extension
If Extension is not empty in MA4000, find a person in OW5000 with the
same First and Last names and Extension and is not linked. Any one
extension of the MA4000 user can match to any extension of the
OW5000 person (primary, secondary, tertiary extensions). If the
extension for a user in MA4000 matched a secondary or tertiary
extension in OW5000, the matched extension’s type will be converted to
a primary extension contact method, other non-matching extensions
are removed.
Match on Name only
If there is no extension for the MA4000 user, find a person with the
same First Name, Last Name and no extensions (no primary, secondary
or tertiary) and is not linked. If no matching Person is found, or if the
Person is already linked to a different User in MA4000, then a new
Person is created in OW5000.
Table 7-7 Fields Mapping—User
MA4000 Field
OW5000 Field
Data Type/Length
Comment
If first name is blank in
MA4000, the first name
will be a “-” in OW5000,
since OW5000 cannot
have blank first names.
FirstName
FirstName
String / 30
MiddleInit
MiddleName
String / 30
LastName
LastName
String / 30
ContactMethod Work
Email
String / 100
It is mapped based on the
ContactMethod defined.
Primary/Secondary /
Tertiary extension
String / 16
Extensions are assigned
depending on the contact
method defined.
Email
Extension (see note below)
First/Second/Third Smart String /16
Device
OrgLevel
Organization of the
Employee Role
VoiceMail box subscriber id VoiceMailBoxNumber
Custom or User Defined
Fields
User Login Name
Smart devices are
assigned depending on
the contact method
defined.
String / 16
Various fields in OW5000 N/A
Values are imported
based on the mapping of
Additional Fields in the
Admin.
UserRole
UC700/MC550/CMM
User: UserRole with
UC700/MC550/CMM
security authorizations;
SIP and IM URIs are also
assigned.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
MA4000 Field
7-23
OW5000 Field
Data Type/Length
Comment
InstantMessageAddress
ContactMethod Instant
Messaging
String / 100
Ignored when the
MA4000 and OW5000
domains do not match.
MobileNumber
ContactMethod Mobile
Phone
String / 50
It is mapped based on the
contact method defined.
HomeNumber
ContactMethod Home
Phone Number
String / 50
It is mapped based on the
contact method defined.
ExternalFax
ContactMethod External
String / 50
Fax
It is mapped based on the
contact method defined.
ExternalPrimary
ContactMethod External String / 50
Primary Number
It is mapped based on the
contact method defined.
ExternalSecondary
ContactMethod External String / 50
Secondary Number
It is mapped based on the
contact method defined
ExternalUserID
Title
EmployeeNumber (for
Employee Role)
String / 20
PositionTitle (for
Employee Role)
String / 50
WorkAddressStreet
Line1 (for Work address String / 50
type)
WorkAddressCity
City (for Work address
String / 50
type)
WorkAddressStateProvince
StateName (for Work
address type)
String / 50
address String / 10
WorkAddressZipPostalCode Zip (for Work
type)
WorkAddressCountryRegion
Description (for Work
String / 80
address type)
WorkAddressCountryAlpha2 ISOAlpha2Code (for Work
String / 2
Code
address type)
Note: For a fresh install with version 14.0, the default mapping for this field is the MA4000 field - User
Login Name.

For an upgrade from versions before 14.0, the existing mapping based on the calculated field
Login Id is not changed. The administrator has to remove this mapping and remap the Login ID to
a new field if needed. 

Data Type/ Length for the OW5000 Login ID field: String / 50;
The administrator can change (or delete) mapping of the OW5000 Login ID field and run bulk to change
all OW5000 Login ID's to a new mapping.
Extension Assignment Algorithm
Extensions in MA4000 are imported as Primary, Secondary, or Tertiary
Extensions in OW5000. The order and mapping is determined by how
the Contact Method for Extensions are mapped in the MA4000
integration page in OW5000 Administrator. Refer to “Data Mapping” on
page 7-10 for more information. If certain extensions are assigned to an
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-24
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
OW5000 person, but are not part of the MA4000 user, they are removed
from the OW5000 person.
If an extension is already assigned to the OW5000 person before
synchronizing with MA4000 as one of the Primary, Secondary or Tertiary
extensions, their order of assignment will be affected by the MA4000
database mapping for the contact methods. For example, Person A has
extension 2555 as Primary and 3555 as the Secondary extension in
OW5000, and the corresponding User A in MA4000 has 3555 as the first
extension and 2555 as the second. In this case, after synchronization,
the extension assignment of Person A, in OW5000, will change to 3555
as Primary, and 2555 as the Secondary extension.
Since MA4000 version 10, you can also set the Primary flag to one of the
extensions. OW5000 will map all the extensions in ascending/
descending order (as it did prior to MA4000 version 10), but will always
map the extension that has the Primary flag to the MA4000 Primary
Extension in OW5000, regardless of the ordering. Moving the Primary
flag in MA4000 from one extension to another will also change the
extensions assignment order in OW5000.
Due to re-ordering, some extensions may be discarded, for instance: 
If user A in MA4000 has the following extensions:
1001 (primary)
1002
1003
1004
The OW5000 synchronized user will have (considering ascending order):
1001 as MA4000 Primary Extension
1002 as MA4000 Second Extension
1003 as MA4000 Third Extension
If we move the Primary flag in MA4000 as follows:
1001
1002
1003
1004 (primary)
The OW5000 synchronized user will have (considering ascending order):
1004 as MA4000 Primary Extension
1001 as MA4000 Second Extension
1002 as MA4000 Third Extension
Notice above that 1003 was discarded to accommodate the new order.
At the version 10 release, the extension reordering that occurs by
changing the Primary flag in MA4000 does not change the priority of the
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-25
contact information for that OW5000 user regarding those extensions,
although the labeling of those extensions does.
Any modifications to the priority order of the contact methods will need
to be made from the OW5000 Person page. This order affects the
priority of contact methods presented to a user in some applications,
such as MC550.
Smart Devices import
Since MA4000 version 12, an extension can be flagged as a Smart
Device. Such an extension will not be imported to OW5000 as an
Extension contact method for a person, but as a Smart Device.
The same import rules (including ordering) that were set for extensions
are applied also for smart devices.
For instance, if user A in MA4000 has the following extensions:
1001 (primary)
1002 (Intended Use: Smart Device)
1003
1004 (Intended Use: Smart Device)
The OW5000 synchronized user will have (considering ascending order):
1001 as Primary Extension
1002 as Smart Device
1003 as Secondary Extension
1004 as Smart Device 2
If the Intended Use is set to Smart Device for the primary extension in MA4000, the
synchronized user in OW5000 will get no Primary Extension contact method.
NOTE
Other Import Rules & Algorithm
Empty FirstName and LastName not Imported - If an MA4000 user
has both first and last names blank, the user is not synchronized to
OW5000.
Empty LastName - If an MA4000 user has only the last name blank,
the last name in OW5000 is formed as “x” + extension number. If both
the last name and the extension is blank, the user is not imported.
NEW USER not Imported - If an MA4000 user has the first name as
NEW USER, the synchronized is not imported to OW5000.
Employee Role - If a Person is added to OW5000 and any of the Title,
Employee ID or Member Of fields in MA4000 are filled-in, the Person
in OW5000 is associated with an EmployeeRole.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-26
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
MA4000 Publish To Directory Option - MA4000 has a global option
called Show a Publish checkbox for each User in the MA4000 Setup.
If this option is not checked, all users are published and are candidates
for synchronization with OW5000.

If the option is checked, each user in MA4000 has an option called
Publish To Directory. If this option is set as ON, the user is a
candidate to be synchronized to OW5000. If the option is set as OFF, the
user is not synchronized to OW5000.
If you no longer want a particular person managed from MA4000, use
the following steps:
IMPORTANT
Step 1
Unlink the person in OW5000 by pressing the Unlink button on the
Person page.
Step 2
Un-check the Publish to Directory check box for the user in MA4000.
Refer to “MA4000 Help” in MA4000 for more information on the Publish
to Directory flag.
If the Publish to Directory check box is not visible on the MA4000 user's page, it
can be turned on from the MA4000 Setup page. Modifying any of the options on the
MA4000 Setup page will automatically execute a bulk import in OW5000. Modifying
options on the MA40000 Setup page should only be performed during non-peek
hours. If the Publish to Directory check box is unchecked while the person is still
linked in OW5000, the user will be deleted from OW5000 during the next bulk import.
UC700/MC550 Users
A UC700/MC550 user can be automatically created if the settings
described in “Data Mapping” on page 7-10 are configured. A UC700/
MC550 user is created by adding a UserRole for a Person in OW5000 and
assigning the credentials.
User Role
When a Person in OW5000 is associated with a User Role, the following
applies.
Step 1
If a Person is added to OW5000 and any of the Login ID or NTLM Login
ID fields are mapped with fields in MA4000, any corresponding fields in
MA4000 are filled-in.
Step 2
The Create UC/MC Flag in MA4000 Integration page is checked
(OW5000 calculates the initial value in case when Login ID, NTLM Login
ID are both un-mapped with some MA4000 columns or they are mapped
and not filled-in MA4000).
Voice Mailbox
OW5000 supports only one Voice Mailbox per person and it should be
unique. It cannot be shared with another person.
In MA4000, if there are multiple users associated to the same mailbox
or multiple mailboxes for the same user, then OW5000 will generate
errors in the Error Log during synchronization. To correct, go to MA4000
and remove the extra User associations for the offending mailboxes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-27
Custom Fields or User Defined Fields (UDF)
Custom fields defined for a User are imported and assigned to the
OW5000 person, provided they are mapped using the Additional Fields
Mapping section in the MA4000 Integration page in OW5000 Admin.
Custom fields in MA4000 can be mapped to one or many of the following
OW5000 fields (Table 7-8).
Table 7-8 Fields Mapping—Custom Fields
OW5000 Fields
Comments
Employee ID
Employee Position
Employee Type
Login ID
If this field does not exist in OW5000, it is dynamically created.
The Employee Types must be predefined in OW5000.
This field is dynamic, not static. See the note at the end of this table.
Title Prefix
Title Suffix
External Primary Number
External Secondary Number
The MA4000 native field (External Primary Number) will be mapped
to this field by default.
The MA4000 native field (External Secondary Number) will be
mapped to this field by default.
External Tertiary Number
External Fax
The MA4000 native field (External Fax) will be mapped to this field
by default.
Mobile Phone Number
The MA4000 native field (Mobile Phone Number) will be mapped to
this field by default.
Home Phone Number
The MA4000 native field (Home Phone Number) will be mapped to
this field by default.
Work Email Address
Home Email Address
Other Email Pager
UserDefined1
UserDefined2
UserDefined3
UserDefined4
UserDefined5
UserDefined6
NTLM Login ID
The mapping of OW5000 - NTML Login ID field is now Dynamic.
Data Type/ Length for the OW5000 NTML Login ID field: String / 50;
Managing the OW5000 NTLM Login ID field is consistent with the
behavior of the Login ID field on the User Role page.
Work Address
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-28
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
OW5000 Fields
Comments
Work City
Work State
State should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
Work Zip
Work Country
Country should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
Home Address
Home City
Home State
State should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
Home Zip
Home Country
Country should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
Billing Address
Billing City
Billing State
State should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
Billing Zip
Billing Country
Country should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
Shipping Address
Shipping City
Shipping State
State should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
Shipping Zip
Shipping Country
Country should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
Note: The administrator can change (or delete) mapping of the OW5000 Login ID field and run bulk
to change all OW5000 Login ID's to a new mapping.

OW5000 will copy the Login ID as-is from MA4000. No parsing or logic will be applied to the
data. Example: MA4000 Login Name with value “abcd\sample” will sync to OW5000 Login ID
as “abcd\sample” 

If there is no mapping row for OW5000 Login ID, then OW5000 import behaves as if there was
a mapping of OW5000 Login ID from an empty string.
Reserved Number
Reserved Numbers are stored separately from the regular extensions in
MA4000. During PBX synchronization, MA4000 stores AMNON/AMNO
data internally to exclude these numbers from being seen as available.
MA4000 does not provide a way to see AMNO numbers. Only AMNO
numbers are synced with OW5000 during a reserved number sync.
(AMNO assigned on the NEAX 2400).
The Reserved Number is dependent on a PBX. The same number can
exist on multiple PBXs. Before synchronizing a reserved number, the
DBSync will synchronize the related PBX.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-29
Reserved Number Matching Algorithm
• The MA4000 reserved number is matched to OW5000 by the phone
number and the PBX it belongs to.
• The phone number is unique in a PBX.
• If the phone number does not already exist on the PBX in OW5000, a
new telephone number is created.
• OW5000 supports only one type of reserved number which is
Monitored Number.
Table 7-9 Fields Mapping—Reserved Number
MA4000 Field
OW5000 Field
Data Type/Length
Number
Extension
string/16
Tenant
Tenant
int
ReservedNumberType ReservedLineTypeId
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
byte
Comment
Only Monitor Number
(MA4000 value = 1) is
handled
7-30
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Appendix A - 1
Appendix A
Acronyms and Descriptions
3rd Party SIMPLE
Terminal
The terminal which communicates with Access Server via Standard SIP/
SIMPLE Interface.
Access Server
The SIP Terminals communicate with this server.
BLL
Business Logic Layer - A code repository where common functionality is
added to reduce duplication by increasing re-use.
DAL
Data Access Layer - A set of code-generated DLLes that provide simple
physical database access and manipulation.
ML-SIP Terminal
The terminal which communicates with Telephony Server via Extended
SIP Multi Line Interface. Means DtermSP30 (SIP and SP350).
OW5000 Administrator
Refers to an individual who has access privileges to system
configuration features in OW5000.
Presence Server
Total system of the presence server which consists of single or multiple
Access Servers and single DB Server (OW5000 Platform).
STD-SIP Terminal
The terminal which communicates with Telephony Server via Standard
SIP Interface.
UNIVERGE SIP
Terminal
Indicates both WL-SIP terminal, ML-SIP terminal, and STD-SIP terminal.
WL-SIP Terminal
The terminal which communicates with Telephony Server via Extended
SIP Single Line Interface. Include MH250, FOMA N900iL, FOMA N902iL
and FOMA N906iL.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Appendix A - 2
Acronyms and Descriptions
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Appendix B - 1
Appendix B
Regular Expressions
The normalization rules are created using regular expressions. Table
Appendix B-1 lists representative regular expressions.
Table Appendix B-1 Regular Expressions
Regular Expression
Meaning
^
The line head is matched.
$
The line end is matched.
()
Means to group, record, and call the content in the parentheses
later.
[]
One character in the brackets is matched. A range can be specified
using a hyphen.
.
Any one character is matched.
|
One character string or another is matched.
*
The immediately preceding expression appears zero or more times.
+
The immediately preceding expression appears one or more times.
?
The immediately preceding expression appears zero or one time.
{m}
The immediately preceding expression appears m times.
{m,}
The immediately preceding expression appears m times or more.
{m,n}
The immediately preceding expression appears m times or more, n
times or less.
\d
Digits 0 to 9 are matched. Same as [0-9].
\s
A space character is matched.
When a special character used in regular expressions, ^, $, [, ], *,
+, ?, |, (, or ) is to be treated as a normal character, each one
needs to be preceded by \ as follows: \., \^, \$, \[, \], \*, \+, \?, \|, \(,
or \). When a special character is treated as a normal character
within [ ], \ need not be appended (except for \, ^, and ]). When - is
used as a normal character within [ ], it is represented as \-.
A character string grouped by () can be referenced by $n. $n means
that the nth group from the line head is to be referenced. $0 means
that the whole line is to be referenced.
Table Appendix B-2 and Table Appendix B-3 show examples of
normalization rules, which are only for reference and need not be
followed to create the normalization rules for your system.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Appendix B - 2
Regular Expressions
Table Appendix B-2 Normalization Rules (Global Numbers)
Regular Expression
Conversion
Examples
09012345678
^0([0-9]{10})$
+81$1
^0([0-9]{9})$
+81$1
^0(\d\d)-(\d\d\d\d)-(\d\d\d\d)$
+81$1$2$3
-> +819012345678
0312345678
-> +81312345678
090-1234-5678
-> +819012345678
03-1234-5678
-> +81312345678
^\(*0(\d)[()\-](\d\d\d\d)[()\](\d\d\d\d)$
+81$1$2$3
(03)1234-5678
-> +81312345678
03(1234)5678
-> +81312345678
^\+(\d)-(\d\d\d)-(\d\d\d)-(\d\d\d\d)$ +$1$2$3$4
^0(\d)-(\d\d\d\d)(\d\d\d\d)\sX(\d\d\d\d)$
+81$1$2$3;ext=$4
+1-212-345-6789
-> +12123456789
03-1234-5678 X2000
-> +81312345678;ext=2000
Table Appendix B-3 Normalization Rules (Local Numbers)
Regular Expression
^([0-9*#]{4})$
^2([0-9*#]{4})$
Conversion
$1;phone-context=nec.com
2$1;phone-context=nec.com
Examples
2000
-> 2000;phone-context=nec.com
20000
-> 20000;phone-context=nec.com
81070000
^8([0-9*#]{7})$
$0;phone-context=nec.com
^8-(\d\d)-([0-9*#]{5})$
8$1$2;phone-context=nec.com
-> 81070000;phonecontext=nec.com
8-10-70000
^$
-> 81070000;phonecontext=nec.com
No caller number (anonymous)
notknown;phone-context=nec.com -> notknown;phonecontext=nec.com
^$indicates a blank line. When the caller number cannot be acquired at
termination, the regular expression for a blank line is matched. When
the conversion result is tel:notknown;phone-context=~, "unknown" is
displayed on the MOC.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Specifications for OW5000 Admin
Appendix C
Specifications for OW5000 Admin
C-1
Appendix C OW5000 Configuration Specification
Group Access Control
PBX based Control
----
Conference Bridge
--
2byte KANA
1byte KANA
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
25
-
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Add New Bridge
Show Allow List
Select
Extensions
--
Range Delete
Enable Extensions
Licensed Information
Pager Providers
--
--
Add New Pager Provider
PBX Settings.
Add New PBX
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Show Deny List
Select
M
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Bridge Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
25
-
Tenant
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
2
1-63
Monitored Number
Select
M
X
-
X
-
-
-
Ports
Input
M
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
Is Host Controlled
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Extension
Input
M
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
PBX
-
-
X
-
Top of the list
Off
X
X
X
X
X
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Dterm
X
X
X
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
1-63
1
X
X
X
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
JP
X
X
X
X
DID Number
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
50
-
X
X
X
X
telURI
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
128
-
X
X
X
X
SIPURI
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
50
-
X
X
X
X
SIP Access Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
NotAssigned
X
X
X
X
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
On
X
X
X
X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Subline
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
X
X
X
X
PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
2
1-63
1
X
-
0-9, #, *, 16 chars
ASCII only
Case-sensitive"
ASCII only
Case-insensitive"
"only one ""@"" must be required Case-sensitive"
0-9, #, *, 16 chars,
Max number of sublines is 32
X
X
X
Starting Extension
Input
M
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
X
X
X
Ending Extension
Extension pattern regular expression(for telURI)
Input
M
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
X
X
X
X
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
Default value should be ^([0-9,#,*]{1-16})$ same as the validation rule o
Extension page Extension edit box
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
Non-editable
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
Enabled
-
0-9, #, *, 16chars
Max number of ports is 32
X
(Collaborated Extension)
Is Monitored
M
ASCII only
X
Collaboration
Select
"ASCII only
Case-sensitive"
X
Tenant
Tenant
Remark
X
Country
^([0-9*#]{1,16})$
^([0-9*#]{1,16})$
X
Default value should be ^([0-9,#,*]{1-16})$ same as the validation rule o
Extension page Extension edit box
Non-editable
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X
X
X
PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
Check All
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X
X
X
SOAP
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
-
X
-
-
CSTA
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
-
X
-
GCP
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
-
X
-
-
PRESENCE
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X
X
X
API
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
Name
Input
M
X
-
-
-
Display license information (non-editable)
US Market Only
TAP Dialup(1-Way)
Input
O
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
TAP Dialup(2-Way)
Input
O
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
SNPP Host Name
Input
O
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Port (Number)
Input
O
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
MAX Length
PBX Name
Input
M
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
Input
M
X
-
-
*
-
-
Office Code(PBX Id)
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
--
IP Address
PBXs
X
X
M
Translation pattern regular expression(for SIPURI)
Licenses
X
X
Select
Extension pattern regular expression(for SIPURI)
--
X
X
Select
URI Format
Enable PBXs
X
Show Deny List
Translation pattern regular expression(for telURI)
Platform
-
Off
Show Allow List
Phone Type
Add New Extension
M
Range
*#
Special Chars
Input
Deny as Default
Length
Number
Group Name
Default Value
Related
Application
Access Control
Add New Group
Is
Mandatory
Asia (Other)
SIPUA Group
Input
Method
Parameter
Button Name
Australia,Europe
Tab Name
Japan
Application
North America
Group
Sales Regions
Alphabet
Available Char
--
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
-
X
X
X
X
a-z, A-Z, 0-9, - (dash), .(period)
-
X
X
X
X
4
-
X
X
X
X
40
Client/Server Port
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
PBX Type
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
Special Dial Code
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
None
X
-
-
-
Split Call Forward
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X
X
X
Locations
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
Pbx Reconnect Delay
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
Heartbeat Timeout
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
Off
UGN (User Group Number)
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Prefix
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
X
X
X
X
Input
O
X
-
-
*
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
SIP Server IP Address
SIP Server IP Address (port)
-
-
5060
IP Address(Ranges are not checked)
*:Only '.' is available
ASCII only
US Market Only
0-9, #, *, 16 chars
IP Address(Ranges are not checked)
*:Only '.' is available
1-65535
Appendix C OW5000 Configuration Specification (Cont'd)
Available Char
Add New Destineation PBX
Add New Source PBX
Platform
(cont'd)
Voice Mail Pilot Numbers
Route/Trunks
Serial Ports
Voice Mail Servers
--
--
-
General Settings
Special Chars
2byte KANA
1byte KANA
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
50
-
X
X
X
X
Country Code
Input
M
X
-
X
-
-
-
10
-
X
X
X
X
City/Area Code
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
X
X
X
X
Long Dist Access Code
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
X
X
X
X
Local Access Code
Int. Direct Dial Code
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
X
X
X
X
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
X
X
X
X
National Code
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
X
X
X
X
Locations
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Target City/Area Code
Input
M
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
X
X
X
X
Target Exchange
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
X
X
X
X
Direct Dial Code
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
X
X
X
X
Add New Monitored Number
Add New Pilot Number
Add New Trunk
Add New Serial Port
Add New Voice Mail Server
Add New Access Server
Include City/Area Code
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Destination PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Dialing Prefix
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
50
Extensions beginning with
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
Source PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Incoming Prefix
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
50
Number
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
Tenant
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
Applications Message Service
--
Server Settings
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
16
-
X
X
X
X
2
1-63
X
X
X
X
Top of the list
Top of the list
"ASCII only
Case-sensitive"
0-9, #, *, 16 chars
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Monitored Number
X
X
X
X
Application
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Un-assigned
X
X
X
X
Pilot Number
Route Number
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
X
Z
Z
Z
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
3
1-899
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
30
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Beginning Trunk
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
3
1-255
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Ending Trunk
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
3
1-255
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Tenant Number
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
1
1-63
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Is Monitored
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Is EOSN
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
-
-
-
Displays only when EOSN is installed and user login has EOSN Admin role
UserDefined 1
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
UserDefined 2
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
UserDefined 3
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
UserDefined 4
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Serial Port
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Baud Rate
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
300
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
DataBits ID
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
7
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Parity
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Even
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Stop Bits
Select
○
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
None
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Flow Control
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
HardWare
X
-
-
-
Name
Input
M
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Type
Select
O
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
System ID
Input
O
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Base URL
Input
O
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Server Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
a-z, A-Z, 0-9, - (dash), .(period)
-
X
-
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
IP Address
Input
M
X
-
-
*
-
-
-
40
Top of the list
-
-
-
UC700/MC550
US Market Only
X
X
X
X
IP Address
.(period)の
IP Address(Ranges are not checked)
*:Only '.' is available
Listen Port
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
-
6060
X
X
X
X
1025-65535
Legacy Port
--
--
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
-
62000
X
X
X
X
1025-65535
RPC Listen Port
Input
If AS, M
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
-
60002
X
X
X
X
1025-65535
TOS
Input
If AS, M
X
*
-
-
-
-
2
-
00
X
X
X
X
Keep Alive
Input
If AS, M
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1800
X
X
X
X
180-72000
Timer T1
Input
If AS, M
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
500
X
X
X
X
500-4000
Is PSGW
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X
X
X
Binding Type
Routing Rule
Select
If PSGW, M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
TCP/IP
X
X
X
X
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
100
X
X
X
X
Input
O
X
-
-
*
-
-
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
X
X
X
X
Port
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
1024-65535
X
X
X
X
Translation Pattern
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
100
X
X
X
X
Test Routing Rule
Test Routing Rule
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
100
X
X
X
X
--
TCP Service Poirt
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
ICA Name
Input
O
Legacy TCP/IP Port
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
1025-65535
Name Display Enabled in PBX
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Show External Number
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
Show DID Information
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
Password Required
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
Chime on Incoming Call to Subline
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
Outbound Call Log Size
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
Add New Routing Rule
--
Incoming Call Assistant
Redirect Configurations
Top of the list
Remark
Reserved Type
IP Address
Routing Info
Default Value
00-FF
*: From 'A' to 'F' are available
Access Server
Applications
Is
Mandatory
Range
*#
Input
Input
Method
Parameter
Length
Alphabet
Add New AreaCode Rule
PBX->PBX Dialing
Reserved Numbers
Number
AreaCode Rules
Related Application
Add New Location
--
PBXs
(cont)
Location Name
Button Name
Asia (Other)
Locations
Australia,Europe
Tab Name
Japan
Application
North America
Group
Sales Regions
Add New Redirect Configurations
1024-65535
5425
IP Address(Ranges are not checked)
*:Only '.' is available
X
X
X
X
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
5424
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
On
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
Off
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
Off
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
Off
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
-
Off
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
9
-
100
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Inbound Call Log Size
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
9
-
100
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Max Idle Time (seconds)
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
-
15
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Name Display Format for Employee Match
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Employee Display Name
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
PBX
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Redirect Number
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
PBX Settings
--
--
-Message Setting
Location Status Information
Add New Meesage
PBX Settings
--
Applications (Cont'd)
PBX Settings
--
MC550 Server
User Settings
--
OaiServer
PBX Settings
--
--
--
Add New
Remote Call Control
Normalization Rule
Test Rule
ACD Break Modes
Directory
ACD Split Modes
ACD Work Modes
-
-
-
-
-
-
Length
1byte KANA
2byte KANA
Special Chars
Number
*#
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
Incremental Retry Delay
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
5 sec - 55 min
30 seconds
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
OAI Timeout
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0 sec - 1 hr
10 minutes
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
5 seconds
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Max Retry Delay
Select
M
X
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
5 sec - 1 day
Data Mode
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
LED Number
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
X
X
X
X
40
O
X
Legacy TCP/IP Port
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
1025-65535
5421
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Display Status
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
On
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
-
-
0-999
15
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
-
-
Online
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Input
Password Required
Check
O
-
Max Idle Time
Input
O
X
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Default Online
Select
M
-
-
-
-
Default Offline
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Offline
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Default Idle
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Away from Desk
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
In a Meeting
Default Busy
Select
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Default Out of Office
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Out of Office
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Default Dterm
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Available
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
Available
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
X
X
50
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Default Mobility
Select
M
-
System Presence
Input
O
X
SIP Presence
Select
O
-
-
-
NONE
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
M
-
-
-
-
Select
-
-
PBX
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Force Port
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Heartbeat
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Selected
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
-
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Incremental Retry Delay
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
5 sec - 55 min
30 seconds
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
OAI Timeout
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0 sec - 1 hr
10 minutes
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
5 seconds
Max Retry Delay
Select
M
X
-
-
-
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
X*
M
-
X
Select
-
5 sec - 1 day
Data Mode
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
LED Number
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
Selected
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
On
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
Select
O
-
-
-
-
Data Mode
-
-
-
-
-
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
LED Number
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
Database Refresh Time (min)
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
VMMA Short Timer
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
Z
-
Z
Z
-
-
-
-
-
-
5
VMMA Long Timer
Input
O
X
SMFN Version
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
Special Outbound Dial Prefix
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
Default Outbound Caller ID
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
Send Caller ID for Outbound Dial
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Calling Name Override from Database
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Telephony Status Change Success Announcement
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
1-58
??
Telephony Status Change Failure Announcement
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
1-58
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
MC550
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
2
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
^([0-9*#]{1,16})$
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
^([0-9*#]{1,16})$
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
??
Z
-
Z
Z
-
MC550
RESERVED LINE SETTINGS
Select
O
-
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
Connect to Call if answered after
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
Connect to Call if answered before
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
0
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
Input
O
X
X
-
-
Caller id to be Displayed for Click to Call
-
-
-
16
-
^([0-9*#]{1,16})$
SMS Voice Mail Notification
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
Z
MC550
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
OAI Tenant Number
Input
M
X
-
0
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
0-63
M
-
2
Select
-
-
PBX
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
Select
Z
-
Z
Force Port
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
X
X
X
X
Heartbeat
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
X
X
X
X
-
On
Incremental Retry Delay
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
30 seconds
X
X
X
X
Max Retry Delay
Selected
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10 minutes
X
X
X
X
Enable Free Locatoin Facility
General Settings
-
Select
Select
RESERVED LINE STATUS OVERRIDES
Server Settings
-
Remark
Force Port
LSI Name
Server Settings
M
Default Value
Heartbeat
Selected
Incoming Call Assistant (Cont'd)
Select
Is
Mandatory
Range
PBX
Input
Method
Related
Application
Parameter
Asia (Other)
Button Name
Australia,Europe
Tab Name
Japan
Application
Sales Regions
North America
Group
Alphabet
Available Char
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Listen Port
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
1-65535
O
X
-
X
-
Select
-
-
-
3
-
O
-
-
Country Code
Check
-
-
X
X
0
X
X
X
X
X
Use tenant 1
RCC runs on 5060
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Phone pattern regular expression
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
Translation pattern
Input
O
X
X
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
Input
O
X
X
X
-
Comment
X
-
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
Test dialed number
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
16
-
X
X
X
X
Translated number(for test translation number)
Input
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Test ANI
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
16
-
X
X
X
X
Destination PBX
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Max 16 digit.
0-9,#,* are available.
Not editable
Max 16 digit.
0-9,#,* are available.
Not editable
Translated number(for test ANI translation)
Input
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
(click pencil)
Enter the description for break mode X
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
32
-
Z
Z
Z
Z
(click pencil)
Category Name
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
32
-
T
T
T
T
Mode Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
50
-
T
-
-
-
for UC Agent Only
Description
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
50
-
T
-
-
-
for UC Agent Only
ACD Name
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
T
-
-
-
for UC Agent Only
ACD Pilot Number
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
50
-
T
-
-
-
Enter the description for work mode X
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
32
-
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/UA5200
Is VIP Wake-up Processing work mode
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/UA5200
Add New Split Mode
(click pencil)
UC700/UA5200
for UC Agent Only
Appendix C OW5000 Configuration Specification (Cont'd)
Organizations
-
-
Add New DID
Add New
Add New
Person
Directory (Cont'd)
Range
Length
1byte KANA
2byte KANA
Special Chars
*#
Alphabet
Remark
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Category Description
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
100
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Extension
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Company
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Name
Select
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X*
X*
X*
50
Type
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Notes
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
1000
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PHONE NUMBERS
Add New
Select
ADDRESS
Add New
Select
O
-
-
-
Name
M
X
X
X
Type
M
-
-
-
Notes
Not Set
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
X
50
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
1000
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
LOCATIONS
Add New
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
PHONE NUMBERS
Add New
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
First Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
30
-
X
X
X
X
Last Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
30
-
X
X
X
X
Middle Name
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
30
-
X
X
X
X
Display Name
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
16
-
X
X
X
X
Prefix
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Suffix
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
SIP URI
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
X
X
X
X
SIP Access Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Not Assigned
X
X
X
X
SIPUA Group
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Not Assigned
X
X
X
X
IM URI
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
IM Access Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Voice Mail Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Not selectable before Voice Mail Server setting
Subscriber ID
Input
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Not editalebefore Voice Mail Server setting
Special Dial Code
Input
O
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Add Photo
Input
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined1
Input
O
100
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined2
Input
O
100
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined3
Input
O
100
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined4
Input
O
100
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Not Assigned
"only one ""@"" must be required Case-sensitive"
UserDefined5
Input
O
100
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined6
Input
O
100
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Note
URI key parameter
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
1000
-
X
X
X
X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Translation pattern regular expression
User
People
Add Role
Employee
Primary Extension
Secondary Extension
Tertiary Extension
Contact Method
Default Value
Category Name
URI Format
Role
Is
Mandatory
Related
Application
Locations
-
Add New
Input
Method
Parameter
Asia (Other)
DIDs
-
Button Name
Australia,Europe
Categories
Tab Name
Japan
Application
Sales Regions
North America
Group
Number
Available Char
Add New Contact Method
Assured Mobility WiFi
Other Work Phone Number
FAX
Dual Mode Number
Wireless
Primary Extension
only one "@" must be required
Following key can be selected
-Primary Extension
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
LoginID
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
X
X
X
X
New Password
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
8chars or longer, includes 1 number, 1 capital, 1 small, 1 special
Confirm New Password
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Same as above
NTLM Login ID
Check
O
Login is disabled
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
Z
Z
Z
X
X
X
X
Password never expires
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Db Tool - Import/Export OW5000 Data
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
OW5000 Administrator
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
Off
UC700/MC550
Confidential Status
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
EmployeeID
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
20
-
X
X
X
X
Employee Position
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UA5200
Employee Type
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UA5200
Organization
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Location
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Confidential Status
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Priority
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
X
X
X
X
PBX Name
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
Extension
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
* Pilot Number
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Dterm Password
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UA5200
Confidentiality Status
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Priority
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
PBX Name
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Extension
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Dterm Password
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Confidentiality Status
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Priority
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
X
X*
X*
X*
MC550
PBX Name
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X*
X*
X*
MC550
Extension
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X*
X*
X*
MC550
Confidentiality Status
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
MC550
* Primary Extension only
Appendix C OW5000 Configuration Specification (Cont'd)
--
1byte KANA
-
-
-
Depend of the E164 counetry
Select
M
M
Priority
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
PIN
Input
M
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Is 2 way
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
No
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Pager Provider
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
None
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Confidentiality Status
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
None
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Country
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Depend of the E164 country
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Number
Input
M
X
-
X
-
-
-
50
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Priority
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Confidentiality Status
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
None
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Internet Address
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Priority
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Confidentiality Status
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
None
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Address Type
Select
M
-
-
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Country/Region
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Default Country Code
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Street
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
City
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
State/Province
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Zip/Postal Code
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
9
X
X
X
X
X
128
-
-
-
-
-
-
Range
2byte KANA
-
Length
*#
Special Chars
Number
-
-
ManageCustomerField
Positions
-
Add New Position
Specialities
-
Add New Specialty
User Privileges
Application Data
-
-
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
UserDefined1
X
X*
X*
X*
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined2
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined3
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined4
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
From
Input
M
X
To
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
128
-
UserDefined 1
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
25
-
UserDefined 1(Required)
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
UserDefined 2
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
25
-
UserDefined 2(Required)
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
UserDefined 3
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
25
-
UserDefined 3(Required)
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
UserDefined 4
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
25
-
UserDefined 4(Required)
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
UserDefined 5
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
25
UserDefined 5(Required)
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
UserDefined 6
--
--
UserDefined5
UC700/MC550/UA5200
"ASCII only
Case-insensitive"
"ASCII only
Case-insensitive"
Note: This field is for the custom label.
Note: This field is for the custom label.
Note: This field is for the custom label.
Note: This field is for the custom label.
Note: This field is for the custom label.
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
25
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined 6(Required)
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Full Name Format
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Title
Input
M
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Abbreviation
Input
O
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Description
Input
M
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
User
Check
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Employee
Check
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
US Market Only
LoginID
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
New Password
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
Confirm New Password
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
UserDefined6
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
8chars or longer, includes 1 number, 1 capital, 1 small, 1 special
-
X
X
X
X
Same as above
X
Z
Z
Z
Login is Disabled
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Password never expires
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Employee Name
Input
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
DbTool - Import/Export OW5000 Data
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
OW5000 Administrator
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Value
Input
M
X
X
X
X
2000
Note: This field is for the custom label.
X
NTLM Login ID
--
X
X
Range Delete
Full Name Format
Users
Related Application
--
Add New Address
-
Remark
Input
Home Email Address
Instant Messageing
Other Email Address
Other Email Pager
Personal Homepage
Text Messaging
Voice Mail
Work Email Address
Work Email Pager
Addresses
Directory (Cont'd)
-
Default Value
Number
External Fax
External Primary Number
External Secondary Number
External Tertiary Number
Hone Phone Number
Add New Contact Method (Cont'd)
Mobile Phone
Phone Pager
People (Con'td)
Is
Mandatory
Country
Alpha Pager
Contact Method (Cont'd)
Input
Method
Parameter
Asia (Other)
Button Name
Australia,Europe
Tab Name
Japan
Application
Sales Regions
North America
Group
Alphabet
Available Char
X
Appendix C OW5000 Configuration Specification (Cont'd)
Add New Country/Region
Countries & States
Add New State/Province
M
-
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
JP
http://(server)/ReportServer
-
-
-
-
-
Blank(default)
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
1025-65535
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Length
1byte KANA
Range
Select
Check
-
2byte KANA
-
Select the default home page
Password never expires
*#
-
-
Special Chars
Number
-
M
M
Default Password Validity Period
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
IP Address / Name
Input
M
X
-
-
*
-
-
Port
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
5
SMTP Server Name
Input
O
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1-65535
X
X
X
X
-
1-65535
X
X
X
X
X
Input
O
SMTP Secure Port
Input
O
X
Username
Input
O
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Password
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
24
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Sender Email
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
80
X
Description
Input
Input
-
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Country Code
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
3
-
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Check
O
-
-
-
Is Default For CountryCode
-
-
-
-
Name
Is Default For Install
Input
Check
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
O
-
-
-
X
Code
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Enabled
Check
Recurring Type
Select
-
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
M
Edit with calenM
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Start Date
X
-
-
-
-
Start Time
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
Recurrence Pattern Occurs
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
25
-
Profiles
Weekly
Recurring
0:00-23:59
Daily
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
UC700/MC550
X
Z
Z
Z
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
1-366
Recur every X weeks on:
Input
O
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
O
-
-
-
Check
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Monday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Tuesday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Wednesday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Thursday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Friday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Saturday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
Day A of every B month(s)
Select
O
Profile which has been created by DBtool are listed. The profile which has
schedule information is NOT listed up. It is selectable when click Schedule
Profile, but not for clicking pencil case
X
X
X
2
US Market Only
X
Sunday
Monthly
X
A
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
2
1-31
(blank)
X
X
X
X
B
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
2
1-12
(blank)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
C
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
first
X
X
X
D
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
Sunday
X
X
X
X
E
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
(blank)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Available only when #13 is selected
No end Date
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Default
End By X
Select
O
Edit with calenO
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
The C D of every E month(s)
2
1-12
Duration of Recurrence
X
X
Start Date
Edit with calenM
-
-
Select
M
-
-
-
Start Time
-
-
-
-
Retention Days
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
File Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
Enabled
Check
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Recurring Type
Select
M
Edit with calenM
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Start Date
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Select
M
-
-
-
Start Time
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Recurrence Pattern Occurs
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Daily
Every X Day(s)
X
-
-
14
Recurring
0:00-23:59
Daily
X
X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Weekly
Database BackUp
X
X
X
X
Schedule Profile
(or click pencil)
X
Remark
Server SMTP Port
Every X Day(s)
Settings
-
Select
Input
Daily
DBTool
-
Select the default country code
Reporting Services URL
Default Value
Related
Application
---
Parameter
Asia (Other)
General Settings
Button Name
Australia,Europe
Tab Name
Sales Regions
Japan
Application
Is
Mandatory
North America
Group
Input
Method
Alphabet
Available Char
-
2
1-12
Recur every X weeks on:
Input
O
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Check
O
-
-
-
Sunday
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Monday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Tuesday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Wednesday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Thursday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Friday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Saturday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
Monthly
Day A of every B month(s)
X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
A
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
2
1-31
(blank)
X
X
X
X
B
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
2
1-12
(blank)
X
X
X
X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
The C D of every E month(s)
C
D
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
E
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
first
2
1-12
X
Sunday
X
X
X
X
(blank)
X
X
X
X
Appendix C OW5000 Configuration Specification (Cont'd)
-
-
-
Range
1byte KANA
-
Length
2byte KANA
-
*#
-
Special Chars
Number
Is
Mandatory
Default Value
Duration of Recurrence
Settings (Cont'd)
Database Backup (Cont'd)
Schedule Profile (or click Pencil ico
History
--
No end Date
Select
O
End By X
Select
X
Start Date
Start Time
Templates
Template Management
Add New Template
-
-
MA4000 Integration -
-
Version Information --
--
-
--
Related
Application
Input
Method
Parameter
Asia (Other)
Button Name
Australia,Europe
Tab Name
Japan
Application
Sales Regions
North America
Group
Alphabet
Available Char
X
X
X
X
Available only when #13 is selected
X
X
X
X
Default
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Edit with cale O
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Edit with cale M
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Select
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
M
--
Remark
Template Type
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
Template Name
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
SIP Access Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
IM Access Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
SIPUA Group
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Prefix
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Suffix
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Voice Mail Server
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Subscriber ID
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Special Dial Code
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Add Photo
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Note
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
UserDefined1
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
UserDefined2
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
UserDefined3
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
UserDefined4
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
UserDefined5
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
UserDefined6
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Employee
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Guest
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Patient
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Physician
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Student
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
User
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Primary Exchange Email
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
ExchangeServer
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
ACD LogIn
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
ACD Server Name
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
CONTACT METHODS
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Billing
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Home
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Shipping
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Work
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Enable MA4000 Intagration
Check
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
OW5000 Base URL
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
MA4000 Base URL
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Login
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Passeord
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Server Name
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
ServerInstance
Input
O
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Login
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Passeord
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Database Name
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
DB Sync Listen Port
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Synchronize Prime Lines in MA4000 as Extensions in OW5000
Synchronize Line Appearances in MA4000 as Sublines in
OW5000
Contact Method Email
Select
Check
Select
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
In Ascending Order
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Only ringing Line Appearances
X
-
-
-
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Primary Extension
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Contact Method Extension 2
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
100
Primary Extension
X
US Market Only
Contact Method Extension 3
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Unit Type Hierarchy to import MA4000 Units
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Auto Create UC700 Users
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
SIP Access Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
IM Access Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
X
X
X
X
--
--
Appendix C OW5000 Configuration Specification (Cont'd)
Available Char
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
O
-
-
-
-
Length
Sender IM Uri
Select
X
X
X
Receiver IM Uri
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
IM Text
Input
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
IM Log Age
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
3
X
X
X
X
Maximum File Size
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
3
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
Blank(default)
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1 - 500
IM Archiving Password
Input
Enabled
Check
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Start Date
Edit with cale M
X
-
-
-
-
-
Start Time
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
Recurrence Pattern Occurs
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Every X Day(s)
X
Configure
Recurring
0:00-23:59
Daily
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Weekly
IM Archiving Management
-
2
1-12
Recur every X weeks on:
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Sunday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Monday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Tuesday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Wednesday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Thursday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Friday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Saturday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Monthly
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
2
1-31
(blank)
B
Input
2
1-12
(blank)
Day A of every B month(s)
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
C
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
D
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
E
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
The C D of every E month(s)
2
1-12
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Sunday
X
X
X
X
(blank)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Available only when #13 is selected
No end Date
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Default
End By X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
Calendar Link
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Select
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
-
-
-
-
When Outlook Appointment Expires
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
Email Server Type
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
Collaboration Settings
-
-
-
Conference Configuration
ACD Accounts
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
UC700/MC550
UC700/MC550
Exchange Server
Input
M
X
X
X
X
255
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Exchange Admin
Input
M
X
X
X
X
255
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Exchange Admin Password
Add New Email Server Link
-
M
-
General Settings
-
X
Edit with cale M
Start Time
History
Client Settings
UC700
Edit with cale O
Start Date
General Settings
Email Servers
X
first
Duration of Recurrence
Calendar Link
Remark
X
Recurring Type
Daily
IMs
-
Default Value
Related
Application
---
Range
O
O
Is
Mandatory
1byte KANA
*#
Special Chars
Select
Input
Input
Method
Parameter
2byte KANA
Number
Alphabet
Start Date
End Date
Button Name
Asia (Other)
View Logs
Australia, Europe
Tab Name
Japan
Application
North America
Group
Sales Regions
Input
M
255
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Exchange Admin Email
Input
O
X
X
X
X
255
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Domain Controller
Input
M
X
X
X
X
255
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Active Directory User
Input
M
X
X
X
X
255
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Active Directory User Password
Input
M
X
X
X
X
255
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Domino Server
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Z
Z
Z
Z
Input
M
X
X
X
X
Allow clients to search for employees in
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
255
-
Display Home Phone
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Never
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Display Mobile Phone
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Always
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Ping Interval
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
2
1 to 60
10
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Collaboration Support
Select
O
-
Enabled
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Server Protocol
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
HTTP
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Server URI
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Server Port
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
1025 - 65535
80
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
-
Enabled
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
1025 - 65535
8731
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Z
-
-
-
UC700
US Market Only
Z
-
-
-
UC700
US Market Only
--
-
-
-
-
-
Enable UC700 Conferencing
Select
O
Conferencing Server Port Number
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
ACD server name
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ACD LogIn
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
All Companies
1 - 999999999
X
X*
Z
-
UC700
Supported
Display but supported only for the application described in Related Application
Display only when the application described in Related Application is installed
Not Supported
Appendix C-2
Specifications for OW5000 Admin
Appendix D - 1
Appendix D
OW5000 Administrator
Configuration Specification
Appendix D-1 Configuration Specification
Group
Application
Access Control
Tab Name
SIPUA Group
-
-
-
Group Access
Control
-
-
-
PBX Based Control
-
-
-
Extensions
-
External Numbers
Enable PBXs
Licenses
OW5000 API
usCSTA
Call Control API
OW5000 API
LCS/OCS IntegraCall Notifications Information API
tion
API
-
-
Wait maximum 30 min or
Restart All
OWAccessServers.
Applied Immediately
Platform
Pager Providers
Licensed Information
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PBX Settings
Locations
PBXs
-
Restart (Remote Call
Control)
-
Enable Extensions
Wait maximum 30 min or
Restart All
OWAccessServers
Applied Immediately
(except Phone Type and
If these values are
Applied Immediately SIPURL.
modified, wait maximum 30
min or Restart All
OWAccessServers.)
Applied Immediately
-
SIMPLE
SIP Presence
AreaCode Rules
PBX >PBX Dialing
Restart System
-
Wait maximum 60
min or Restart IIS
and OWTelephony
Event Notification
Restart (Remote Call
Control)
Reserved Numbers
Voice Mail s
-
-
-
-
Route/Trunks
-
-
-
-
-
Serial Ports
-
-
-
-
-
Voice Mail Servers
-
-
-
-
-
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Appendix D - 2
Group
Applications
OW5000 Administrator Configuration Specification
Application
Tab Name
OW5000 API
usCSTA
Call Control API
OW5000 API
LCS/OCS IntegraCall Notifications Information API
tion
API
SIMPLE
SIP Presence
Access Server(Local)
-
-
Access Server(REMOTE)
-
-
-
Access Server(PSGW)
-
-
-
Restart OW5000
Application Message
Service
Routing Info
-
-
-
Wait maximum 30 min or
Restart All OW/
AccessServers
Conference
Manager
-
-
-
-
PBX Settings
-
-
-
-
Server Settings
-
-
-
-
Conference Server
Incoming Call
Assistant
Location Status
Information
OaiServer
Wait maximum 30 min or
Restart All OW/
AccessServers
Redirect
Configurations
PBX Settings
-
-
-
-
Server Settings
-
-
-
-
Message Settings
-
-
-
-
PBX Settings
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Server Settings
PBX Settings
Restart (OaiServer)
General Settings
-
-
Normalization Rule
-
-
Restart (Remote Call
Control)
Categories
-
-
-
-
-
DIDs
-
-
-
-
-
Locations
-
-
-
-
-
Organizations
-
-
-
-
-
-
Applied Immediately
Remote Call Control
Person
People
Directory
Applied Immediately
-
Role
-
Contact Method
Applied Immediately
Addresses
-
-
-
-
Full Name Format
-
-
-
Positions
-
-
-
-
Specialties
-
-
-
-
Organizations
-
-
-
-
Locations
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
User Privileges
Security
Users
-
Applied Immediately
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Administrator Configuration Specification
OW5000 API
usCSTA
Call Control API
OW5000 API
LCS/OCS IntegraCall Notifications Information API
tion
API
Appendix D - 3
SIMPLE
SIP Presence
Group
Application
Tab Name
Application Data
-
-
-
-
-
-
Settings
-
General Settings
-
-
-
-
Schedule
-
-
-
-
MA4000
Integration
-
-
-
-
-
-
Version
Information
-
-
-
-
-
-
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Appendix D - 4
OW5000 Administrator Configuration Specification
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Appendix E - 1
Appendix E
Single Sign-On
Single Sign-On provides a way for users to use their NTLM Login for
logging in to the UCE Applications. Currently OW5000 Administrator,
UC700, MC550 and Roles support Single Sign-On.
Single Sign-On requires NEC CAS to be configured. NEC CAS is
configured as part of MA4000 Integration. If OW5000 is not integrated
with MA4000, the NEC CAS URL can be set from the Settings page.
Refer to “Settings Configuration” on page 11.
Single Sign-On also requires the user to have a NTLM Login defined.
Refer to “User Management” on page 158.
Logging into OW5000 Administrator or UCE Applications
Listed below are three different ways to login to OW5000 Administrator
or UCE Applications.
• Trusted Authentication
• LDAP Authentication
• OW5000 Login
Trusted Authentication
In trusted mode, the application uses Windows APIs to get the user's
Windows login and then looks up the user via the NTLM Login defined
for the user. The process trusts the identity provided via the APIs. The
user does not have to enter a password.
NEC CAS Configuration is a must for MC550 and OW5000 Administrator.
UC700 does not require NEC CAS to be configured. Roles does not
support Trusted Authentication.
LDAP Authentication
In LDAP mode, the user is authenticated against a LDAP Server. The
user will have to enter the LDAP login and password to login. The
application authenticates against a LDAP Server and then looks up the
user via the NTLM Login, defined in the User Role for the user.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Appendix E - 2
Single Sign-On
OW5000 Login
This is the traditional way to login to an OW5000 system using the
OW5000 built in username and password. Here the user inputs the
OW5000 login Id and password to login. NEC CAS configuration is NOT
required.
NEC CAS Configuration is a must for UC700, MC550, OW5000
Administrator and UA5200.
NEC CAS Configuration Modes
NEC CAS can be configured in the following three different modes
• Windows
• LDAP
• Internal DB
NOTE
For more information on setting up these modes, reference Chapter 5 of the UC for
Enterprise (UCE) NEC Centralized Authentication Service (NEC CAS) Installation
Guide.
Windows
NEC CAS passes the user's credentials to the Windows operating
system, leaving it up to the domain implementation to authenticate the
user. Multiple domains may be authenticated against in this mode.
Trusted Authentication will work for MC550 and OW5000 Administrator only in this
mode.
NOTE
LDAP
In this mode, NEC CAS passes the user's credentials to configured LDAP
authority. A single domain may be authenticated against in this mode.
Internal DB
In this mode, NEC CAS authenticates the user's credentials with its
internal Database.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Single Sign-On
Appendix E - 3
Single-Sign On based on NEC CAS Configuration
Following are different scenarios describing the Single-Sign On, based
on NEC CAS configuration.
NEC CAS Authentication Mode—set to Windows (recommended)
Trusted Authentication
• The NTLM login field must be configured with the Windows user login
(machine name\username) or (domain name\username). The
preferred method is (domain name\username).
• MC550 and UC700 will login provided the user has logged in to the
machine with the windows credentials defined in the NTLM Login field.
Check Use Windows Authentication and click Login. OW5000
Administrator will automatically login when opening the OW5000
Administrator home page.

In this case, MC550 and OW5000 Administrator rely on NEC CAS for
authentication.
NOTE
Since UC700 is installed on the physical machine, it has access to the operating
system and can query the Windows login user name. Therefore, it will login
automatically as long as the Windows User login is defined in the OW5000 NTLM
Login field for the user.
However, MC550 and OW5000 Admin rely on NEC CAS to determine the Windows
Identity. Therefore, they need NEC CAS to be configured to Windows Authentication
in order to know the Windows User Login.
does not support Trusted Authentication.
NOTE
LDAP Authentication
• The NTLM Login field must be configured with the Windows user login
(machine name\username) or (domain name\username).
• Do not check Use Windows Authentication in UC700 and MC550.
• In MC550, UC700, Roles and OW5000 Administrator, the user must
login as follows: (domain name\username) and password.

In this case, MC550, UC700, Roles and OW5000 Administrator pass
the typed credentials to NEC CAS and NEC CAS verifies the received
credential with LDAP Server.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Appendix E - 4
Single Sign-On
NEC CAS Authentication mode—set to LDAP
Trusted Authentication
• UC700 will login regardless of CAS setup, as long as the Windows user
login is defined in the OW5000 NTLM Login field for the user.
• MC550 and OW5000 Administrator will not work. This is a limitation.
The reason is because IIS for NEC CAS Login is not set to Windows
Authentication, therefore it fails to query the Windows identity of the
user logged in.
does not support Trusted Authentication.
NOTE
LDAP Authentication
• The NTLM login field must be configured with the LDAP user defined in
the LDAP Active Directory Server. This is usually a form of username
only (administrator, jsmith).
• The MC550, UC700, Roles and OW5000 Administrator user name field
must be the same as the username specified in the LDAP Active
Directory.
• The MC550, UC700, Roles and OW5000 Administrator password field
must be the same as the password set for the LDAP Active Directory.
NEC CAS Authentication—set to Internal DB
Trusted Authentication
• UC700 will login regardless of the CAS setup, as long as the Windows
user login is defined in the OW5000 NTLMLogin field of the user.
• MC550 and OW5000 Administrator will not work. This is a limitation.
The reason is because IIS for NEC CAS Login is not set to Windows
Authentication; therefore it fails to query the Windows identity of the
user logged in.
does not support Trusted Authentication.
NOTE
LDAP Authentication
This mode does not work for MC550, UC700, Roles and OW5000
Administrator because NEC CAS uses its own internal database.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
For additional information or support on this NEC Corporation
product, contact your NEC Corporation representative.
NEC NEC Corporation
UC for Enterprise (UCE) Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000)
Configuration Guide
NDA-31085, Revision 9
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement